You are on page 1of 285

HARYANA VIDYUT PRASARAN NIGAM LIMITED

BIDDING DOCUMENT NO. WB-014



(PACKAGE B )


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

OF

132 kV S/C LINES (NEW DESIGN)

AND

D/C LINES WITH (KRR DESIGN)


(VOLUME-II, PART-2)



Chief Engineer/ MM,
Haryana Vidyut Prasaran Nigam Limited
Shakti Bhawan, Sector-6
Panchkula-134109
Tel/Fax: 0172-2591742


April-2012





SECTION VI (PART-II)


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION


CONTENTS


CHAPTER-I - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR TOWERS


CHAPTER-II GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS


CHAPTER-III (A)-TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF CONDUCTOR
AND EARTHWIRE.

CHAPTER-III (B)-TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF DISC
INSULATORS.

CHAPTER-III (C)-TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF SILICONE
RUBBER POLYMER INSULATORS.

CHAPTER-III (D)-TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF BUS POST
INSULATORS.

CHAPTER-III (E)-TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF HARDWARE
FITTING AND ACCESSORIES.

CHAPTER-IV - TECHNICAL DATA/INFORMATION (GTP) TO BE
SUBMTTED WITH THE BID









SECTION-VI










(PART-II)









CHAPTER-I








SECTION-VI (CHAPTER-I )


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION


CONTENTS

Clause No. Description Page No.

1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND SCOPE 1

1.2 DETAIL OF TRANSMISSION LINE ROUTES AND 3
TERRAIN
1.3 RESULTS OF SURVEYS 3
1.4 ACCESS TO THE LINE AND RIGHT OF WAY 3
1.5 DETAILED SURVEY, OPTIMISATION OF TOWER 3
LOCATION
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 8
1.7 TECHNICAL DATA 9
1.8 STATUTORY REGULATIONS AN STANDARDS 9
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE, INSPECION AN TESTING 10
1.10 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF 132 KV LINE 11
2.0 DETAIL OF LINE MATERIAL FOR 132 KV LINE 11
2.1 PARTICULAR OF CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE 12
2.2 PARTICULAR OF INSULATOR STRING WITH 12
STANDARD DISC INSULATIORS
2.3 INSULATOR STRING HARDWARE 13
2.4 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTOR AND 14
EARTHWIRE
3.0 TRANSMISSION TOWERS 14
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE TOWER 14
3.2 TYPE OF TOWER 14
3.3 SPANS AND CLEARANCES 17
3.4 MAXIMUM TENSION 19
3.5 MATERIALS 24
3.6 TOWER ACCESSORIES 25
3.7 TOWR FABRICALTION 26
3.8 GALVANISING 28
3.9 EARTHING 28
3.10 INSPECTION AND TESTS 28
3.11 TESTING SOF TOWERS 32
3.12 STANDARDS 36
4.0 TOWER FOUNDATION 40
4.3 TYPEOF SOIL 40
4.4 FOUNDATION TYPES 43
4.6 PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE & REINFORCEMENT44
4.7 UNIT RATES AND MEASUREMENT 46
4.8 CONSTRUCTION OF TOWER FOUNDATIONS 46
4.9 SETTING OF STUBS 47
4.10 STUB SETTING TEMPLATES 47
4.11 MIXING, PLACING AND COMPACTING OF 47
CONCRETE
4.12 BACK-FILLING AND REMOVAL OF STUB 48
TEMPLATE
4.14 PROTECTION OF TOWER FOOTING 49
4.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL PLAN 49
5.0 TOWER ERECTION, STRINGING AND 50
INSTALLATION OF LINE MATERIAL
5.1 GENERAL 50
5.2 TREATMENT OF MINOR GALVANISING DAMAGE 50
5.3 ASSEMBLY 50
5.4 TIGHTENING ANDPUNCHING OF BOLTS & NUTS 51
5.5 INSULATOR HOISTING 51
5.6 HANDLING OF CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE 51
5.7 STRINGING OF CONDUCTOR & EARTHWIRE 53
5.8 JOINTING 53
5.9 SAGGING-IN-OPERATION 53
5.10 TENSIONING AND SAGGING OF CONDUCTOR 54
AND EARTHWIRE
5.11 CLIPPING IN 54
5.12 FIXING OF CONDUCTOR ANDEARTHWIRE 54
ACCESSORIES
5.13 REPLACEMENT 54
5.14 PERMITTED EXTRA CONSUPTION OF LINE 55
MATERIALS
5.15 FINAL CHECKING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 55
6.1 GENERAL TECHCIAL CONDITIONS 56
6.2 ENGINEERING DATA 56
6.3 DRAWINGS 56
6.4 DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS 58
6.5 DESIGN COORDINATION 58
6.6 DESIGN REVIEW MEETING 58
6.7 PACKING 58
7.1 ERECTION CONDITIONS 59
7.2 REGULATION OF LOCAL AUTHORITIES AND 59
STATUTES
7.3 BIDDERSS FIELD OPERATION 59
7.4 PROGRESS REPORT 59
7.5 MAN-POWER DEPLOYMENT REPORT 59
7.6 FIRE PROTECTION 60
7.7 SECURITY 60
7.8 MATERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE 60
7.9 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT 61
7.10 FIELD OFFICE RECORDS 61
7.11 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND 61
BIDDERS LIABILITY
7.12 PROTECTIONS OF MOUNMENTS AND 62
REFERENCE POINTS
7.13 WORK AND SAFETY REGULATIONS 62
7.14 FOREIGN PERSONNEL 64
7.15 CODE REQUIREMENTS 65





SECTION-VI
(CHAPTER-I)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0 General Information and scope
1.1 Scope:
1.1.1 This specification covers detailed survey, profiling & Check survey, tower
spotting/optimization of tower location, soil resistivity measurements and
Geotechnical investigation, New tower Design, Proto-testing, fabrication and
supply of all 132 kV S/C line towers of 0.4sq ACSR ZEBRA as per Bidders
Design including bolts, nuts and washers, hanger, D-shackle and all type of tower
accessories like phase plate, circuit plate, number plate, danger plate, anti-
climbing device etc. Design, selecting type of foundation for different tower
heights and casting of foundation for tower footing, erection of towers, tack
welding of bolts and nuts including supply and application of zinc rich paint, tower
earthing, fixing of insulator string, stringing of conductors and earthwires alongwith
all necessary line accessories and testing and commissioning of the erected
132kV S/C lines with 0.4sq ACSR Zebra.

1.1.2 This specification also covers the Design, fabrication and supply of Gantry
structure for 132kV S/C line of 0.4sq ACSR Zebra under crossing the various
existing 220kV and 400kV transmission lines including bolts, nuts and washers,
hanger, D-shackle and all type of accessories like phase plate, circuit plate,
number plate, danger plate, anti-climbing device etc. Design, selecting type of
foundation, casting of foundation for gantry footing, erection of gantries, tack
welding of bolts and nuts including supply and application of zinc rich paint, gantry
earthing, fixing of insulator string, stringing of conductors and earthwires alongwith
all necessary line accessories. All the clauses in the specification will be relevant
for the gantry structures also unless stated otherwise.

1.1.3 This specification also covers detailed survey, profiling & Check survey, tower
spotting/optimization of tower location, soil resistivity, measurements and
Geotechnical investigation, fabrication and supply of all 132 kV D/C
transmission line towers as per KRR Design of HVPNL including bolts, nuts
and washers, hanger, D-shackle and all type of tower accessories like phase plate,
circuit plate, number plate, danger plate, anti-climbing device etc., selecting type of
foundation for different tower heights and casting of foundation for tower footing ,
erection of towers, tack welding of bolts and nuts including supply and application
of zinc rich paint, tower earthing, fixing of insulator string, stringing of conductors
and earthwires alongwith all necessary line accessories and testing and
commissioning of the erected 132kV D/C transmission lines .

1.1.4 This specification also covers the fabrication and supply of Gantry structure
for 132kV D/C lines as per KRR Design of HVPNL under crossing the various
existing 220kV and 400kV transmission lines including bolts, nuts and washers,
hanger, D-shackle and all type of accessories like phase plate, circuit plate,
number plate, danger plate, anti-climbing device etc., selecting type of foundation,
casting of foundation for gantry footing, erection of gantries, tack welding of bolts
and nuts including supply and application of zinc rich paint, gantry earthing, fixing
of insulator string, stringing of conductors and earthwires alongwith all necessary
line accessories. All the clauses in the specification will be relevant for the gantry
structures also unless stated otherwise.
Page-1


1.1.5 This specification includes the supply of Anti-fog type insulator or Polymer Silicone
Rubber insulator and their hardwares, conductor and earthwire, earthwire
suspension and tension clamps and all other line accessories for conductor &
earthwire i.e. mid-span compression joints for conductor and earthwire, repair
sleeve for conductor, vibration damper for conductor and earthwire, flexible copper
bond which shall be supplied by the bidder during execution of the project. The
bidder shall clearly indicate in the offer the sources from where he proposes to
procure the raw materials and the components. The type of insulator (whether
Anti -Fog disc type or Silicone Rubber Polymer type) to be used shall be
clearly indicated in the bid by the bidder.

All the raw materials such as steel, zinc for galvanizing, reinforcement steel and
cement for tower foundation, coke and salt for tower earthing etc. ,bolts, nuts,
washers, D-shackles, hangers, links, danger plates, phase plate, number plate,
circuit plate, anti climbing devices etc, required for tower manufacture and erection
shall be included in the bidders scope of supply. Bidder shall clearly indicate in the
offer, the sources from where he proposes to procure the raw material and the
components.

1.1.6 The entire stringing work of conductor and earthwire shall be carried out by
standard stringing practice. The bidder shall indicate in the offer, the detail
description of the procedure to be deployed for stringing operation.

1.1.7 The following 132 kV transmission lines are included in the scope of the bidder for
this package.

S.No. Name of Line Tentative Length
of Line (approx.)
1. 132 KV D/C Line from 400kV S/Stn. Deepalpur to 132kV
S/Stn. Tajpur with 0.4sq ACSR.
9.540 Km
2. 132 KV S/C line on S/C tower from 220kV S/stn. Batta to
Dhanouri with ACSR 0.4sq Zebra.
20.00 Km
3. 132 KV S/C line on S/C tower from 220kV S/stn. Batta to
Padla with ACSR 0.4sq Zebra.
18.090 Km
4. 132 KV S/C line on D/C towers from 220kV S/Stn. Batta to
132kV S/Stn. Rajound with 0.4sq ACSR
28.060 Km
5. 132 KV S/C line on D/C towers from 132kV S/Stn.
Dhudiawali to Kariwala with 0.4sq ACSR.
14.00 Km


The tentative bill of quantities for this line is indicated in the schedule of quantities
alongwith Annexure-I B of this document. However, any item(s) though not
specifically mentioned, but which are required to make the line(s) complete in all
respect for safe, efficient, reliable and trouble free operation shall be deemed to
supplied and erected by the Bidder.



Page-2

1.1.8 LOCATION DETAILS:
The above line will be laid in the state of Haryana.
1.1.8 The contractor shall have to erect the 132 kV transmission lines completely up to
terminal arrangements.
1.1.9 The entire work shall be executed by the successful bidder in compliance of
Environment Management Plan (EMP) and Resettlement & Rehabilitation
Action Plan (RRAP) reports. This shall be taken into account in the bid.

1.2 Detail of Transmission Line Routes and Terrain.

The transmission line under this package will be running almost through NCR
area, plain and irrigated farm land/cultivated area.

Tentative route alignment maps of transmission lines covered under these
package indicating the general topography and major crossings like river, power
lines, Railways line & Roads are enclosed with this specification for bidders
reference. There are few small rivers/distributes/Nalas etc. to be crossed by the
line in the above package.

1.3 Result of surveys
The details collected through tentative surveys viz line route, general soil
characteristics, crossings, accessibility and infra-structure details are attached at
Annexure-IB for the bidders reference.

1.4 ACCESS TO THE LINE AND RIGHT TO WAY
Right of way and way leave clearance shall be arranged by the HVPN in
accordance with work schedule. HVPN will secure way leave and right of way in
the forest area, if any.

1.5 DETAILED SURVEY, OPTIMISATION OF TOWER LOCATION
1.5.1 The HVPNL has carried out the tentative route survey of the transmission lines
under this package. However, detailed survey including profiling, Check survey,
tower optimization and spotting shall be carried out by the successful bidder.

The Bidder shall finalize complete detailed surveys including any changes and will
submit the route plans within 2 months (60 days) of issue of LoI. The soil
investigation for the obligatory points shall be carried out by the successful bidder.

The bidder is strongly advised to visit and examine the site of works and its
surroundings and obtain for himself at this own responsibility and expense, all
information regarding terrain of the proposed line, line route, general site
characteristics, crossing, accessibility, infrastructure details etc. The cost of visiting
the site shall be at bidders own expense. The HVPN will assist the interested
bidder to see & inspect the site of works. For this purpose bidders are requested to
contract.

Chief Engineer/TS Chief Engineer/TS,
HVPNL, Panchkula. HVPNL, Hisar.
TEL. No. 0172-2560748 TEL. No. 01662-220794



Page-3
1.5.2 The bidder should note that HVPN will not furnish the topographical maps
prepared by survey of India but will make available any assistance that may be
required in obtaining the topographical maps.

1.5.3 Soil resistivity along the route alignment, shall be measured in dry weather by four-
electrode method keeping inter electrode spacing of 50 metres. For calculating soil
resistivity, formula 2PI ar (where a =50 metres and r=megger reading in ohms,
PI=3.14) shall be adopted. Measurement shall be made at every 2 to 3 km along
the route of transmission lines. In case soil characteristic changes within 2 to 3 km,
the value shall also have to be measured at an intermediate locations. The megger
reading and soil characteristics shall also be indicated in the soil resistivity results.

1.5.4 ROUTE MARKING

At the starting point of the commencement of route survey, an angle iron spike of
65x65x6 mm section and 1000 mm long shall be driven firmly into the ground to
project only 150 mm above the ground level. A punch mark on the top section of
the angle iron shall be made to indicate location of the survey instrument. Teak
wood peg 50x50x650 mm size shall be driven at prominent position at intervals of
not more than 750 meter along the transmission line to be surveyed upto the next
angle point. Nails of 100mm wire should be fixed on the top of these pegs to show
the location of instrument. The pegs shall be driven firmly into the ground to project
100 mm only above ground level. At angle position stone/concrete pillar with
HVPNL marked on them shall be put firmly on the ground for easy identification.


1.5.5 ROFILE PLOTTING & TOWER SPOTTING

From the field book entries, the route plan with enroute details and level profile
shall be plotted and prepared to scale of 1:2000 horizontal & 1:200 vertical on 1.0,
10 mm squared paper as per approved procedure. Reference levels at every 20
metres along the profile are also to be indicated on the profile besides, reduced
levels at undulations. Areas along the profile, which, in the view of the contractor,
are not suitable for tower spotting, shall also be clearly marked on the profile plots.
If the difference in levels be too high, the chart may be broken up according to
requirement. A 10mm overlap shall be shown on each following sheet. The chart
shall progress from left to right. Sheet shall be 594 mm wide in accordance with
the IS. For as built profile these shall be in A1 size.

1.5.6 TOWER LOCATION

1.5.6.1 SAG TEMPLATE

Necessary data in respect of conductor, earthwire and insulator have been given in
the specification. On the basis of these, the Bidder shall prepare the sag template
drawing, tower spotting data, sag tension calculations of New towers design of
132kV S/C of 0.4sq. For 132kV D/C lines with KRR Design, necessary Sag-
Tension calculations with tower spotting data shall be provided by HVPNL. On the
basis of these, the Bidder shall prepare the sag template drawing. Sag template
prepared based on the approved sag-template curve drawing shall only be used
for tower spotting on the profiles. Two numbers of the approved template,
prepared on rigid transparent plastic sheet, shall be provided by the Bidder
to the HVPNL for the purpose of checking the tower spotting of both 132kV
S/C & D/C lines. The templates shall be on the same scale as that of the profile.
Page-4

1.5.6.2 TOWER SPOTTING

With the help of approved sag template and tower spotting data, tower locations
shall be marked on the profiles. While locating the towers on the profile sheet,
the following shall be borne in mind.

a) SPAN

The number of consecutive spans between the section points shall not exceed
15. A section point shall comprise of tension point as under as applicable: -

For D/C line DB type or DC type or DD type tower as applicable

For S/C line B type or C type or D type tower as applicable

b) EXTENSION

An individual span shall be as near to the normal design span as possible. In
case an individual span becomes too short with normal supports on account of
undulations in ground profile, one or both the supports of the span may be
extended by inserting standard body extension designed for the purpose
according to technical specification.

c) Loading

There shall not be any upward force on Suspension towers under normal working
conditions and the Suspension towers shall support at least the minimum weight
span as provided in the designs. In case uplift is unavoidable, it shall be
examined if the same can be overcome by adding standard body extensions to
the towers failing which tension towers designed for the purpose shall be
employed at such positions.


e) ROAD CROSSING

At all important road crossings, the towers shall be fitted with normal suspension
or tension insulator strings depending on type of tower, but the ground clearance
at the highest point of the roads under maximum temperature and still air shall be
such that even with the conductor broken in adjacent span, ground clearance of
the conductor from the road surfaces will not be less than 6.100 meters . At all
National Highways, tension towers with double insulator strings on crossing side
shall be used.

d) RAILWAY CROSSINGS

All the Railway crossings coming enroute the transmission line have already
been identified by the HVPN. At the time of detailed survey, the Railway
crossings shall be finalized as per the regulation laid down by the Railway
Authorities. The following are the important features of the prevailing regulations
(revised in 1987):

i) The crossing shall be supported on DD/D type tension towers only (as the case
may be) on either side and Double tension insulator string shall be used on
both the towers on the side of the crossing.

Page-5


ii) The crossing shall normally be at right angle to the Railway track.

iii) The minimum distance of the crossing tower shall be at least equal to the
height of the tower plus 6 metres away measured from the center of the
nearest Railway track.

iv) No crossing shall be located over a booster transformer, traction switching
station, traction sub-station or a track cabin location in an electrified area.

v) Minimum ground clearance above Rail level of the lowest portion of any
conductor under condition of maximum sag shall be maintained as per latest
Railway regulations amended from time to time.

vi) The approval for crossing Railway track shall be obtained by the HVPN from
the Railway Authorities, however six copies of profile and plan, tower and
foundation design and drawings, required for the approval from the Railway
Authorities shall be supplied by the contractor to the HVPN.

f) River Crossing:

In case of major river crossing, towers shall be of suspension type and the
anchor towers on either side of the main river crossing shall be DD/D type
tower. For navigable river, clearance required by navigation authority shall be
provided. For non-navigable river, clearance shall be reckoned with respect to
highest flood level (HFL).


g) POWER LINE CROSSINGS

Where the line is to cross over another line of the same voltage or lower
voltage, towers with suitable extensions shall be used. Where the line is to
cross under the power lines, gantries shall be used. Provisions to prevent the
possibility of its coming into the contact with other overhead lines shall be made
in accordance with Indian Electricity Rules,1956. In order to reduce the height
of the crossing towers, it may be advantageous to remove the ground wire of
the line to be crossed (if this is possible and permitted by the owner of the line
to be crossed). All the works related to the above proposal shall be deemed to
be included in the scope of the contractor except if modifications are required to
line below, in which case, the conditions to be agreed upon. Suitable Extension
for towers over 11kV line crossing shall be used, where requisite electrical as
per I.E. rules is not available.

h) TELECOMMUNICATION LINE CROSSING

The angle of crossing shall be as near to 90
o
as possible. However, deviation to
the extent of 30
o
may be permitted under exceptionally difficult situations.

When the angle of crossing has to be below 60
o
, the matter will be referred to
the authority incharge of the telecommunication system. On a request from the
contractor, the permission of the telecommunication authority may be obtained
by the HVPN. Also, in the crossing span, power line support will be as near the
telecommunication line as possible, to obtain increased vertical clearance
between the wires.
Page-6


i) DETAILS ENROUTE

All topographical details, permanent features, such as trees, building etc. 13.5 m
on either side of the alignment for 132kV line shall be detailed on the profile plan.

1.5.7 CLEARANCE FROM GROUND, BUILDING, TREES ETC.

Clearance from ground, buildings, trees and telephone lines shall be provided in
conformity with the Indian electricity rules, 1956 as amended up to date.

1.5.8 The tree cutting shall be the responsibility of the HVPN except for that required
during survey. However, the contractor shall count, mark and put proper numbers
with suitable quality of paint at his own cost on all the trees that are to be cut by
the HVPN at the time of actual execution of the work. Contractor may please note
that HVPN shall not pay any compensation for any loss or damage to the
properties or for tree cutting due to contractors work.

1.5.9 Any way leave, which may be required by the contractor, shall be arranged by the
HVPN as required by work programme.

1.5.10 To evaluate and tabulate the trees and bushes coming within 13.5 m on either side
of the central line alignment, the trees will be numbered and marked with quality
paint serially from angle point 1 onwards and the corresponding number will be
painted on the stem of trees at a height of 1 meter from ground level. The tree list
should contain the following: -

a) Girth (circumference) measured at a height of 1 meter from ground level.

b) Approximate height of the tree with an accuracy of 2 metres.

c) Name of the type of the species/tree.

d) The bushy and under growth encountered within the 27 m belt should also be
evaluated with its type, height, girth and area in square metres, clearly
indicating the growth in the tree/bush statement.

1.5.11 Payment of compensation toward the clearances etc. will be the responsibility of
the HVPN.


1.5.12 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE

The profile sheets, duly spotted, alongwith preliminary schedule indicating type of
towers, type of foundations, wind span, weight span, angle of deviation, river or
road crossing and other details shall be submitted for the approval of the HVPN.
After approval, the contractor shall submit six more sets of the approved reports
along with one set of reproducible of final profile drawings to the HVPN for record
purpose.



Page-7


1.5.13 DETAILED SURVEY OF TOWER LOATION

1.5.13.1. The detailed survey shall be conducted to locate and peg mark the tower
positions on ground conforming to the approved profile and tower schedule. In the
process, it is necessary to have the pit centers marked according to the
excavation marking charts. The levels, up or down of each pit center with respect
to the center of the tower location shall be noted and recorded for determining the
amount of earthwork required to meet the approved design parametres.

1.5.13.2 Changes, if required, after detailed survey in the preliminary tower schedule shall
be carried out by the contractor and he shall thereafter submit a final tower
schedule for the approval of HVPN. The tower schedule shall show position of all
towers, type of towers, span length, type of foundation for each towers and the
deviation at all angles as set out with other details.

1.5.14 CHECK SURVEY OF TOWER LOATION

1.5.14.1 The check survey shall be conducted to locate and peg mark the tower positions
on ground conforming to the approved profile and tower schedule. In the
process, it is necessary to have the pit centers marked according to the
excavation marking charts. The levels, up or down of each pit center with respect
to the center of the tower location shall be noted and recorded for determining
the amount of earthwork required to meet the approved design parametres.

1.5.14.2 Changes, if required, after check survey in the preliminary tower schedule shall
be carried out by the Bidder and he shall thereafter submit a final tower schedule
for the approval of HVPNL. The tower schedule shall show position of all towers,
type of towers, span length, type of foundation for each towers and the deviation
at all angles as set out with other details.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

1.6.1 GENERAL CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

The area is in the extreme climate belt. Monsoons are generally active from the
months of July to September. The working season shall be approximately nine
months per year.

The maximum temperature during summer shall be of the order of 50
o
C and the
minimum temperature shall be of the order of -2
o
C. Normal everyday temperature
is 32
0
C.

1.6.2 Design and Workmanship ( for New Tower Design)

The Contractor shall design the towers and foundations of 132kV S/C towers of
0.4sq ACSR Zebra in accordance with clause 3, 4 of this technical specification.

1.6.3 Foundation Data ( for New Tower Design)

For the purpose of designing various type of foundations, properties of Earth are
furnished in clause 4 of specifications of tower foundations.
Page-8

1.6.4 Load on Tower ( for New Tower Design)


The 132 kV transmission lines under the scope of this specification are passing
through Wind Zone 4 as per IS-875-1987 with basic wind speed of 47m/sec. Basic
wind speed is based on peak gust velocity averaged over a short time interval of
about 3 seconds corresponding to a mean height of 10 meters above mean ground
level.

For the purpose of computation of wind load, electrical clearance etc., bidders are
requested to refer relevant sub-clauses under Clause -3 and -5 and Table under
Clause -3 of this technical specifications.

1.7 TECHNICAL DATA

Bidders shall furnish all technical data as per relevant schedules in five (5) copies.


1.8 STATUTORY REGAULATION AND STANDARDS

1.8.1 STATUTROY REGULATIONS

The contactor is required to follow local statutory regulations stipulated in
electricity (supply) Act. 2003, Indian Electricity rules 1956 as amended and other
local rules and regulations referred to in this specifications.

1.8.2 REFERECNE STANDARDS

1.8.2.1 The codes and/or standards referred to in specification shall govern. In all cases
wherever such references are made. In case of a conflict between such codes
and/or standards, and the specifications, latter shall govern. Such codes and/or
standards, referred to shall mean the latest revisions, amendments/changes
adopted and published by the relevant agencies.

1.8.2.2 Other internationally acceptable standards, which ensure equivalent or better
performance than those specified shall also, be accepted.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE, INSPECTION AND TESTING

1.9.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.9.1.1 To ensure that the supply and services under the scope of this contract
whether manufactured or performed within the contractors works or at his sub-
contactors premises or at site or at any other place of work are in accordance
with the specifications, the contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance
programme to control such activities at all points necessary. Such
programmme shall be outlined by the contractor and shall be finally accepted
by the HVPN after discussions before the award of the contract. A quality
assurance programme of the contractor shall generally cover but not limited to
the following:

a) His organization structure for the management and implementation of the
proposed quality assurance programme.
Page-9

b) Documentation control system.

c) Qualification data for bidders key personnel.

d) The procedure for purchases of materials parts/components and selection
of sub-contractors services including vendor analysis, source inspection,
incoming raw material inspection, verification of material purchase etc.

e) System for shop manufacturing including process controls and fabrication
and assembly controls.

f) Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective action.

g) Control of calibration and testing of measuring and testing equipments.

h) Inspection and test procedure for manufacture.

i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status.

j) System for quality audits.

k) System for authorising release of manufactured product to the HVPN.

l) System for maintenance of records.

m) System for handing storage and delivery.

n) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure adopted for
controlling the quality characteristics relevant to each item of supply.

The quality plan shall be mutually discussed and approved by the HVPN after
incorporating necessary corrections by the contractor as may be required.

1.9.1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE DOCUMENTS

The contractor shall be required to submit all the quality assurance documents
as stipulated in the quality plan at the time of HVPNs inspection of material.

1.9.1.3 The HVPN, through his duly authorized representatives, reserves the right to
carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of the systems and procedures of
the contractors/ his sub-contractors quality management and control activities.

1.9.2 INSPECTION,TESTING AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

The provision of the clause regarding inspection, testing and inspection
certificate as described in conditions of contract shall be applicable to the supply
and erection portion of the works. The HVPN shall have the right to re-inspect at
his expenses any material though previously inspected and approved by him at
the contractors works, before and after the same are erected at site. If following
the latter, material is found defective, then the contractor shall bear the cost of
this inspection and reinstatement according to specification.

Page-10

1.10 TECHNICAL PARAMETRES OF 132KV LINE

Electrical system data

a) Nominal voltage 132 kV
b) Maximum system voltage 145 kV
c) BlS (Impulse) 650 KV (peak)
d) Power frequency withstand voltage (wet) 275 KV (rms)

2.0 DETAILS OF LINE MATERIAL FOR 132 KV LINE

2.1.1 Particulars of Conductor and Earthwire:-

Sr. No Particulars Conductor Earthwire
1 Type ACSR Zebra ACSR Panther G.S.S
2 Stranding and
wire diameter

Aluminium
Steel
mm
mm
54/3.18
7/3.18
30/3.00
7/3.00
-
7/3.15
3 Total sectional
area
Sq. mm 484.5 261.50 54.55
4 Approximate
overall diameter
mm 28.62 21.00 9.45
5 Approximate
mass
Kg/km 1621 974 428
6 Calculated DC
resistance at 20
deg. Centigrade
(Max.)
ohm/km .06868 0.140 3.375
7 Approximate
calculated
breaking load
kN 130.32 89.67 56
8 Modulus of
elasticity
Kg/mm
2
7034 8158 19361
9 Co-efficient of
linear expansion
Per
deg. c
19.30x10
-6
17.8x10
-6
11.5x10
-6

10 Mass of zinc
coating
Gm/sq.
m
260 260 240
11 Configuration of
conductor
D/C line



S/C line
Near vertical
on each side
of tower

Triangular
Near vertical
on each side
of tower

-

12 Location of
earthwire

-

-
One
continuous
earthwire to
run
horizontally
above the
conductors

Page-11
2.1.2 PARTICULARS OF INSULATOR STRINGS WITH A/F TYPE DISC INSULATORS
FOR 132KV LINES WITH ZEBRA CONDUCTOR :

Sr
No
Particulars Single
suspension
string
Double
suspension
string
Double
tension
string
Single
tension
string
Single pilot
suspension
string
1 No. of standard
insulator discs
1x9 2X9 2x10 1x10 1x10
2 Size of disc mm 255x145 255x145 280X145 280x145 255x145
3 E&M strength of
each insulator
disc
70 70 120 120 70
4 Size of
designation of
pinball shank
mm
16 16 20 20 16
5 Minimum
creepage
distance of each
disc mm

432 432 432 432 432

2.1.3 PARTICULARS OF INSULATOR STRINGS WITH A/F TYPE DISC INSULATORS
FOR 132KV LINES WITH PANTHER CONDUCTOR :

Sr
No
Particulars Single
suspension
string
Single
suspension
Pilot
Double
tension
string
Single tension
string
1

No. of standard
insulator discs
1x9 1x9 2x10 1x10
2 Size of disc mm 255x145 255x145 255x145 255x145
3 E&M strength of
each insulator
disc
70 70 90 90
4 Size of
designation of
pinball shank
mm
16 16 16 16
5 Minimum
creepage
distance of each
disc mm
432 432 432 432







Page-12
2.1.4 PARTICULARS OF SILICONE POLYMER INSULATOR STRINGS FOR ACSR
PANTHER:-
Sr
No
TYPE of
String
Size of
Composite
Insulator
(mm)
Min.
Creepage
Distance
(mm)
No. of
Individual
units per
string
(Nos.)
EM
strength
of
Insulator
Unit (KN)
Mechanical
strength of
Insulator
string
alongwith
Hardware
fittings
(kN)
1 Single
Suspension

20X1305 4495 1X1 70 70
2 Single pilot
Suspension

20X1305 4495 1X1 70 70
4 Single
Tension

20X1450 4495 1X1 90 90
5 Double
Tension

20X1450 4495 2X1 2X90 2X90

2.1.5 PARTICULARS OF SILICONE POLYMER INSULATOR STRINGS FOR ACSR
ZEBRA :-
Sr
No
TYPE of
String
Size of
Composite
Insulator
(mm)
Min.
Creepage
Distance
(mm)
No. of
Individual
units per
string
(Nos.)
EM
strength
of
Insulator
Unit (KN)
Mechanical
strength of
Insulator
string
alongwith
Hardware
fittings
(kN)
1 Single
Suspension

20X1305 4495 1X1 70 70
2 Single pilot
Suspension

20X1305 4495 1X1 70 70
4 Single
Tension

20X1450 4495 1X1 120 120
5 Double
Tension

20X1450 4495 2X1 2X120 2X120

2.2 INSULATOR STRING HARDWARE
a) Anchor shackle
b) Ball Hook
c) Chain link
d) Yoke plate
e) Ball clevis
f) Arcing horn holding plate
Page-13

g) Socket clevis
h) Arcing horns
i) Clevis eye
j) Free center type/armour grip suspension clamp for suspension strings and
envelope type clamp for pilot suspension string for jumper support.
k) Compression type dead end clamp.

2.3 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE

a) Mid-span compression joints
b) Repair sleeves for conductor
c) Flexible copper bonds
d) Vibration dampers for conductor and earthwire
e) Suspension clamps for earthwire
f) Tension clamps for earthwire
g) Preformed Armour rods.



3. TRANSMISSION TOWERS

3.1 General Description of the Tower

3.1.1 The towers shall be of following types:-

a) Double circuit (DA, DB, DC & DD type) of HVPNs KRR Design for both 0.4sq ACSR
Zebra and 0.2sq ACSR Panther.

b) Single Circuit (A, B,C & D ) of 0.4sq ACSR Zebra to be designed by the Bidder.

3.1.2 The towers are of self supporting lattice steel type, designed to carry the line
conductors with necessary insulators, earthwire and all fittings under all loading
conditions.

3.1.3 The tower shall be fully galvanized structure. New Design 132kV S/C towers and
132kV D/C KRR Design towers to be fabricated shall have a combination of two
grades of steel, as detailed in structural drawings/bill of material. One is MS steel and
other is HT steel conforming to IS:2062.

3.2 TYPE OF TOWERS
3.2.1 The towers are classified as given below for 132 KV lines.

A) FOR KRR Design D/C Towers:-
Type of Tower Deviation limit Typical use

DA

0 deg.-2 deg.

To be used as tangent tower.
DB 2 deg.-15 deg.






0 deg.

a) Tension towers with tension
insulators string.
b) Tension towers for uplift
forces resulting from an
uplift span upto 200 m.
c) Also to be designed for anti-
cascading condition.
d) To be used as Section
Tower
Page-14

DC


15 deg.-30 deg. a) Tension towers with tension
insulators string.
b) Tension towers for uplift
forces resulting from an
uplift span upto 200 m.
c) Also to be designed for anti-
cascading condition.
DD 30 deg.-60 deg.









55 deg



a) Tension towers with tension
insulators string.
b) Tension towers for uplift
forces resulting from an
uplift span upto 200 m.
c) Dead end with 0 deg. to 15
deg. deviation both on line
and substation side (slack
span).

d) When DD type tower used
with +12m to +25m
Extension by restricting the
span to 250m.

e) For river crossing anchoring
with longer wind span with 0
deg. deviation on crossing
span side and 0 to 30 deg.
deviation on other side.

B) For New 132kV S/C towers of 0.4sq ( to be designed by the Bidder):-

Type of Tower Deviation limit Typical use
A 0 deg.-2 deg. To be used as tangent tower
upto 2 deg. deviation
B 0 deg.-15 deg.









0 deg.
a) To be used for line Angle
deviation from 0 to 15 Deg.

b) Tension towers for uplift
forces resulting from an
uplift span upto 200 m.

c) Also to be designed for anti-
cascading condition.

d) Section tower.



Page-15

C 15 deg.-30 deg. a) To be used for line Angle
deviation from 15 to 30 Deg.
b) Tension towers for uplift
forces resulting from an
uplift span upto 200 m.
c) Also to be designed for anti-
cascading condition.
D 30 deg.-60 deg.










0 deg.
a) To be used for line Angle
deviation from 30 deg. to 60
Deg.
b) Tension towers for uplift
forces resulting from an
uplift span upto 200 m.
c) Complete Dead end with 0
deg. to 15 deg. deviation
both on line and gantry side
(slack span).

d) For river crossing anchoring
anchoring with longer wind
span with 0 deg. deviation
on crossing span side and 0
to 30 deg. deviation on
other side.

Note: The angles of line deviation specified above are for the design span. The span may,
however, be increased upto an optimum limit with reduced angle of line deviation, if
adequate ground and phase clearances are available. The bidder shall indicate
optimum limit of spans for each type of above mentioned towers with reducing angle
of deviation with supporting calculations.

3.2.2 EXTENSIONS

3.2.2.1 The towers shall be designed for adding 3 m, 6 m body extensions for maintaining
adequate ground clearances without reducing the specified factor of safety in any
manner.

3.2.2.2 In the New Design of 132kV S/C towers of 0.4sq, The provision for adding 9m body
extensions for all tower type shall also be kept by the contractor. For power line
crossing or any other obstacle, tower type A and D shall be used with 12m/15m
extensions depending upon the merit of the prevailing site condition.

3.2.2.3 The design & drawings of the Extensions including their foundations (i.e. +9m for all
type of towers and +12m / +15m for A & D type tower) and Gantry is in the scope of
the bidder. The design cost of these extensions & Gantry including foundations, which
may not be used are deemed to be included in the quoted prices of Normal towers &
foundations.





Page-16

3.2.2.4 The tower shall be designed in such a manner that in case of (individual) unequal
legs extension required as per site condition can be added without changing in
bracing pattern of all four types of normal tower and towers with +3m and +6m
body extensions.
3.2.2.5 All above extension provision to normal towers shall be treated as part of normal
tower only.

3.2.2.6 Extra cross-arms for 132kV New tower design shall also be provided by the
bidder and the span to be kept on both sides of these tower shall be shown
in the Design.
3.2.2.7 The Extensions of 132kV D/C KRR Design towers shall be provided to successful
bidder as required as per site conditions.

3.3 SPANS AND CLEARNACES
3.3.1 NORMAL SPAN
The normal ruling span of the line shall be 300 meters for both New and KRR
design towers.

3.3.2 WIND SPAN
The wind span is the sum of the two half spans adjacent to the support under
consideration. For normal horizontal spans this equal to normal ruling span. The
same shall be intimated by the Bidder in New Designs of towers.

3.3.3 WEIGHT SPAN
The weight span is the horizontal distance between the lowest point of the
conductors on the two spans adjacent to the tower. The bidder shall however
suggest the weight spans suitable for New Design tower of span length of 300
mtrs. The weight span of 132kV D/C KRR design towers shall be supplied to
successful bidder.

3.3.4 ELECTRICAL CLEARANCES

3.3.4.1 GROUND CLEARANCE
The min. ground clearances from the bottom conductor shall not be less than 6100
mm at the max. sag conditions i.e. at max. temperature (75
o
C) and still air.
However, to achieve the above clearance the height of tower shall be increased in
the following manner:
a) An allowance of 150 mm shall be provided to account for errors in stringing.

b) Conductor creep shall be compensated by over tensioning the conductor at
temperature of 26
o
C (for ACSR Zebra) & 21
o
C (for ACSR Panther) lower than
the stringing temperature.

For river crossing tower the minimum electrical clearance including ground clearance
will be same as normal towers except an allowance of 4% of maximum sag of
conductor instead of 150 mm for normal towers shall be provided to account for errors
in stringing.

3.3.5 RAIL CROSSING
In case of Rail crossing, the min. height above Rail level of the lowest portion of any
conductor under condition of max. sag, in accordance with the regulation for Electrical
crossing of Railway tracks as prevailing at the time of construction of line shall be
applicable.

Page-17

3.3.6 POWER LINE CROSSING

Minimum clearance between Power line to Power line shall be as follows:

i) 132 kV to 132 kV and below: 3050 mm
ii) 132 kV to 220 kV 4580 mm
iii) 132 kV to 400 kV 5490 mm

3.3.7 Live Metal Clearance :

3.3.7.1 The minimum live metal clearance to be provided between the live parts and steel
work of super structure shall be as per IS:5613 (part-ii/sec-1) 1985 as given in table
below:

Sr. No Type of insulator
string
Swing in deg. Min. live metal clearance
in mm
1 Single suspension
insulator string
Nil
15
30
45
60
1530
1530
1370
1220
1070
2 Tension insulator string
(single/double)
Nil 1530
3 Jumper Nil
10
20
30
1530
1530
1070
1070

4 Double suspension
string
Nil
15
30
45
1530
1530
1070
1070


3.3.7.2 Bidder shall adopt same cross arm design where jumper is projecting outside of
cross -arm for new Design D type tower to be used as Dead end angle tower.

3.3.7.3 For computing the live metal clearances the dimensions of single I-Suspension,
Single Tension and double tension strings shall be taken. The design of tower
shall be such that it should satisfy all the above conditions when clearances are
measured from any live point of the strings.

3.3.8 ANGLE OF SHIELDING

The angle of shielding is defined as the angle formed by the line joining the center
lines of the earthwire and outer power conductor, in still air, at tower supports, to the
vertical line through the center line of the earthwire. Bidders shall design the tower in
such a way that the angle of shielding does not exceed 30 deg. The drop of the
earthwire clamp, should be considered while calculating the minimum angle of
protection. For estimating the minimum angle of protection, the drop of the earthwire
suspension clamp alongwith shackle shall be taken as 150mm.

Page-18

3.3.9 MID SPAN CLEARNACE

The minimum vertical mid span clearance between the earthwire and the nearest
power conductor shall not be less than 6.1 meters for 132 kV which shall mean the
vertical clearance between earthwire and the nearest conductor under all
temperatures and still air condition in the normal ruiling span. Further, the tensions of
the earthwires and power conductors shall be so co-ordinated that the sag of
earthwire shall be at least 10% less than that of power conductors under all
temperature loading conditions.

3.4 Normal Loading Conditions ( for 132kV New Tower Design )

3.4.1 Loads at Conductor and Earthwire Points

The ultimate external loadings at conductor and earthwire points shall be calculated &
submitted by the bidder.

3.4.2 Wind Loads on Tower Body

The wind load on tower body shall be calculated by the contractor as per IS:802
(1995). The following data shall be considered for calculating wind load on tower
body: -
a) Wind zone = 4 (47 m/sec)

b) Reliability level = 1

c) Terrain category/ = 2
ground roughness

d) Design wind pressure = 701 N /m
2

(pd)


e) The angle of incidence = 0 degree.
of wind (Theta)

3.4.3 MAXIMUM TENSION

3.4.3.1 Max tension shall be based on either

At 0
o
C with 36% full wind pressure, or

At 32
o
C with full wind pressure whichever is more stringent.

Sag-tension calculations for Conductor and Earthwire for a span length of 300 mtrs.
shall be calculated and submitted by the bidder in accordance with the relevant
provisions of IS: 5613 (Part-3/Section-1) for both 132kV new tower designs.

The sag-tension calculation for 132kV D/C KRR Design tower shall be supplied by
HVPNL to successful bidder.

3.4.4 LIMITING TENSION OF CONDUCTOR & EARTHWIRE

The ultimate tension of conductor and ground wire shall not exceed 70 percent of their
ultimate tensile strengths.
Page-19


3.4.5 Broken Wire Condition (for 132kV S/C New Tower Design of 0.4sq ACSR Zebra)

3.4.5.1 Suspension Tower Type A

Any one phase or Earthwire broken, whichever is more stringent for a particular
member.

3.4.5.2 Tension Tower Type B and C

Any two phases broken on the same side and the same span or any one phase and
one earthwire broken on the same side and same span whichever combination is
more stringent for a particular member.


3.4.5.3 Tension Tower Type D

All three phases broken on the same side and the same span or any two phases and
earthwire broken on the same side and same span whichever combination is more
stringent for a particular member.

3.4.6 Design of towers

The towers shall be designed as per IS: 802(1995).


3.4.7 Design Criteria

The following design strength factor shall apply for tower design only (not for
foundation design)

3.4.7.1 If steel with minimum guaranteed yield strength is used for fabrication of tower, Loads
given in IS: 802, part-I, section 2 shall be increased by 1.02.

3.4.7.2 If steel with minimum guaranteed yield strength is not used for fabrication of tower.
Loads given in IS: 802, part-I, section 2 shall be increased by a factor of 1.05 in
addition to that mentioned in clause -3.4.7.1.

3.4.8 Design Temperatures

The following temperature range for the conductors and ground wires shall be
adopted for line design:

i) Minimum temperature : 0 deg. C

ii) Every day temperature : 32deg. C
of conductor

iii) Max. temperature of

a) Conductor : 75 deg. C

b) Earthwire exposed to sun : 53deg. C

3.4.9 CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE CONFIGURATION

The three phases shall be in vertical formation on both sides of tower. The phase to
phase spacing for tower shall not be less than 4.05 meters ( vertical) and 7.06 meters
(horizontal).

Page-20

3.4.10 Redundant and Bracing Design

All redundants in the towers are to be triangulated

All bracings and Redundant members of the towers which are horizontal or inclined
upto 15
o
from horizontal shall be designed to withstand an ultimate vertical load of
1500 N considered acting at centre independent of all other loads. The bending
moment for designing of redundant members shall be considered as WL/4 irrespective
of end connections and continuity. The contractor has to furnish the calculations for
the same (Where W is ultimate load of 1.5 KN and L is length of redundant from bolt
to bolt). The redundants shall also be designed for 2.5% of maximum axial load of
connecting members (i.e. leg members, bracing members etc.). The contractor has to
furnish the calculations for the same.
Unbraced portion of the stub shall be designed for combined direct and bending
stresses. The Contractor has to furnish the calculations for the same.
3.4.11 Bracing Patterns

Staggering of bracings and redundants are not allowed. Bracings and redundants
patterns in tranverse and longitudinal faces will be exactly identical.

3.4.12 Steel sections

For designing of towers, preferably rationalized steel sections shall be used. During
execution of the project, if any particular section is not available, the same shall be
substituted by higher section at no extra cost to HVPN and the same shall be borne by
the contractor. However, design approval for such substitution shall be obtained from
the HVPN before any substitution.

3.4.13 Thickness of Members

The minimum thickness of angle sections used in the design of towers, unless
otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, shall be kept not less than the
following values:

a) Main corner leg members including the : 5 mm
ground wire peak and main cross arm

b) For all other members : 4mm

3.5 Bolts & Nuts

3.5.1The minimum bolt spacing and rolled edge distance and sheared edge distance from
the centers of the bolt holes to be maintained are given in Table below:-

Diameter of
bolts (mm)
Hole
diameter
(mm)
Min. Bolt
spacing
(mm)
Min. rolled or
swan edge
distance (mm)
Min. sheared
or flame cut
edge distance
(mm)
16 17.5 40 20 23


Bolts sizes mentioned above shall only be used. The minimum width of the flanges
without bolt holes shall be 30mm.






3.5.2 For the purpose of calculating shearing stress and bearing stress for bolts clause 14.4
& 14.5 of IS: 802 Part-1/Sec-2 1992 may be referred.



Page-21

3.6 Slenderness Ratio
3.6.1 Slenderness ratio for members shall be computed in accordance with clause 10 of IS:
802 (Part-1/Sec-2) 1992. Slenderness ratio for compression and tension members
shall not exceed the values specified therein.

3.6.2 The following maximum limit of the slenderness ratio (KI/r) i.e. the ratio of effective
unsupported length of the section in any plane to the appropriate radius of gyration will
be used:

a) For main corner leg members including 120
the corner members of earthwire peak
and the lower corner members of the
cross-arms in compression

b) For other members carrying computed stresses. 200

c) For redundant members and those carrying 250
nominal stresses

d) For members having tensile stress only. 375

3.7 Erection stress

Where erection stresses combination with other permissible co-existent stresses could
produce a working stress in any member appreciably above the specified working
stress, such other provisions are to be made as may be necessary to bring the
working stress within the specified permissible limit.

3.8 Design calculation and drawings

3.8.1 On award of contract, the following design calculations and drawings are required to
be furnished to HVPN :-
The Design calculations for all towers / extensions & Gantry of new Design shall be
got checked and approved from CPRI India. The CPRI approved Design of tower,
extensions, Gantries, stub template, loading/rigging arrangement and details of
calculations shall there upon will be supplied to HVPNL for further approval. .

3.8.2 HVPN shall then carry-out destruction testing of all new design A, B,C, D type towers
at the test bed of CPRI. The prototypes for destruction testing of towers shall be
fabricated/ supplied by the contractor at the test site. All the arrangement / cost
involved for carrying-out the tests shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

3.8.3 After approval of design/successful testing of tower, the contractor shall furnish the
following in fifteen (15) copies alongwith all Original drawings on Micro-film and
their soft auto-cad copy to the HVPN for necessary distribution within fifteen (15)
days: -
a) Detailed design calculation and drawing for towers / their Extensions and
foundations.

b) Detailed structural drawings indicating section size, length of members, sizes of
plate along with hole to hole distance, joint details etc.

c) Bill of materials, indicating cutting and bending detail against each member.

d) Shop drawings showing all details relevant to fabrication.

e) All the drawings for the tower accessories and sag template curve.
Page-22

3.8.4 The contractor is required to submit four copies of the drawings as mentioned in
clause 3.8.3 for HVPN approval. While submitting the designs, structural drawings, bill
of materials and any other drawings pertaining to the subject transmission line, the
contractor shall clearly indicate on each drawing HVPN specification No., Name of the
transmission line and project, letter reference No. and date on which the submission
are made. The same practice is also to be followed while submitting distribution
copies.

3.8.5 The CPRI approved design and drawings as covered in clause 3.8.3 above shall be
approved/commented by the HVPN as the case may be within 21 (twenty one) days of
receipt of designs/drawings in HVPN design directorate. If the design/drawings are
commented by the HVPN , the contractor shall submit revised designs/ drawings
within 15 (fifteen) days of date of issue of comments.

3.8.6 The contractor is required to furnish the progress of submissions and approvals of
designs and drawings on twenty fifth day of every month till the completion of all the
design activities.

The details shall include description of design/drawing, schedule date of submission,
actual date of submission, schedule date of approval, actual date of approval,
schedule date of submission of distribution copies, actual date of submission of
distribution copies, schedule date of tower test, actual date of tower test and
Remarks column. Provision of six additional columns shall also be made in the above
progress report to indicate date of comments issued by the HVPN and details of
submission of revised designs/drawings.

3.9 Design of Gantries

3.9.1 The entire clauses relating to Towers will be relevant for Gantries in general unless
otherwise stated.

3.9.2 All Gantries shall be designed for the worst combination of dead loads, wind loads,
loads due to deviation of conductor, load due to unbalanced tension in conductor,
torsional load due to unbalanced vertical & horizontal forces, erection load, short
circuit forces etc. short circuit forces shall be calculated at a fault level of 31.5-kA etc.
as per IEC:865:1991.

3.9.3 The design of structure shall also be based on the condition where stringing is done
only on one side i.e. all the three conductors broken on other side.

3.9.4 Static tension pull on gantries shall be taken as minimum 2000kgs per phase. Vertical
load of half the span of conductors and earthwires on either side of the beam shall be
taken into account for the purpose of design. Earthwire tension shall be taken as
800kgs.

3.9.5 The distance between gantry and adjacent tower shall be taken as minimum 175m for
design purpose. The design of those gantries shall also be checked considering 30
deg. deviation of conductor in both vertical and horizontal planes.

3.9.6 All foundations shall be designed to withstand the forces resulting due to worst
possible combination of loads on superstructure as specified in above clauses.

3.9.7 All foundations of gantries shall be founded at a level at least 1 metre below natural
soil. Page-23



3.10 Material

3.10.1 TOWER STEEL SECTIONS

3.10.1.1 The towers shall be fully galvanized structure of MS steel and HT steel as per
grades shown in Structural drawings / BOM
3.10.2 FASTENERS: BOLTS NUTS AND WASHERS

3.10.2.1 All bolts and nuts shall conform to IS:6639-1972. All bolts and nuts shall be
galvanized and shall have hexagonal head and nuts, the heads being forged out of
the solid steel rods and shall be truly concentric, and square with the shank, which
must be perfectly straight.

3.10.2.2 The bolt shall be of 16 mm dia and of property class 5.6 as specified in IS:1367
(part-III) 1979 and matching nut of property class as specified in IS:1367 (part-VI)
1980.

3.10.2.3 Bolts up to M 16 and having length upto 10 times the diameter of the bolts should
be manufactured by cold forging and thread rolling process to obtain good and
reliable mechanical Properties and effective dimensional control. The shear
strength of bolts for 5.6 grade should be 310-MPa minimum as per IS: 12427, bolts
should be provided with washer in accordance with IS: 1363 part-I to ensure
proper bearing.

3.10.2.4 Nuts should be double chamfered as per the requirement of IS:1363 part-III, 1984.
The manufacturer should ensure that nuts should not be over tapped beyond 0.4
mm oversize on effective diameter for size upto M16.

3.10.2.5 Fully threaded bolts shall not be used. The length of bolts shall be such that the
threaded portion will not extend into the place of contact of the members.

3.10.2.6 All bolts shall be threaded to take the full depth of the nuts and threaded for
enough to permit firm gripping of the members, but not further. It shall be ensured
that the threaded portion of each bolt protrudes not less than 3 mm and not more
than 8 mm when fully tightened. All nuts shall fit and tight to the point where the
shank of the bolt connects to the head.

3.10.2.7 Flat and tapered washers shall be provided wherever necessary. Spring washers
shall be provided for insertion under all nuts. These washers shall be of steel
electro-galvanised steel, positive lock type and 3.5 mm in thickness for 16 mm dia
bolt.

3.10.2.8 The bidder shall furnish bolt schedules giving thickness of members connected,
the size of bolts nut and the washer and the length of shank and the threaded
portion of bolts and sizes of bolt holes and any other special details of this nature.

3.10.2.9 To obviate bending stress in bolts or to reduce it to minimum, no bolt shall connect
aggregate thickness of more than three (3) times its diameter.

3.10.2.10 The bolt position in assembled towers shall be as per IS:5613 (Part-II/secton-2-
1976).

Page-24
3.10.2.11 Bolts at the joints shall be so staggered that nuts may be tightened with spanners
with out fouling.

3.10.2.12 To ensure effective in-process quality control it is essential that the manufacturer
should have all the testing facilities for test like weight of zinc coating, shear
strength, other testing facilities etc. in-house. The manufacture should also have
proper Quality Assurance System, which should be in line with the requirement of
this specification and IS:14000 series quality system standard.

3.10.3 TOWER ACCESSORIES

i) STEP BOLTS & LADDERS

Each tower shall be provided with step bolts in one of the main leg confirming to
IS:10238 of not less than 16mm diameter and 175 mm long, spaced not more
than 450 mm apart and extending form about 3.5 metres above the ground level to
the top of the tower. The step bolt shall be fixed on one leg of single circuit tower
from 3.5 m above ground level to top of the towers. Each step bolt shall be
provided with two nuts on one end to fasten the bolt securely to the tower and
button head at the other end to prevent the feet from slipping away. The step bolts
shall be capable of withstanding a vertical load not less than 1.5 KN. For special
structures, where the height of the super structure exceeds 50 metres, ladders
along with protection rings as per the HVPNL approved design shall be provided in
continuation of the step bolts on one face of the tower from 30 metres above
ground level to the top of the special structure. From 3.5 m to 30 m height of super
structure step bolts shall be provided. Suitable plat form using 6 mm thick
perforated chequred plates along with suitable railing for access from step bolts to
the ladder and from the ladder to each cross-arm tip and the groundwire support
shall to be provided. The platform shall be fixed on tower by using countersunk
bolts.

ii) INSULATOR STRING AND EARTHWIRE CLAMPS ATTACHMENTS

a) I shaped suspension insulator string assemblies shall be used for suspension
towers, the drawing of which is enclosed with specification. For the attachment
of suspension insulator string, a suitable dimensioned swinging hanger on the
tower shall be provided so as to obtain requisite clearance under extreme
swinging condition and free from swinging of the string. The hanger shall be
designed to withstand an UTS of 70 KN for single suspension string and 140
KN for double suspension string.

b) At tension towers, strain plates of suitable dimensions on the underside of each
cross-arm tip and at the top earthwire peak should be provided for taking the
hooks or D-shackle of the tension insulator strings or earthwire tension clamps,
as the case may be. Full details of the attachments shall be submitted by the
bidder for HVPNL approval before starting the mass fabrication.

iii) EARTHWIRE CLAMPS

SUSPENSION CLAMP
Earthwire suspension clamps will be supplied by the bidder, the reference drawing
for the same is enclosed with the specification. Earthwire peaks/cross-arms are to
be suitably designed to accommodate the shackle of the suspension clamp.

Page-25
TENSION CLAMPS
The bidder shall supply earthwire tension clamps for incorporation on the tension
towers. The reference drawing for the same is enclosed with this specification.

iv) ANTICLIMBING DEVICE

Barbed wire type anticlimbing device/ fencing as per enclosed drawing shall be
provided and installed by the Bidder for all towers/gantries. The height of the
anticlimbing device shall be provided approximately 3m above ground level. The
barbed wire shall conform to IS:278-1978. the barbed wires shall be given
chromating dip as per procedure laid down in IS:1340-1959.

v) DANGER, NUMBER, AND PHASE PLATE

Danger, Number, Circuit and phase plates shall be provided and installed by the
Bidder.

a) Each tower shall be fitted with a number plate, circuit plate (in case of double
circuit) and danger plate. Each tension tower shall be provided with a set of phase
plates also. All the double circuit towers are to be provided with circuit plate fixed
near the legs. The height for fixing these accessories shall not be more than 4.5m
above the ground level.

b) The letters figures and the conventional skull and bones of danger plates shall
conform to IS:2551-1963 and shall be in a signal red on the front of the plate.

c) The corners of the number, danger & circuit plate shall be rounded off to remove
sharp edges.

vi) BIRD GUARDS

To prevent birds perching immediately above the suspension insulator string and
fouling the same with dropping, suitable bird guards shall be provided at cross arm
tips of all suspension towers. The bird guard arrangement shall be such that it shall
either prevent bird from perching in position where they are liable to cause the
damages or ensure that if birds do perch, dropping will fall clear of the insulator
string.

3.11 TOWER FABRICATION

The fabrication of towers shall be in conformity with the following:

3.11.1 Except where hereinafter modified, details of fabrication shall conform to IS:802
(Part-II) 1978 or the relevant international standards.

3.11.2 The tower structure shall be accurately fabricated to connect together easily at site
without any undue strain on the bolts.

3.11.3 The diameter of the hole shall be equal to the diameter of bolt plus 1.5 mm.

3.11.4 All similar parts shall be made strictly inter-changeable. All steel sections before any
work is done on them, shall be carefully leveled, straightened and made true to
detailed drawings by methods which will not damage the materials so that when
assembled, the adjacent matching surfaces are in close contact throughout. No
rough edges shall be permitted in the entire structure.
Page-26

3.11.5 DRILLING AND PUNCHING

3.11.5.1 Before any cutting work is started, all steel sections shall be carefully straightened
and trued by pressure and not by hammering. They shall again be trued after
being punched and drilled.

3.11.5.2 Holes for bolts shall be drilled or punched with a jig but drilled holes shall be
preferred. Punching may be adopted for thickness upto 16mm. tolerances
regarding punched holes are as follows:
a) Holes must be perfectly circular and no tolerance in this respect is permissible.
b) The max. allowable difference in diameter of the holes on the two sides of
plates or angle is 0.8 mm i.e. the allowable taper in a punched hole should not
exceed 0.8 mm in diameter.
c) Holes must be square with the plates or angles and have their walls parallel.

3.11.5.3 All burrs left by drills or punch shall be removed completely. When the tower
members are in position the holes shall be truly opposite to each other. Drilling or
reaming to enlarge holes shall not be permitted.

3.12 ERECTION MARK

3.12.1.1 Each individual member shall have an erection mark conforming to the component
number given to it in the fabrication drawings. This mark shall be made with
marking dies of 16 mm size before galvanizing and shall be legible after
galvanizing.

3.12.1.2 ERECTION MARK SHALL BE
A-BB-CC-DDD

A = HVPNL code assigned to the Bidder -Alphabet

BB = Bidders Mark-Numerical

CC = Tower type-Alphabet

DD = Number mark to be assigned by Bidder -Numerical.

H = HT Steel

3.12.2 QUANTITIES VARIATION

3.12.2.1 The provisional quantities required are mentioned in the respective schedule of
prices. Final quantities shall be determined after completion and approval of the
detailed route survey and check survey. The final quantities of towers, gantries,
line materials and foundations shall be confirmed by the HVPNL based on the
requirement of quantities of various items furnished by the Bidder after completion
of detailed survey. Hence it will the responsibility of the Bidder to intimate the exact
requirements of all towers, line materials and foundations required for the line
immediately after the survey. The Empowered officer of the HVPNL will order the
final quantities at the unit rates quoted in the bid.


Page-27

3.12.2.2 The Empowered officer of the HVPNL reserves the right to increase or decrease
upto 15% (fifteen percent only) of contract value. The quantity of bid and services
specified without any change in the unit price or other terms and conditions during
the execution of the contract. The quantities of individual items may vary upto any
extent after the final route plans and route profiles of the lines covered in the
package are finalised.

3.12.2.3 The estimated unit weight of each type of tower, stubs and extensions shall be
furnished by the HVPNL. The weight of tower shall mean the weight of tower
calculated by using the black sectional (i.e. ungalvanised) weight of steel members
of the size indicated in the approved fabrication drawings and bills of materials,
without taking into consideration the reduction in weights due to holes, notches
and bevel-cuts etc. but taking into consideration the weight of fastners,
anticlimbing devices etc.

For payment purpose, the round plane washers, hangers, D-shackles, U-bolts,
step bolts, spring washers, bolts and nuts etc. shall be termed as fasteners.

3.13 GALVANISING

Fully galvanized towers and stub shall be used for the lines. Galvanizing of the
member of the towers shall conform to IS:2629-1985 and IS:4759-1968. All
galvanizing members shall withstand tests as per IS:2633-1986. For fasteners the
galvanizing shall conform to IS:1367 (Part-13). The galvanizing shall be done after
all fabrication work is completed, except that the nuts may be tapped or re-run after
galvanizing. Threads of bolts and nuts shall have a neat fit and shall be such that
they can be turned with finger throughout the length of the threads of bolts and they
shall be capable of developing full strength of the bolts. Spring washers shall be
electro-galvanised as per grade 4 of IS: 1573-1970.

3.14 EARTHING

3.14.1 The footing resistance of all towers shall be measured by the Bidder in dry weather
after tower erection but before the stringing of earthwire. All the towers are to be
earthed, however, in no case tower footing resistance shall exceed 10 ohms. Pipe
type earthing and counterpoise type earthing wherever required shall be provided in
accordance with the stipulations made in IS:3043-1987 and IS:5613 (part-II/section-2)
1985. The details for pipe and counterpoise type earthing are given in drawing
enclosed with the specification.

3.14.2 The provisional quantities for pipe type earthings and counterpoise earthing, are
furnished in price schedule. The bidders are required to furnish unit rates also for
adjustment purpose with actual quantities. The quoted price shall include fabrication,
supply and installation of earthing material including supply of coke, salt etc. in case of
counterpoise type earthing, the quotation shall be based on 100 metres of wire per
tower.

3.15 INSPECTION AND TESTS

3.15.1 All standards tests, including quality control tests, in accordance with appropriate
Indian/International standard, shall be carried out unless otherwise specified herein.

Page-28

3.15.2 All Goods being supplied shall conform to type tests, sample tests as per the technical
specifications and shall be subject to routine, acceptance and site tests in
accordance with requirements stipulated under the respective Sections, unless
otherwise stated. The HVPNL reserves the right to witness any or all the type and
sample tests. The Bidder shall inform the HVPNL of the detailed program of tests at
least two (2) weeks in advance in case of domestic supplies and four (4) weeks in
advance in case of foreign supplies.

3.15.3 The Bidder shall furnish to HVPNL the reports of all type tests, sample and routine
tests as per technical specification along with the equipment/materials drawings. The
type tests conducted earlier should have been conducted in accredited laboratories
(based on ISO/IEC by a reputed accreditation body) or witnessed by HVPNL or
another electric power utility. The type test reports submitted shall be of the tests
conducted within last five (5) years prior to the date of bid opening. In case the test
reports are of a test conducted five (5) years prior to the date of bid opening, and
dont correspond to the offered equipment/material, or dont comply with the
Technical Specifications, the Bidder shall repeat this / these test / tests at no extra
cost to the HVPNL before sample(acceptance) tests. The cost of conducting type
tests and additional tests shall be included in the Bid price .

3.15.4 The HVPNL, his duly authorized representative and/or outside inspection agency
acting on behalf of the HVPNL shall have free access at all reasonable times to the
Bidders/sub-vendors premises or Works and shall have the power at all reasonable
times to inspect and examine the equipment/materials and workmanship of the
Works during its manufacture or erection. If part of the Works is being manufactured
or assembled at other premises or works, the Bidder shall obtain for the HVPNL, his
duly authorized representatives and/or outside inspection agency permission to
inspect as if the works were manufactured or assembled on the Bidders own
premises or works. Inspection may be made at any stage of manufacture, dispatch
or at the Site at the option of the HVPNL, and the equipment if found unsatisfactory
due to bad workmanship or quality or material is liable to be rejected.

When the factory tests have been completed at the Bidders or Sup-Bidders works,
the HVPNL/Inspector shall issue a certificate to this effect within fifteen (15) days
after the completion of the tests, but if the tests are not witnessed by the
HVPNL/Inspector, the certificate shall be issued within 15 days of receipt of the
Bidders test certificate by the HVPNLs representative. Failure of the
HVPNL/Inspector to issue such a certificate shall not prevent the Bidder from
proceeding with the Works (as defined in SCC). The completion of these tests or the
issue of the certificate shall not bind the HVPNL to accept the equipment/materials
should it, on further tests after erection, be found not comply with the Contract. The
equipment/materials shall be dispatched to Site only after approval of test reports
and issuance of the inspection certificate by the HVPNL.

3.15.5 The inspection by the HVPNL and issue of the inspection certificate thereon shall in
no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Bidder in respect to the agreed
quality assurance program forming part of the Contract.

3.15.6 The HVPNL will have the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of
reasonable nature carried out at the Bidders premises or at any other place in
addition of aforesaid type and routine tests to satisfy that the equipment/materials
comply with the specifications.

Page-29

3.15.7 The HVPNL deserves the right for getting any field tests not specified in the respective
sections of the technical specifications conducted on the completely assembled
equipment at Site. The HVPNL will provide the testing equipment for these tests.

3.15.8 The Bidder shall ensure that his subBidders manufacturing and supplying the goods
(material and equipment) shall perform the routine tests specified in the related
standards and in the Technical Specifications of this Contract regularly.

3.15.9 The Bidder shall notify the HVPNL in writing at the latest four (4) weeks for inspection
outside of India and two (2) weeks for local inspection and testing or as otherwise
directed in advance of the date and place at which any Material or Work will be
ready for inspection and testing.

3.15.10 Should any postponement become necessary, the Bidder shall provide written
notification at least one week prior to the originally scheduled date. The HVPNL shall
give 48 hours' notice in writing to the Bidder, of his intention to attend the tests, or
ask for postponement, if required.

3.15.11 Should the HVPNL explicitly waive to attend the relevant test, the Bidder may
proceed with the test, which shall be deemed to have been made in his presence,
and the Bidder shall forthwith forward to the HVPNL duly certified copies of the test
reports for approval.

3.15.12 All sample and type tests will be performed at the presence of the authorized
personnel of the Bidder or inspectors authorized by the Bidder, if there is no
representative of HVPNL.

3.15.13 HVPNL may or may not be present in any or all sample and type tests but all test
reports shall be approved by HVPNL

3.15.14 This procedure shall not release the Bidder from any of his responsibilities or
obligations under this Contract.

3.15.15 The Bidder shall prepare and agree with HVPNL test programs so that tests to be
performed in foreign countries (i.e., at manufacturer's factory or at internationally
recognized test facilities) are carried out in sequence which would permit HVPNL to
organize in an optimal manner the supervision of the said tests by HVPNL staff.

3.16 Galvanizing Tests:

All fabricated materials shall be tested in accordance with the "Test and Inspection
Procedures for Galvanized Materials "as per Specification and HVPNL shall be
notified at least thirty days in advance of any tests if it is performed in abroad.

3.17 Inspections and Tests: The Bidder shall make adequate tests and inspections to
determine whether the material furnished is strictly in accordance with this
Specification. In addition, HVPNL may inspect and accept or reject the material made
under this Specification either at the Fabricator's plant or at the point of delivery The
representatives of HVPNL shall have access to all parts of the Bidder's plant which
concerns the Work while the Work is being done. The Bidder, without requesting any
fee, shall provide all the reasonable facilities to the HVPNL's representatives so as to
satisfy them that, the towers are manufactured strictly in compliance to this
Specification.

Page-30

3.18 Certified Tests: Regardless of whether the material is inspected by HVPNL , the
Bidder shall furnish certified test reports as follows:

a) Steel Mill Test Reports showing chemical, physical and mechanical properties
of the material to be furnished under the Contract.

b) A Manufacturer's Certificate of Inspection for zinc (hot-galvanized) coatings on
structural steel with the following information:

1- Purchase order number
2- Date of inspection
3- Number of pieces tested for weight of zinc coating with maximum-minimum
and average weights of each.
4- Number of pieces tested for adherence of coating.
5- Number of rejections because of defective coating and other reasons.
Certified test reports shall be sent to HVPNL.

3.19 Shop assembly:
One tower of each type and height ordered, including every combination of leg
extensions, shall be assembled in the shop to the extent necessary to assure correct
fit of parts, adequate bolt lengths and proper field erection. Reaming of mismatched
holes will not be permitted. A reasonable amount of drifting will be allowed in
assembling approved by HVPNL. The approved assembled parts shall be dismantled
for shipment. Shop assembly shall be controlled and approved by HVPNL.

3.20 Fabrication:
Fabrication shall be in strict accordance with detail Drawings prepared by the Bidder
and approved by the HVPNL. The drilling, punching, cutting and bending of all
fabricated steelwork shall be such as to prevent any possibility of irregularity occurring
which might introduce difficulties in the erection of the structure on the site.
Built pieces shall, when finished, be true and free from all kinks, twists and open joints
and the Material shall not be defective or strained in any way. Fabrication shall begin
after the approval of the shop assembly.

3.21 IDENTIFICATION AND SHIPPING

Identification: All parts designed for bolting together shall be shipped unassembled
except as noted on the drawings. Tower members shall be bundled together in the
largest practical bundles for shipping and each bundle shall be clearly marked. Small
parts such as U-bolts and clip angles shall be boxed and each box clearly marked for
identification.

Shipping: Railroad cars, ships or trucks in which steel is shipped shall be reasonably
clean and free from foreign materials which could in any way injure the tower material.
At least 8cm clearance shall be maintained between bundles and floor.

3.22 GENERAL

All standards tests, including quality control tests, in accordance with appropriate
Indian/International standard, shall be carried out unless otherwise specified herein.


Page-31


3.23 INSPECTION

3.23.1 In addition to the provision of clause regarding inspection in conditions of contract,
the following shall also apply:

a. The Bidder shall keep the HVPNL informed in advance about the time of
starting and of the progress of manufacture and fabrication of various tower
parts at various stages, so that arrangements can be made for inspection.

b. The acceptance of any part of items shall in no way relieve the Bidder of any
part of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the specification.

3.23.2 The HVPNL or his representative shall have free access at all reasonable times to
those parts of the Bidders works which are concerned with the fabrication of the
HVPNL material for satisfying himself that the fabrication is being done in accordance
with the provisions of the specifications.

3.23.3 Unless specified otherwise, inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior
to dispatch and shall be conducted so as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the work.

3.23.4 Should any member of the structure be found not to comply with the approved design,
it shall be liable to rejection. No member once rejected shall be re-offered for
inspection, except in cases where the HVPNL or his authorized representative
considers that the defects can be rectified.

3.23.5 Defect which may appear during fabrication shall be made good with the consent of
and according to the procedure proposed by the Bidder and approved by the HVPNL.

3.23.6 All gauges and templates necessary to satisfy the HVPNL shall be supplied by the
manufacture.

3.23.7 The correct grade and quality of steel shall be used by the Bidder. To ascertain the
quality of steel used, the inspector may at his discretion get the material tested at an
approved laboratory.

3.24 TESTING OF TOWER ( For S/C tower to be designed by the Bidder)

Testing of Towers

3.24.1 A galvanized tower of all A,B,C,D type complete with 6 m extension shall be
subjected to design and destruction tests by first applying test loads in a manner
approved by the HVPN. The tower shall withstand these tests without showing any
sign of failure or permanent distortion in any part. Thereafter the tower shall be
subjected to destruction by increasing the loads further in an approved manner till it
fails. The tower shall be tested for all the conditions considered for the design of
tower. The contractor shall submit to HVPN for approval, the detailed programme
and proposal for testing the towers showing the methods of carrying out the tests
and manner of applying the loads. After the HVPN has approved the test procedures
and programmes the contractors will intimate the HVPN about carrying out the tests
at least 30 days in advance of the scheduled date of tests during which the HVPN
will arrange to depute his representative to be present at the time of carrying out the
tests. Six copies of the test reports shall be submitted.
Page-32

3.24.2 The contractor shall submit one set of shop drawings alongwith the bill of materials
at the time of prototype tower testing for checking the tower material. Further at the
time submitting test report, the contractor has to submit the final tracings of shop
drawings and bill of materials for HVPNs reference and record. The type testing
charges shall be released only after approval of test report, shop drawings, bill of
material and structural drawings of tower.

3.24.3 In case of any premature failure even during waiting period, the tower is to be
retested with rectified members. However, if the failures are major in nature and
considerable portion of tower is to be re-erected, in such cases all the tests which
has been carried out earlier are required to be re-conducted again in compliance
with specification.

3.24.4 No part of any tower subject to test shall be allowed to be used on the line. The price
will be quoted after allowing rebate for the scrap value of the tower material which
will be retained by the contractor.

3.24.5 The contactor shall ensure that the specification of materials and workmanship of all
towers actually supplied conform strictly to the towers which have successfully under
gone the tests. In case any deviation is detected, the contractor shall replace such
defective towers free of cost to the HVPN. All expenditure incurred in erection, to
and fro transportation and any other expenditure or losses incurred by the HVPN
on this account shall be fully borne by the contractor. No extension in delivery time
shall be allowed on this account.

3.24.6 Type of towers to be tested shall be a full scale prototype galvanized tower and shall
be erected vertically on rigid foundation of the stub protruding above ground level as
provided in the design/drawing between ground level and concrete level. This
portion of the stub shall be kept unbraced while testing. The tower erected on test
bed shall not be out of plumb by the more than 1 in 360.

3.24.7 All the measuring instruments shall be calibrated in systematic/ approved manner with
the help of standard weight/device. Calibration shall be done before commencing the
test of each tower upto the maximum anticipated loads to be applied during testing.

3.24.8 The suspension tower is to be tested with an arrangement simulating the chosen
insulator string. The tension tower is to be tested with strain plate as per approved
design/drawings.

3.24.9 The sequence of testing shall be decided by the HVPN at the time of approving the
rigging chart/test data sheet.

3.24.10 The HVPN may decide to carry out the tensile test, bend test etc, as per relevant
IS on few members of the test tower after completion of the test or in case of any
premature failure. The decision of the HVPN regarding choice and number of
members to be tested is final & binding. The contractor shall make suitable
arrangement for the same without any extra cost to the HVPN.

3.24.11 Prefix T shall be marked on all members of test tower in addition to the mark no.
already provided.


Page-33

3.24.12 Owners liability is limited to witnessing testing of towers only once for each type of
tower. Due to premature failure, if the testing of towers is to be repeated more than
once for any type of tower, in such circumstances the contractor has to bear all the
expenses (traveling, boarding & lodging) in respect of owners representative (two
persons).

3.24.13 HVPN, however, reserves the right to waive off the testing of the towers, provided
the successful bidder had earlier successfully tested, erected and commissioned
same towers and certificate for such tests carried out earlier are furnished duly
certified by that purchaser and are found acceptable.

3.24.14 In that case, the same designs will become the property of HVPNL for all intent
and purposes. The complete drawings of towers & Extensions i.e. Structural
drawings, shop floor drawings, assembly drawings, bill of material, foundation
drawings, design calculations and type test reports will be submitted to HVPNL for
further use in the system.

3.25 Method load application

3.25.1 Loads shall be applied according to the approved rigging arrangement through
normal wire attachments, angles or bent plates.

3.25.2 The various types of loads, transverse, vertical and longitudinal shall be applied in
such a way that there is no impact loading on the tower due to jerks from the
winches.

3.25.3 All the loads shall be measured through a suitable arrangement of strain devices or
by using weights. Positioning of the strain devices shall be such that the effect of
pulley friction is eliminated. In case the pulley friction cannot be avoided, the same
will be measured by means of standard weights and accounted for in the test loads.

3.26 Tower testing Procedure

The procedure for conducting the tower test shall be as per IS:802 as follows: -

3.26.1 Bolt slip test

In a bolt slip test the test loads shall be gradually applied up to the design loads under
normal condition, kept constant for two (2) minutes at the design loads and then the
loads are released gradually.

The initial and final readings on the scales (for measurement of deflection) before
application and after the release of loads respectively shall be taken with the help of
theodolite. The difference between these readings gives the values of the bolt slip.


3.26.2 Normal/Broken wire load tests

All the loads, for a particular load-combination test, shall be applied gradually upto the
full design loads in the following steps and shall also be released in the similar
manner:
25 %
50%
75%
90%
95%
100% Page-34

3.26.3 Observation periods

3.26.3.1 Under normal and broken wire load tests, the tower shall be kept under
observation for sign of any failure for two minutes (excluding the time for
adjustment of loads) for all intermediate steps of loading upto and including 95 %
of full design loads.

3.26.3.2 For normal, as well as broken wire tests, the tower shall be kept under observation
for five minutes (excluding the time for adjustment of loads) after it is loaded upto
100 % of full design loads.

3.26.3.3 While the loading operation are in progress, the tower shall be constantly watched,
and if it shows any tendency of failure anywhere, the loading shall be immediately
stopped, released and then entire tower shall be inspected. The reloading shall be
started only after the corrective measures are taken.

3.26.3.4 The deflection of the tower shall be recorded at each intermediate and final stage
of normal load/ broken wire load test by means of a theodolite and graduated
scales fitted on the tower. The structure shall be considered to be satisfactory, if it
is able to support the specified full design loads for five (5) minutes, with no visible
local deformation after unloading (such as bowing, buckling etc.) and no breakage
of elements or constituent parts.

3.26.3.5 Ovalization of holes and permanent deformation of bolts shall not be considered as
failure.

3.27 Recording

The deflections of the tower shall be recorded at each intermediate and final stage of
normal load and broken wire load tests by means of a theodolite and graduated scale.
The scale shall be of about one metre long with marking upto 5 mm accuracy.

3.28 Destruction test

The destruction test shall be carried out under normal condition or broken wire
condition. Under which load condition the destruction test is to be carried out shall be
intimated to the contractor at the time of approving rigging chart/ test data sheet.

The procedure for application of load for normal/ broken wire test shall also be
applicable for destruction test. However, the load shall be increased in steps of five
(5%) percent after the full design loads have been reached.

3.29 Material test;

Coupons shall be cut from test tower members and tested in a laboratory to ascertain
conformity of the material to the governing standard.

3.28 Retest

In the event of premature failure of tower, the part that has failed may be replaced by
another with a greater mechanical strength. The modified structure shall be required
to pass the test for the specified ultimate load values (100% step).

3.29 Test Report

Test report shall be provided according to IS:802 (Part-III)1992.

Page-35

3.30 Packing

Angle section shall be wire bundled.

Cleat angles, gusset plates, brackets, fillet plate, hanger and similar loose pieces shall
be tested and bolted together in multiples or securely wired through holes.

Bolts, nuts, washers and other attachments shall be packed in double gunny bags
accurately tagged in accordance with the contents.

The packings shall be properly done to avoid losses/damages during transit. Each
bundle or package shall be appropriately marked.

3.31 Standards

3.31.1The design, manufacturing, fabrication, galvanizing, testing, erection procedure and
materials used for manufacture and erection of towers, design and construction of
foundations shall conform to the following Indian Standards (IS) International
standards which shall mean latest revisions, with amendments/ changes adopted and
published, unless specifically stated otherwise in the specification. In the event of
supply of material conforming to standards other than specified, the bidder shall
confirm in his bid that these standards are equivalent to those specified. In case of
award, salient features of comparison between the standards proposed by the
contractor and those specified in this document will be provided by the contractor to
establish their equivalence.

3.31.2 The material and services covered under these specifications shall be performed as
per requirements of the relevant standards/codes (latest version) referred hereinafter
against each set of equipment and services. Other internationally acceptable
standards which ensure equal or higher performance than those specified shall also
be accepted.


SR
No.
INDIAN
STANDARDS
TITLE INTERNATIONAL&
INTERNATIONALLY
RECOGNISED
STANDARDS.

1 2 3 4

1 IS:209-REV, Specification for Zinc ISO/R/752-1968 ASTM B6

2 IS:226-1975 Structural steel ISO/R/630-1967 standard
quality CAN/CSA-G40.21
BS 4360

3 IS:269-1976 Ordinary rapid hardening &
low heat Portland cement.

ISO/R/597-1967
4 IS:383-1970 Coarse and fine aggregates
from natural sources for concrete.

CSA A23, 1/A 23.2
5 IS:278 Specification for barbed wire. ASTM A 121

6 IS:432-1966
(part-I&II)
Mild steel and medium tensile bars
and hard drawn steel wire for
concrete reinforcement.
BS-785-1938 CSA-G-30.
Page-36

7 IS:456-2000 Code of practice for plain
and reinforced concerete.

ISO/3893-1977
8 IS:800-1962 Code of practice for use
of structural steel in
general building construction.

CSA S16.1
9 a) IS:802
(part-1)
Code of practice for use
of structural steel in
overhead transmission
line. Materials loads
and permissible stresses.

IEC 826 ASCE 52 BS 8100
b)IS:802
(part-2) 1978
Code of practice for use
of structural steel in
overhead transmission
line. Fabrication,
galvanizing, inspection and
packing.
ASCE 52
c)IS:802
(part-3) 1978
Code of practice for use of
structural steel in overhead
transmission line. Tower testing.

10 IS:808 Dimensions for Hot Rolled steel
beam, column, channel and angle
sections


11 IS:875 Code of practice for design loads
(other than earth-quakes) for
buildings & structures.


12 IS:1139-1966 Hot rolled mild steel, medium
tensile steel and high yield
strength deformed bars for
concrete reinforcements.

CAN/CSA G30.18
ASTM A615
13 IS:1367-1967 Technical supply conditions for
threaded fasteners (first revision)


14 IS:1489-1976 Portland pozzolena cement ISO/R/863-1968

15 IS:1786-1989 Cold twisted steel bars for
concrete reinforcement.


16 IS:1893-1965 Critecia of earthquake resistant
design of structures

IEEE 693
17 IS:2016-1967 Plain washers ISO/R/887-1968. ANSI
B18.22.1

Page-37



18 IS:2131-1967 Method of standard penetration
test for soils.

19 IS:2551-1982 Danger notice plates

20 IS:2629-1966 Recommended practice for hot dip
galvanizing of iron & steel.
21 IS:2633-1972 Method of testing uniformity of
coating of zinc coated articles.
22 IS:3043-1972 Code of practice of earthing (with
amendment No. 1and 2)

23 IS:3063-1972 Single coil rectangular section
spring washers for bolts, nuts,
screws.
24 IS:4091-1967 Code of practice for design and
construction of foundation for
transmission line towers and poles.

25 IS:5358-1969 Hot dip galvanizing coatings on
fasteners.
26 IS:5613 (part-
2/Sec.-1) 1976
Code of practice for design,
installation and maintenance of
overhead power lines (Sec-1:
(Designs)


27

IS:5613 (part-
2/Sec.-2) 1976

Code of practice for design,
installation and maintenance of
overhead power lines (Sec.-2
installation and maintenance)

28 IS:6610-1972 Specification for heavy washers for
steel structures.

29 IS:6639-1972 Hexagonal bolts for steel structure.

30 IS:6745-1972 Methods for determination of
weight of zinc coating of zinc
coated iron and steel articles.

31 Indian electricity rules 1956

32 Publication
No. 19 (N)
700-1963

Regulation for electrical crossing of
Railway Tracks.

33 IS:8500-1977 Specification for weldable
structural steel (medium and high
strength qualities)

BS: 4360
34 IS:2062-1992 Steel for general structural
purposes.


PAGE-38

The standards mentioned above are available from: -

Reference/Abbreviation Name and address from which the standards are available.

IS Bureau of Indian standards, Manak Bhawan, 9 Bahadur
Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi, INDIA.

ISO International Organisation for standardization, Danish
Board of Standardisation Danisk Standardisening Sraat,
Aureheeugej-12, DK-2900 Helleprup DENMARK.

CSA Canadian Standard Association, 178, Rezdale Boulevard,
Rexdale, Ontario, CANADA, M9W IR

BS British Standsrds, British Standard Institution, 101,
Pentonvile Road, N-19-ND, UK.

DIN Deutsches Institue Firr Normung Burggafenstrasse 4-10
Post Fach 1107 D-1000, Berlin-30

Indian Electricity Rules
1956 Regulation for
Electricity Crossing of
Railway Tracks.

Kitab Mahal ,Baba Kharak Singh Marg, New Delhi-110001
INDIA.
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers, 345, East 47
th
Street,
New York, NY-10017-2398 USA

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ,445, Hoes
Lane PO. Box, 1331 Piscatawa NJ-08855-1355 USA

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission Bureau central
de La commission Electrotechnique internatinale 1. Rue de
varombe Geneva Switzerland


















Page-39


4.0 TOWER FOUNDATION
4.1 GENERAL
These specifications provide general guidelines for the construction of tower
foundations as per design supplied by HVPNL and the gantry tower foundations as
per design supplied by HVPNL. However, the successful bidder shall develop the
designs/drawings of 132kV S/C tower foundations. In nutshell, the bidder will have to
develop the designs/drawings of tower foundations for all type of tower structures, the
design of which will be developed by the successful bidder. All the foundation
designs/drawings have to be got checked from some professional institute like NIT
Kurukshetra, PEC Chandigarh, CPRI etc. before submitting the same for formal
approval of HVPNL.

4.2 Before start of work, successful bidder shall carry out trial bore-holes (normally up to
6.0 meter below natural ground level) after every Kilometer en-route or as desired by
the Employer to have a fair idea of soil type/nature and subsoil water position. If the
soil characteristics are changing rapidly or soil up to 6.0 meter is very weak, the depth
of bore-hole be increased beyond 6.0 meters so as to know the soil properties/type
below the foundation. The bore log data containing information such as position of
sub-soil water table, soil strata, the crop pattern in the agricultural fields where the
foundation is to be laid and the suitability for founding the required foundation, shall be
submitted to the Employer for according approval for Classification of foundation
at each location.

4.3 TYPE OF SOIL
Soil en-route the following proposed transmission lines under the scheme is generally
normal/Sandy/rocky.


PACKAGE G-14 (B)
1. 132KV S/C LINE ON D/C TOWERS FROM DHUDIAWALI TO KARIWALA WITH
ACSR 0.4 SQ. ZEBRA.
2. 132KV S/C LINE FROM 220KV S/STN. BATTA TO DHANOURI WITH ACSR 0.4
SQ. ZEBRA
3. 132KV S/C LINE FROM 220KV S/STN. BATTA TO PADLA WITH ACSR 0.4 SQ.
ZEBRA.
4. 132KV S/C LINE ON D/C TOWERS FROM 220KV S/STN. BATTA TO 132KV
S/STN. RAJOUND WITH 0.4 SQ. ACSR.
5. 132KV D/C LINE FROM 400KV S/STN., DEEPALPUR TO 132KV S/STN.
TAJPUR WITH 0.4 SQ. ACSR.

Ground water table enroute all the above said lines generally vary from 30ft. to 100ft.
below Natural Ground Level. The sub soil water level at few locations may be different
due to local conditions. The crop pattern enroute all the above said lines is paddy,
wheat, sugarcane, cotton etc. depending on soil and weather conditions.

4.4 STRUCTURE DESIGN

The structure design of the foundation of Towers, shall be developed by the
successful bidder for the lines (as asked for) on the basis of parameters mentioned
below from para 4.4 to 4.6.
Page-40





4.4.1 DESIGN PARAMETERS
Critical soil data
Type of soil : Normal/Sandy Silt/rocky
Dry bulk density : 1500 kg/m
3

Angle of internal friction : 28
Safe allowable bearing capacity : 6.0 T/m
2
(F.O.S=2.5)

4.4.2 Structural design of the foundations shall be done by Limit State Method.
4.4.3 Partial safety factor for concrete and steel shall be considered as per latest IS: 456.
4.4.4 Particulars of the foundations designed on the basis of soil particulars given above
along with the estimated volumes of concrete and excavation volumes for the various
types of towers shall be given in the drawings to be evolved by the successful bidder.
The foundation shall be designed such as to satisfy the following conditions.
4.4.5 The thickness of concrete in the chimney portion of the tower footing would be such
that it provides minimum cover of not less than 100mm from any part of the stub angle
to the nearest outer surface of the concrete in respect of all dry locations limiting the
minimum section of chimney to 300mm square. In respect of all wet, partially
submerged and fully submerged locations, the chimney should have all around
clearance of 150mm from any part of stub angle limiting to 450 mm sq. minimum.

4.4.6 The chimney top or muffing must be at least 225mm above ground level and also the
coping shall be extended upto lower most joint level between the bottom lattices and
the main corner legs of the tower.

4.4.7 The spread of concrete pyramid or slabs for both PCC and RCC type foundations
shall be limited to 45 degree with respect to the vertical. The centroidal axis of the slab
shall coincide with the axis of the chimney and pass through the centre of foundation
base. The design of the foundations (base slab and its reinforcement) shall take into
account the additional stresses in the foundation resulting from the eccentricity
introduced due to non compliance of this requirement.

4.4.8 At least 100 mm thick pad of size equal to the base of pyramid with its sides vertical
will be provided below the pyramid for PCC type foundations and 150mm for RCC
type foundation is to be provided. Also, at least 100mm thick lean concrete (1:4:8) pad
shall be provided below bottom slab/pyramid.

4.4.9 The thickness of base slab at centre i.e. at the point of maximum bending shall not be
less than 300mm in case of RCC type foundation.

4.4.10 The minimum distance between lowest edge of the stub angle and the bottom surface
of concrete footing shall not be less than 100mm or more than 150mm in case of dry
locations and not less than 150mm or more than 200mm in case of wet locations.

4.4.11 The total depth of foundations except Hard Rock type below the ground level shall not
be less than 1.5m and more than 3.0m. To maintain the
interchangeability of stubs for all types of foundations, for each type of tower, almost
the same depths of foundations shall be used for different types of foundations.

4.4.12 The portion of the stub in the pyramid (or slab) shall be designed to take full down-
thrust or uplift loads by the cleats combined with the bond between stub-angles and
pyramid concrete. The contractor shall furnish the calculation for uprooting of stub
along with the foundation design. Bolted clip angles evenly spaced along all sides of
embedded portion of the stub shall be provided to act as shear connector with
sufficient number of bolts.
Page-41


4.4.13 The overload factor for foundations shall be considered as 1.1 i.e. all the reactions
(compression, tension and side thrust) on foundations shall be increased by 10
percent.

4.5 LOADS ON FOUNDATIONS

4.5.1 The foundations shall be designed to withstand the specific loads of the super
structure and for the full footings reactions obtained from the structural stress analysis
in conformity with the relevant factors of safety.

4.5.2 The reactions on the footings shall be composed of the following type of loads for
which these shall be required to be checked;
a. Max. tension or uplift along the leg slope.
b. Max. compression or down-thrust along the leg slope.
c. Max. horizontal shear or side thrust.

4.5.3 The base slab of the foundation shall be designed for additional moments developing
due to eccentricity of the loads.

4.5.4 The additional weight of concrete in the footing below ground level over the earth
weight and the full weight of concrete above the ground level in the footing and
embedded steel parts will also be taken into account adding to the down thrust.

4.6 STABILITY ANALYSIS

4.6.1 In addition to the strength design, stability analysis of the foundation shall be done to
check the possibility of failure by over-turning, uprooting, sliding and tilting of the
foundation.

4.6.2 The following primary type of soil resistance shall be assumed to act in resisting the
loads imposed on the footing in earth:

a. RESISTANCE AGAINST UPLIFT

The uplift loads will be assumed to be resisted by the weight of earth in an inverted
frustum of a conical pyramid of earth on the footing pad whose sides make an angle
equal to the angle of repose of the earth with the vertical, in average soil. The weight
of concrete embedded in earth and that above the ground will also be considered for
resisting the uplift. In case where the frustum of earth pyramids of two adjoining legs
super-impose each other, the earth frustum will be assumed truncated by a vertical
plane passing through the centre line of the tower base.

b. RESISTANCE AGAINST DOWN THRUST

The following load combinations shall be resisted by the bearing strength of soil.

i. The down thrust loads combined with the additional weight of concrete in
footing below ground over the earth weight and full weight of concrete above
ground level in the footing are assumed to be acting on the total area of the
bottom of the footing.
ii. The moment due to side thrust forces at the bottom of the footing.
iii. Additional moments caused at bottom of footing due to eccentricity of loading,
if any.
Page-42

The structural design of base slab shall be developed for the above load combination.

In case of toe pressure calculation due to above load combination, allowable bearing
pressure can be increased by 25%.

c. RESISTANCE AGAINST SIDE-THRUST

The lateral load carrying of chimney portion of foundation shall be based on the
chimney acting as cantilever aided by the passive earth resistance developed 500mm
below the ground level.

The chimney shaft shall be designed as per limit state method for the combined action
of axial forces, tension and compression and the associated max. bending moment. In
these calculations, the tensile strength of the concrete shall be ignored. Similarly,
since stub angle is embedded in the centre of chimney, its effectiveness in the
reinforcement calculation is to be ignored.

4.7 CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL

a. Dry Soil: Soil shall be termed as dry soil where sub-soil water table is 6M below
the natural ground level of the tower footing.

b. Wet Soil (without de-watering): Soil shall be termed as wet soil (without de-
watering) where sub-soil water is below base of footing and above 6M from natural
ground level and no de-watering is required or the crop pattern is paddy/sugar
cane.

c. Wet Soil (with de-watering): Soil shall be termed as wet soil (with de-watering)
where sub-soil water is above base of footing and de-watering has to be done.

d. Rocky Soil: Hard conglomerate or other soft or fissured rock which can be
quarried or split with crow bars, wedges or pick axes. However, if required, light
blasting may be resorted to for loosening the material.

4.7.1 For excavation purpose, the quoted rates for foundations in wet soil (without de-
watering) shall be considered as applicable for the dry soils. For wet soil (with de-
watering), the quoted rates shall be inclusive of de-watering. The de-watering
operation shall continue to keep the foundation pits dry during concreting and
thereafter for at least 24 hrs. Any de-watering carried out for removal of seepage of
surface water/rainwater will not be considered as de-watering and the soil shall be
termed as Dry Soil.

4.8 FOUNDATION TYPES

4.8.1 GENERAL

Reinforced cement concrete footing shall be used for all types of normal towers/
extension towers in conformity with the present day practices followed in the country
and the specifications laid herein. All the four footings of the tower and their
extensions, if any shall be similar irrespective of down thrust and uplift.

Page-43

4.8.2 Foundation includes supply of materials such as cement, fine and coarse aggregates,
water, reinforcement steel and binding wire etc. Rates quoted for foundations shall
include all items of work relating to supply and installation of foundations such as form
work, excavation and back filing with good soil, compaction, stub setting, shoring &
timbering etc. where ever required, placing of reinforcement in position, concreting
and all other works related for completion of foundation.

4.9 CLASSIFICATION OF FOUNDATIONS

a. Dry Foundation: To be used where sub-soil water table is below 6.0 meter
from Natural Ground Level.

b. Wet Foundation (without de-watering): To be used where sub-soil water
table is below base of footing and up to 6.0 meters from Natural Ground Level
or at location where surface water remains for long periods such as
paddy/sugar cane fields irrespective of sub-soil water depth.

c. Wet Foundation (with de-watering): To be used where sub-soil water table is
above footing base of foundation and actual de-watering has to be carried out
for construction of foundation.
d. Well foundation - To be used where the line crossing the river/ and towers
foundation are coming in the river bed.


4.9.1 Design of foundation for Wet (without de-watering) and Wet (with de-watering) shall
be same.

4.10 PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE & REINFORCEMENT

4.10.1. All the properties of concrete regarding its strength under compression, tension,
shear, punching and bond strength etc. as well as workmanship shall confirm to latest
IS: 456.

4.10.2 The concrete used as lean concrete or base concrete shall be as mentioned on
respective drawings. The aggregate size shall be 40 mm nominal. Base concrete shall
be well compacted. The top surface of base concrete shall be leveled before placing
the reinforcement.

During excavation, if excavation exceeds the required depth or if any loose pocket of
earth is met below the base of footing, then the loose earth shall be removed or
excavation depth be increased till normal hard soil is met as per satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge. This extra depth shall be filled with lean concrete. No extra shall
be paid on account of this extra excavation and lean concrete.

4.10.3 The cement concrete used for foundation shall be of grade M-20 {irrespective of any
grade mentioned on the drawing(s)}. The Mix Design (conforming to IS standards)
shall be done prior to start of work, as per specifications, got approved from the
Employer and shall be used for the construction, provided there is no change in the
source and the quality of materials. The source of materials shall be intimated to the
Employer and shall be ensured that Mix Design is with the materials from intimated
source only and same is not changed during construction. In case source of material
changes or quality of material differs from the earlier approval parameters the Mix
Design shall be done again.
Page-44

4.10.4 The coarse aggregate used shall be 20 mm graded or two types of single size
aggregate mixed in some fixed ratio to have graded 20-mm aggregate. The Coarse
aggregate shall conform to IS 383.

4.10.5 Grading of Fine aggregate shall conform to Zone-II of Table-4 of IS: 383 and shall be
free from deleterious materials.

4.10.6 The environmental exposure condition considered for Mix Design shall be MILD.

4.10.7 For Mix Design the degree of quality control shall be considered as FAIR.

4.10.8 The Water Cement ratio shall be minimum 0.50 and maximum 0.55.

4.10.9 For Transmission Line Tower footings, the minimum Slump shall be 50 mm and
maximum 75 mm.

4.10.10For volumetric use of ingredients for concrete mix, the contractor along with the Mix
Design shall intimate the size of measuring boxes along with the Mix design.

4.10.11The approval of Mix Design shall not absolve the contractor from the responsibility of
achieving the required strength, workability etc. during actual execution. In case of
failure of concrete samples, the work done is liable to be rejected. In such case the
contractor shall recast the foundation at the same location by dismantling the rejected
foundation or at a near by location as directed by the Employer. In case of honey
combing, the contractor shall do the pressure grouting as directed and to the full
satisfaction of Employer. The construction of new foundation in place of rejected one
and pressure grouting if done shall be without any extra payment.

4.10.12 Ordinary Portland_Cement of Grade 43 conforming to IS: 8112 shall be used.
However in case of shortage of OPC Cement, Portland Pozzolona Cement (fly ash
based or calcinated clay based) conforming to IS 1489 Part Part 1 and 2
respectively may be used in the works other than RCC. In case, Portland Pozzolona
Cement is used then curing period shall be enhanced as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge. In RCC works only Ordinary Portland_Cement of Grade 43 shall be used.
4.10.13The water used for mixing concrete and for curing purpose shall be fresh, clean and
free from oils, acids and alkalis, organic materials or other deleterious substance.
Potable water is generally preferred. Saltish or brackish water shall not be used.
Water used shall conform to clause 5.4 of IS 456.
4.10.14 Reinforcement steel (including TMT) Bars manufactured by TISCO, SAIL, IISCO and
RASHTRIYA ISPAT (primary manufacturers) conforming to IS: 1786 for deformed and
cold twisted bars shall only be used. The bidders shall, however, be allowed to use
Amba steel, Rathi steel, Kamdhenu steel, Barnala steel, P.R.S steel, Shidbali steel
(manufactured by secondary manufacturers) only after obtaining non-availability
certificate from the primary manufacturers. Before using secondary steel, the selected
bidder would require to conduct all physical & chemical tests (lot wise & dia. wise) to
establish its conformity to IS Standards. Required grade of steel shall be Fe-415. All
reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose mill scale, dust, loose rust and coats
of paint, oil or other coating, which may destroy or reduce bond with concrete.
Reinforcement bars should be fresh. Contractor shall supply, fabricate and place
reinforcement to shapes and dimensions as indicated on the drawings or as required
to carry out the intent of drawings and specifications. Adequate nos. of chairs, spacers
of required size shall be provided to ensure the proper placement of reinforcement.
The reinforcement bars crossing one another should be tied together at every
intersection with two strands of annealed steel wires 0.9 to 1.6 mm thick twisted and
tied to make the skeleton of the steel work rigid so that the reinforcement does not get
displaced during concrete placement.
Page-45

All the reinforcement steel should be placed/ stacked at site store on raised (at least
0.5 meter from near surroundings) pucca/brick platform or reinforcement steel should
be placed on MS/GI sheets. The reinforcement steel after stacking should be covered
with Tarpaulin to avoid corrosion. Immediately before concreting (portion of
reinforcement to be embedded in concrete) shall be

painted with cement slurry after removing any rust/corrosion/any other foreign
material.

4.10.15 No admixtures shall be used.

4.11 UNIT RATES AND MEASUREMENT
Void
























4.12 CONSTRUCTION OF TOWER FOUNDATIONS AS PER DESIGN SUPPLIED BY
HVPNL
4.12.1 EXCAVATION
Excavation work shall start only after the approval of route plan, the tower foundation
schedule, classification of foundations and the profile by the Employer. The reference
natural ground level shall be so chosen that it is not lower than surroundings and in
normal condition water does not accumulate there, preferably it should be slightly
higher than surroundings.

All excavation for footing shall be made to the lines and grades of the foundation. The
excavation wall shall have stable slope and the pit dimensions shall be such as to
allow a clearance of 150 mm on all sides from the foundation RCC pad. The
contractor should ensure clearance of 150 mm from the foundation RCC pad for
quality work.
Page-4



All excavation shall be protected so as to maintain a clean sub-grade until the footing
is placed, using timbering/shuttering, shoring etc., if necessary. Any sand, mud, silt or
other undesirable materials, which may accumulate in the excavated pit, shall be
removed by the contractor before placing concrete.

4.12.2 No extra charges shall be admissible for the removal of the fallen earth in the pit,
when once excavated.

4.12.3 Wherever ground water table is higher than the base of the foundation, it has to be
depressed by de-watering. During de-watering, water shall be thrown at a place as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. No pit de-watering shall be permitted. Instead,
over all lowering of the water table shall be done by providing sufficient number of
bores around the tower location and by continuous pumping of water through these
bores. Well point system for de-watering of pits can also be adopted. It must be
ensured that during de-watering/pumping operation, no finer particles of soil get
displaced or any cavity is formed below. The boreholes for de-watering shall be
located so as to avoid any hindrance in normal working for construction of foundation.
The construction of foundation shall be carried out in bone-dry condition, which shall
be ensured by effective lowering of water table so that no caving in happens and also
the bottom of the pit is free from slushy conditions. The bores shall be filled with sand
after the work at a particular location is over.

4.13 SETTING OF STUBS

The stubs shall be set correctly in accordance with approved method at the exact
location and aligned precisely at correct levels with the help of stub setting templates
and leveling instruments. Stubs shall be set in the presence of Employers
representative for which the Contractor shall give adequate advance intimation to the
Employer. All necessary precautions should be taken to ensure that the stubs finally
set in are not disturbed. If these are disturbed due to any reason, the bidder shall
reset the same without any extra cost.
4.14 STUB SETTING TEMPLATES

For all types of towers viz. with or without extension and also for leg extensions, the
contractor at his own cost shall arrange the stub-setting templates. Stub templates for
standard towers and towers with extension shall be painted. Normally, for each
transmission line tower package, sufficient numbers of stub templates should be
deployed. However, if the Employer feels that more number of templates are required
for timely completion of a particular line, the contractor shall have to deploy the same
without any extra cost to the Employer.

After completion of the project, one set of each type of stub setting template as
applicable shall be supplied to the Employer at no extra cost to the Employer.

4.15 MIXING, PLACING AND COMPACTING OF CONCRETE

4.15.1 The concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. The mixer shall comply with IS:
1791 & IS: 12119. The mixer shall be fitted with water measuring devices. Mixer
without trough should not be brought at site. In case of difficult terrain, the Employer at
his discretion may permit hand mixing but this should not be made a routine. In case
of hand mixing, 10% extra cement shall be used without any extra cost.
Page-47



4.15.2 Mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution of material and the mix
become uniform in colour and consistency. If there is segregation after unloading from
mixer, the concrete should be re-mixed, but in no case the mixing be done for less
than two minutes. Normally, mixing shall be done close to the foundation, but in case
it is not possible the concrete may be mixed at a nearest convenient place. From
mixer the concrete shall be put on pucca platform or steel troughs, which shall be leak
proof to avoid any loss of water/slurry.

The concrete shall be transported from the place of mixing to the place of final deposit
as rapidly as practicable by methods, which will prevent the segregation or loss of any
ingredient. The concrete shall be placed and compacted before setting commences.

4.15.3 Form boxes of required size as per approved Mix Design volumes shall be used for
casting all type of foundations. Form boxes shall be rigidly tightened so that there are
no distortions in the shape of foundations. Form boxes shall be made sufficiently
strong to withstand all the loads and vibrations. For bottom pad portion sufficiently
wide window of minimum size 450 x 300 mm be left on each side at top for placing of
concrete and for use of vibrators to ensure thorough compaction. After every use, the
form box(es) be checked for any deformation and if necessary be repaired/corrected
to original position for reuse.

4.15.4 On removal of the form-work, if the concrete surface is found damaged, it shall be
repaired with rich cement sand mortar to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
The foundation pits be back-filled only after necessary repairs, if any as required
above has been done.

4.16 BACK-FILLING AND REMOVAL OF STUB TEMPLATE

4.16.1 The formwork shall be removed after 24 hours (minimum). Due care shall be taken not
to injure the concrete by excessive striking the formwork. In case the Portland
Pozzolona cement has been used, the removal of formwork shall be delayed suitably
as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

4.16.2 After opening of formwork and removal of shoring and timbering, backfilling shall be
started, after repairs, if any, to the foundation concrete as described under para 4.12.4
above. Backfilling shall normally be done with excavated soil. In case the excavated
soil consists of large boulders/stones, it should be broken to a maximum size of 80
mm. If the excavated earth has harmful salts, it shall not, under any circumstance, be
used for backfilling. In such case excavated earth shall be disposed off as directed by
the Engineer-in-Charge and suitable earth (clean and free from harmful salts, organic
and other foreign materials) be brought for back filling. This shall be done by the
contractor at his own cost irrespective of lead involved for bringing the suitable earth.

4.16.3 The earth shall be deposited in layers (maximum 200 mm layers), leveled and wetted
and tampered properly before another layer is deposited. After the pits have been
backfilled to full depth, the stub template may be removed.

4.16.4 The backfilling and final grading shall be carried upto an elevation of about 75 mm
above the finished ground level to drain out water. After backfilling 50 mm high
earthen embankment (bandh) will be made along the side of excavation pits and
sufficient water will be poured in the backfilled.
Page-48



4.17 CURING

Curing shall start after 24 hours of concreting to keep the concrete wet continuously
for a period of 10 days. However, after a minimum period of 72 hours the pit may be
backfilled with suitable earth sprinkled with necessary amount of water and well
consolidated in layers not exceeding 200mm. Both backfilled earth and exposed
chimney top shall be kept wet for the remainder of the prescribed time of 10 days. The
uncovered concrete chimney above the backfilled earth shall be kept wet by providing
gunny bags dipped in water fully wrapped around the concrete chimney for curing. It
must be ensured that the bags are kept wet by the frequent pouring of water on them.
In case Portland Pozolona cement has been used, curing period shall be increased as
decided by the Engineer-in-charge.

4.18 PROTECTION OF TOWER FOOTING

4.18.1 The work shall include all necessary brick/stone masonry (in C.M. 1:5) revetments,
earth filling above ground level and the clearance from stacking on the site of surplus
excavated soil. Special measures for protection of foundation wherever required shall
be provided after getting prior approval of the Employer and as per directions of the
Engineer-in-Charge.

4.18.2 The excess quantity of earth required for protection of tower (after utilizing the
excavated earth) and to be brought from outside shall be paid as per the rate provided
in the letter of award.

4.18.3 The provisional quantities for foundation protection works are furnished in the
Schedule of Quantities as well as in the Price Schedule. The unit rates shall be
applicable for adjusting with the actual quantities of protection work done.

4.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

The contractor shall submit the Field Quality Control Plan for effective control on
quality of civil works for approval of the Employer. All costs of testing as per approved
Field Quality Control Plan or as directed by Employer shall be borne by the
Contractor.

4.20 Technical Specification given in the Contract will govern for the different
items/activities. The items/activities for which detailed specifications have not been
given in the Contract Agreement will be governed by latest ISI/ NBC specifications.
4.21 Wherever IS Code has been mentioned, it shall mean IS Code with latest
amendments.













Page-49

5.0 TOWER ERECTION, STRINGING AND INSTALLATION OF LINE MATERIAL.

5.1 GENERAL

5.1.1 The details of the scope of erection work shall include the cost of labour, all tools and
plants and all other incidental expenses in connection with erection and stringing
work.

5.1.2 The Bidder shall be responsible for transportation of all the materials as per the scope
of work to site, proper storage and preservation at their own cost till such time the
erected line is taken over by the HVPNL. Bidder shall set up required number of
stores along the line and the exact location of such stores shall be discussed and
agreed to between the Bidder and the HVPNL. It shall be entirely the responsibility of
the Bidder to arrange receipt, unloading and loading and transportation of the supplied
items to the stores, proper storage and safe custody.

5.2 TREATMENT OF MINOR GALVANISNING DAMAGE

In case any minor damage to galvanizing is noticed, the same shall be treated with
zinc rich paint (commercial grade) (having at least 90% zinc content) before erection.

5.3 ASSEMBLY

The method followed for the erection of tower, shall ensure the points mentioned
below:

a) Straining of the members shall not be permitted for bringing them into position,
it may, however be necessary to match hole positions at joints and to facilitate
this, tommy bars not more than 450 mm long may be used.

b) Before starting erection of an upper section, the lower section shall be
completely braced and all bolts provided and tightened adequately in
accordance with approved drawings to prevent any mishap during tower
erection.

c) All plan diagonals relevant to a section of tower shall be placed in position
before assembly of upper section is taken up.

d) The bolt position in assembled towers shall be as per IS:5613 (Part-II/section-
2)-1976.

e) Tower shall fitted with number plate, danger plate, phase plate, circuit plate and
anti-climbing device barbed wire type as described.

f) All blank holes, if any left, after complete erection of the tower, are to be filled
up by bolts and nuts of correct size.




Page-50

5.4 TIGHTENING AND PUNCHING OF BOLTS AND NUTS.

5.4.1 All nuts shall be tightened properly using correct size spanner/torque wrench. Before
tightening, it will be seen that filler washers and plates are placed in gaps between
members wherever applicable. Bolts of proper size and length are inserted and one
spring washer is inserted under each nut. In case of step bolts, spring washers shall
be placed under the outer nut. The tightening shall progressively be carried out from
the top downwards, care being taken that all bolts at every level are tightened
simultaneously. The threads of bolts projecting outside the nuts shall be punched at
their position on the diameter to ensure that the nuts are not loosened in course of
time. If during tightening a nut is found to be slipping or running over the bolt threads,
the bolt together with the nut shall be replaced.

5.4.2 The threads of all the bolts projected outside the nuts shall be welded at two
diametrically opposite places. The circular length of each welding shall be at least
10mm. The welding shall be provided from ground level to bottom cross arm level for
double circuit towers. After welding, cold galvanized paint having at least 90% zinc
content shall be applied to the welded portion. At least two coats of the paint shall be
applied. The cost of welding and paint including application of paint shall be deemed
to be included in the erection price.

5.4.3 In addition to the tack welding of nuts with bolts, as described above, the Bidder can
also propose some alternative arrangements, like use of epoxy resin adhesive which
can serve the purpose of locking the nut permanently with the bolt and thus preventing
pilferage of the tower members.

5.5 INSULATOR HOISTING

5.5.1 I suspension insulator strings shall be used on suspension towers and tension
insulator strings on angle and dead end towers. These shall be fixed on all the towers
just prior to the stringing. Damaged insulators and fittings, if any, shall not be
employed in the assemblies. Before hoisting all insulators shall be cleaned in a
manner that will not spoil, injure or scratch the surface of the insulator, but in no case
shall any oil be used for the purpose. Corona control rings/arching horn shall be fitted
in an approved manner. Torque wrench shall be used for fixing different line materials
and their components, like suspension clamp for conductor and earthwire etc.
Whenever recommended by the Bidder of the same for river crossing towers.

5.6 HANDING OF CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE

5.6.1 The Bidder shall be entirely responsible for any damage to the towers or conductors
during stringing. While running out the conductors, care shall be taken that the
conductors do not touch or rub against the ground or objects which could cause
scratches or damages to the strands. The conductors shall be run out of the drums
from the top in order to avoid damage due to chafing. Immediately after running out,
the conductor shall be raised at the supports to the levels of the clamps and placed
into the running blocks. The groove of the running blocks shall be of such a design
that the seat is semi-circular and larger than the diameter of the conductor/earthwire
and it does not slip over or rub against the sides. The grooves shall be lined with hard
rubber or neoprene to avoid damage to conductor and shall be mounted on properly
lubricated bearings.


Page-51

5.6.2 The running blocks shall be suspended in a manner to suit the design of the cross-
arm. All running blocks especially those at the tension end, will be fitted on the cross-
arm with jute cloth wrapped over the steel work and under the slings to avoid damage
to the slings as well as to the protective surface finish of the steel work. In case
suspension, or section towers are used even for temporary terminations, if this be
unavoidable, they shall be well guyed and steps shall be taken by the Bidder to avoid
damage. Guying proposal alongwith necessary calculations shall be submitted by the
contactor to HVPNL for the approval. Proper T&P shall also be made available to the
HVPNL by the contactor for checking the tensions in the guy wires. The drums shall
be provided with a suitable braking device to avoid damages, loose running out and
kinking of the conductor. The conductor shall be continuously observed for loose or
broken strands or any other damage. When approaching end of a drum length, at
least three coils shall be left when the stringing operations are to be stopped. These
coils are to be removed carefully, and if another length is required to be run out, a joint
shall be made as per the recommendations of the Bidders.

5.6.3 Repairs to conductors. If necessary, shall be carried out during the running out
operations, with repair sleeves. Repairing of conductor surface shall be done only in
case of minor damage. Scuff marks etc. keeping in view both electrical and
mechanical safe requirements. The final conductor surface shall be clean smooth and
without any projections, sharp points, cuts, abrasions etc.

5.6.4 Conductor splices shall be so made that they do not crack or get damaged in the
stringing operation. The Bidder shall use only such equipment/methods during
conductor stringing which ensures complete compliance in this regard.

5.6.5 Derricks shall be used where roads, rivers, channels, telecommunication or overhead
power line, Railway line, fences or walls have to be crossed during stringing
operations. It shall be seen that normal services are not interrupted or damage caused
to property. Shut down shall be obtained when working at crossing of overhead power
line. The Bidder shall be entirely responsible for the proper handling of the conductor,
earthwire and accessories in the field.

5.6.6 The sequence of running out shall be from top to downwards, i.e. the earthwire shall
be run out first, followed by the conductors in succession. Unbalances of loads on
tower shall be avoided as far as possible.

5.6.7 The proposed transmission line may run parallel for certain distance with the existing
transmission line which may remain energized during the stringing period. As a result
there is a possibility of dangerous voltage build up due to electromagnetic and
electrostatic coupling in the pulling wire, conductors and earthwires, which although
comparatively small during normal operations can be severe during switching. It shall
be the Bidders responsibility to take adequate safety precautions to protect his
employees and others from this potential danger.

5.6.8 Towers not designed for one sided stringing shall be well guyed and steps taken by
Bidder to avoid damage. The Bidder has to submit the detailed proposal alongwith the
calculation for guying which shall be approved by the HVPNL. Proper T&P shall be
made available to the HVPNL by the Bidder for checking the tensions in the guy wires.
All the expenditure on account of the above work is deemed to be included in the bid
price and no extra payment shall be made for the same.


Page-52

5.7 STRINGING OF CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE

5.7.1 The stringing of the conductor shall be done by standard stringing method.

5.7.2 After being pulled the conductor/earthwire shall not be allowed to hang in the stringing
blocks for more than 96 hours being pulled to the specified sag.

5.7.3 The stringing of conductor shall be done as per initial stringing chart duly approved by
the HVPNL. The Bidder shall prepare the initial stringing chart taking account of
conductor creep in respect of ACSR Zebra & ACSR Panther which shall be
compensated by over-tensioning the conductor at a temperature of 26
o
C (for Zebra)
and 21
o
C (for Panther) respectively lower than the ambient temperature during
stringing.

5.7.4 The Bidder shall give complete details of the stringing methods, which he proposes to
follow. Before the commencement of stringing the Bidder shall submit the stringing
charts for the conductor and earthwire for various temperatures and span, alongwith
equivalent spans for the approval of the HVPNL.

5.8 JOINTING

5.8.1 All the joints on the conductor and earthwire shall be of compression type, in
accordance with the recommendations of the Bidder for which all necessary tools,
equipment like compressors, dies, processes etc. shall have to be arranged by the
Bidder. Each part of the joint shall be cleaned by wire brush to make it free of rust or
dirt etc. and properly greased with anticorrosive compound if required, and as
recommended by the Bidder before the final compression is done with the
compressors.

5.8.2 All joints or splices shall be made at least 30 metres away from the structures. No
joints or splices shall be made in span crossing over main Roads, Railways, small
rivers with tension spans. During compression or splicing operation the conductor
shall be handled in such a manner as to prevent lateral or vertical bearing against the
dies. After pressing the joint the aluminum sleeve shall have all corners rounded,
burrs and sharp edges removed and smoothened.

5.8.3 During stringing of conductor to avoid any damage to the joint, the Bidder shall use a
suitable protector with mid span compression joints in case joints are to be passed
over pulley blocks/aerial rollers. The size of the groove of the pulley shall be such that
the joint along with protection can be passed over it smoothly.

5.9 SAGGING-IN-OPERATION

5.9.1 The conductor shall be pulled up to the desired sag and left in running blocks for at
least one hour after which the sag shall be re-checked and adjusted, if necessary
before transferring the conductors from the running blocks to the suspension clamps.
The conductor shall be clamped within 96 hours of sagging in.

5.9.2 The sag will be checked in the first an the last span of the section in case of sections
up to eight spans and in one intermediate span also for sections with more than eight
spans. The sag shall also be checked when the conductors have been drawn up and
transferred from running blocks to the insulator clamps.
Page-53

5.9.3 The running blocks, when suspended from the transmission structure for sagging shall
be so adjusted that the conductors on running blocks will be at the same height as the
suspension clamp to which it is to be secured.

5.9.4 At sharp vertical angles, the sags and tensions shall be checked on both sides of the
angle, the conductor and earthwire shall be checked on the running blocks for equality
of tension on both sides. The suspension insulator assemblies will normally assume
vertical positions when the conductor is clamped.

5.9.5 Tensioning and sagging operations shall be carried out in calm weather when rapid
changes in temperatures are not likely to occur.

5.10 TENSIONING AND SAGGING OF CONDUCTORS AND EARTHWIRE

The tensioning and sagging shall be done in accordance with the approved stringing
charts before the conductors and earthwire are finally attached to the towers through
the earthwire clamps for the earthwire and insulator strings for the conductor. The
initial stringing chart for shall be used for the conductor and final stringing chart for
earthwire should be employed for this purpose. Dynamometers shall be employed for
measuring tension in the conductor and earthwire. The dynamometers employed shall
be periodically checked and calibrated with the standard dynamometer.

5.11 CLIPPING IN

5.11.1 Clipping of the conductors in position shall be done in accordance with the
recommendations of the Bidder. Conductor shall be fitted with armour rods where it is
made to pass through suspension clamps.

5.11.2 The jumpers at the section and angle towers shall be formed to parabolic shape to
ensure maximum clearance requirements.

5.11.3 Fasteners in all fittings and accessories shall be secured in position. The security clip
shall be properly opened and sprung into position.

5.12 FIXING OF CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE ACCESSORIES

Vibration dampers for conductor and earthwire and other conductor and earthwire
accessories shall be installed by the Bidder as per the design requirement and
respective Bidders instructions within 24 hours of the conductor/earthwire clamping.
While installing the conductor and earthwire accessories, proper care shall be taken to
ensure that the surface are clean and smooth and no damage shall occur to any part
of the accessories.

5.13 REPLACEMENT

If any replacements are to be effected after stringing and tensioning or during
maintenance, leg members and bracing shall not be removed without reducing the
tension on the tower with proper guying or releasing the conductor. If the replacement
of cross arms becomes necessary after stringing, the conductor shall be suitably tied
to the tower at tension points or transferred to suitable roller pulleys at suspension
points.

Page-54


5.14 PREMITTED EXTRA CONSUMPTION OF LINE MATERIALS

5.14.1 The Bidder shall make every effort to minimize the breakages, losses & wastages of
the line material during erection. However, while calculating the quantities of line
materials, HVPNL shall permit the Bidder extra consumption of conductor and
earthwire up to the limit of 1%. The Bidder shall be permitted to dispose off the scraps,
if any, at their end. In case of conductor and earthwire, the permitted extra
consumption limit of 1% is inclusive of sag, stringing damages, losses and wastages
etc. The quantity of conductor and earthwire shall be worked out as per following
norms.

a) Quantity of conductor = line length as per detailed survey
x No. of phases (3) x No. of circuits

b) Quantity of earthwire = line length as per detailed survey

The Bidder shall not be required to return to the HVPNL empty conductor and
earthwire drums as the same shall be deemed to become his property.

For other line materials i.e. Disc insulator, Hardware and accessories for conductor
and earthwire the actual quantity incorporated on transmission lines shall be approved
as consumption.

5.14.2 The Bidder shall be permitted to dispose off the empty conductor and earthwire
drums at his cost.

5.15 FINAL CHECKING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

After completion of the works, final checking of the line shall be done by the Bidder to
ensure that all the foundation works, tower erection, and stringing have been done
strictly according to the specifications and as approved by the HVPNL. All the works
shall be thoroughly inspected keeping in view of the following main points:

a) Sufficient back filled earth is lying over each foundation pit and it is equately
compacted.
b) Concrete chimneys and their copings are in good finely shaped conditions.
c) All the tower members are correctly used, strictly according to final approved
drawing and are free of any defect or damage whatsoever.
d) All bolts are properly tightened and punched/tack welded and painted Zinc rich
primer and enamel paint.
e) The stringing of the conductors and earthwire has been done as per the
approved sag and tension charts and desired clearances are clearly available.
f) All conductor and earthwire accessories are properly installed.
g) All other requirements to complete the work like fixing of danger plate, phase
plate, number plate, anti climbing device, aviation signal (wherever required)
etc. are properly installed.
h) Wherever required it should be ensured that revetment is provided.
i) The original tracings of profile route alignment and tower, design, structural
drawings, bill of material, shop drawings of all towers other that the towers
designed by the HVPNL are submitted to the HVPNL for reference and record.
j) The insulation of line as a whole is tested by the contactor by providing his own
equipment, labour etc. to the satisfaction of the HVPNL.
k) All towers are to be properly grounded.
l) The line is tested satisfactorily for commissioning purpose. Page-55
6. GENERAL TECHNICAL CONDITIONS

6.1.1 The following provisions shall supplement all the detailed technical specifications
and requirements brought out herein. The Bidders proposal shall be based on the
use of materials complying fully with the requirements specified herein.

6.2 ENGINEERING DATA

6.2.1 The furnishing of engineering data by the Bidder shall be in accordance with the
schedule as specified in the technical specifications. The review of these data by
the HVPNL will cover only general conformance of the data to the specifications
and not a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities and details of the materials,
or items indicated or the accuracy of the information submitted. This review by the
HVPNL shall not be considered by the Bidder, as limiting any of his responsibilities
and liabilities for mistakes and deviations from the requirements, specified under
these specifications.

6.2.2 All engineering data submitted by the Bidder after review by the HVPNL shall form
part of the contract documents.

6.3 DRAWINGS

In addition to those stipulated in clause regarding drawings in conditions of
contract, the following also shall apply in respect of Bidders drawings.

6.3.1 All drawings submitted by the Bidder including those submitted at the time of bid
shall be with sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement, dimensions,
material description, bill of materials, weight of each component, break-up for
packing and shipment, fixing arrangement required, the dimensions required for
installation and any other information specifically requested in these specifications.

6.3.2 Each drawing submitted by the Bidder shall be clearly marked with the name of the
HVPNL, the specification title, the specification number and the name of the
project. All titles, noting, markings and writings on the drawing shall be in English.
All the dimensions should be to the scale and in metric units.

6.3.3 The drawings submitted by the Bidder shall be reviewed by the HVPNL as far as
practicable within 30 days and shall be modified by the Bidder if any modifications
and/ or corrections are required by the HVPNL. The Bidder shall incorporate such
modifications and/or corrections and submit the final drawings for approval. Any
delays arising out of failure by the Bidder to rectify the drawings in good time shall
not alter the contract completion date.

6.3.4 The drawings submitted for approval to the HVPNL shall be in quadruplicate. One
print of such drawings shall be returned to the Bidder by the HVPNL marked
approved / approved with corrections. The Bidder shall thereupon furnish the
HVPNL additional prints as may be required along with one reproducible in original
of the drawings after incorporating all corrections.

6.3.5 The work shall be performed by the Bidder strictly in accordance with these
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the
HVPNL, if so required.


Page-56
6.3.6 All manufacturing, fabrication and erection work under the scope of Bidder, prior to
the approval of the drawings shall be at the Bidders risk. The Bidder may make
any changes in the design which are necessary to conform to the provisions and
intent of the Bidder and such changes will again be subject to approval by the
HVPNL.

6.3.7 The approval of the documents and drawings by the HVPNL shall mean that the
HVPNL is satisfied that:

a) The Bidder has completed the part of the works covered by the subject document
(i.e. confirmation of progress of work.)

b) The works appear to comply with requirements of specifications.

In no case the approval by the HVPNL of any document does imply compliance
with all technical requirement nor the absence of errors in such documents.

If errors are discovered any time during the validity of the contract, then the Bidder
shall be responsible of their consequences.

6.3.8 The HVPNL may use a 35mm microfilm system in processing drawings. All
drawings shall be suitable for microfilming. Drawings, which are not suitable for
microfilming, will not be accepted.

A copy of each drawing reviewed will be returned to the Bidder as stipulated
herein.

6.3.9 Copies of drawings returned to the Bidder will be in the form of a print with the
HVPNL marking, or a print made from a microfilm of the marked up drawing.

6.3.10 The following is the generic list of the documents and drawings that are to be
approved by the HVPNL.

a) Work schedule (master network) plan.

b) Sag-tension calculation and sag-template curve drawings.

c) Tower spotting data.

d) Detailed survey report and profile drawing showing ground clearance and tower
locations.

e) Tower schedule and foundation classification for individual tower locations.

f) Soil investigation report.

g) Tower footing earthing drawing.

h) Stringing procedure and stringing chart.

i) Tower accessories drawings like design plate, name plate etc.

j) Quality plan for fabrication and site activities including quality system.

k) Sub-vendors approval etc.


Page-57
6.4 DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS

6.4.1 The HVPNL or the Bidder may propose change in the specification and if the
parties agree upon any such changes and the cost implication, the specification
shall be modified accordingly.

6.4.2 If any such agreed upon change is such that it affects the price and schedule of
completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the
price and/ or schedule of completion before the Bidder proceeds with the change.
Following such agreement, the provision thereof, shall be deemed to have been
amended accordingly.

6.5 DESIGN CO-ORDINATION:

6.5.1 The Bidder shall be responsible for the selection and design of appropriate
material/item to provide the best co-ordinated performance of the entire system.
The basic design requirements are detailed out in this specification. The design of
various components, sub-assemblies and assembles shall be so done that it
facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance.

6.6 DESIGN REVIEW MEETING:

The Bidder will be called upon to attend design review meetings with the HVPNL
and the consultants of the HVPNL during the period of contract. The Bidder shall
attend such meetings at his own cost at Panchkula or at mutually agreed venue as
and when required. Such review meeting will be held generally four times in a
year.

6.7 PACKING:

6.7.1 All the materials shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and crated
to prevent damage or deterioration during transit, handing and storage at site till
the time of erection. The Bidder shall be responsible for any loss or damage during
transportation, handing and storage due to improper packing.

6.7.2 The Bidder shall include and provide for securely protecting and packing the
materials so as to avoid loss or damage during transport by air, sea, Rail and road.

6.7.3 All packing shall allow for easy removal and checking at site. Wherever necessary,
proper arrangement for attaching slings for lifting shall be provided. All packages
shall be clearly marked for with signs showing up and down on the sides of boxes,
and handling and unpacking instructions as considered necessary. Special
precaution shall be taken to prevent rusting of steel and iron parts during transit by
sea.

6.7.4 The cases containing easily damageable material shall be very carefully packed
and marked with appropriate caution symbols, i.e. fragile, handle with care, use no
hook etc wherever applicable.

6.7.5 Each package shall be legibly marked by the Bidder at his expenses showing the
details such as description and quantity of contents, the name of the consignee
and address, the gross and net weight of the package, the name of the Bidder etc.

Page-58


7. ERECTION CONDITIONS:

7.1 The following shall supplement the conditions already contained in the other parts
of these specifications and documents and shall govern that portion of the work on
this contract to be performed at site.

7.2 REGULATION OF LOCAL AUTHORITIES AND STATUTES:

7.2.1 The contactor shall comply with all the rules and regulations of local authorities
during the performance of his field activities. He shall also comply with the
minimum wages act. 1948 and the payment of wages act (both of the government
of India) and the rules made there under in respect of any employee or workman
employed or engaged by him or his sub-Bidder.

7.2.2 All registration and statutory inspection fees, if any, in respect of his work pursuant
to this contract shall be to the account of the Bidder. However, any registration,
statutory inspection fees lawfully payable under the provisions of the statutory laws
and its amendments from time to time during erection in respect of the
transmission line, ultimately to be owned by the HVPNL, shall be to the account of
the HVPNL. Should any such inspection or registration need to be re- arranged
due to the fault of the Bidder or his sub-Bidder, the additional fees to such
inspection and/or registration shall be borne by the Bidder.

7.3 BIDDERS FIELD OPERATION

7.3.1 The Bidder shall keep the HVPNL informed in advance regarding his field activity
plans and schedules for carrying out each part of the works. Any review of such
plan or schedule or method of work by the HVPNL shall not relieve the Bidder of
any of his responsibilities towards the filed activities. Such reviews shall also not
be considered as an assumption of any risk or liability by the HVPNL or any of his
representatives and no claim of the Bidder will be entertained because of the
failure or inefficiency of any such plan or schedule or method of work reviewed.
The Bidder shall be solely responsible for the safety, adequacy and efficiency of
tools and plants and his erection methods.

7.4 PROGRESS REPORT

7.4.1 Appropriate visual charts shall accompany the monthly progress reports detailing
out the progress achieved on all erection activities as compared to the schedules.
The report shall also indicate the reasons for the variance between the scheduled
and actual progress and the action proposed for corrective measures, wherever
Necessary.

7.5 MAN POWER DEPLOYMENT REPORT

7.5.1 The Bidder shall submit to the HVPNL, on the first day of every month, a man
power deployment schedule for each activity.

7.5.2 The Bidder shall also submit to the HVPNL on the first day of every month, a man
power deployment report of the previous month detailing the number of persons
scheduled to have been employed and actually employed.
Page-59

7.5.3 FACILITIES TO BE PROVIDED BY THE BIDDER

7.5.4 TOOLS, TACKLE AND SCAFFOLDINGS

The Bidder shall provide all the construction equipment, tools, tackle and
scaffoldings required for construction, erection, testing and commissioning of the
transmission line covered under the contract. He shall submit a list of all such
materials to the HVPNL before the commencement of work at site. These tools
and tackle shall not be removed from the site without the written permission of the
HVPNL.

7.5.5 FIRST AID AND GENERAL HYGIENE

The contactor shall provide all necessary first aid facilities for all his employees,
representatives and workmen working at the site. Enough number of Bidders
personnel shall be trained in administering first aid.

Similarly the labour colony, the offices and the residential areas of the contactors
employees and workmen shall be kept clean and neat to the entire satisfaction of
the HVPNL. Proper sanitary arrangements shall be provided by the Bidder, in the
work-areas, office and residential areas of the Bidder. Waste oil shall be disposed
off in a manner acceptable to the HVPNL. Under no circumstances shall waste oil
be dumped into uncontrolled drains.

7.6 FIRE PROTECTION

7.6.1 The work procedures that are to be used during the erection shall be those which
minimise fire hazards to the extent practicable. Combustible materials, combustible
waste and rubbish shall be collected and removed from the site at least once each
day. Fuels, oils and volatile or flammable materials shall be stored away from the
construction site and equipment and material stores in safe containers.

7.6.2 All the contactors supervisory personnel and sufficient number of workers shall be
trained for fire-fighting and shall be assigned specific fire protection duties. Enough
of such tainted personnel must be available at the site during the entire period of
the contract.

7.6.3 The Bidder shall provide enough fire protection equipment of the types and
number for the ware house, office, temporary structures, labour colony area etc.
Access to such fire protection equipment, shall be easy and kept open at all time.

7.7 SECURITY

The Bidder shall have total responsibility for all equipment and materials in his
custody, stored, loose, semi-assembled and/or erected by him at site. The Bidder
shall make suitable security arrangements including employment of security
personnel to ensure the protection of all materials, equipment and works from
theft, fire pilferage and any other damages and loss.

7.8 METERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE

7.8.1 All the supplies under the contract as well as HVPNL supplied items arriving at site
shall be promptly received, unloaded and transported and stored in the stores by
the Bidder.
Page-60
7.8.2 Bidder shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the HVPNL
immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc. for the purpose of HVPNL
information only. The Bidder shall submit to the HVPNL every week a report
detailing all the receipts during the week. However, the Bidder shall be solely
responsible for any shortages or damages in transit, handling and/or in storage
and erection at site. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by
the transporters, Railways etc. shall be to the account of the Bidder.

7.8.3 The Bidder shall maintain an accurate and exhaustive record detailing out the list
of all items received by him for the purpose of erection and keep such record open
for the inspection of the HVPNL.

7.8.4 All items shall be handled very carefully to prevent any damage or loss. The
materials stored shall be properly protected to prevent damage. The materials from
the store shall be moved to the actual location at the appropriate time so as to
avoid damage of such materials at site.

7.8.5 All the materials stored in the open or dusty location must be covered with suitable
weather-proof and flame proof covering material wherever applicable.

7.8.6 The Bidder shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities, to
store all items/materials, which require indoor storage.

7.9 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT

7.9.1 Time is the essence of the contract and the Bidder shall be responsible for
performance of his works in accordance with the specified construction schedule. If
at any time, the Bidder is falling behind the schedule for reasons attributable to
him, he shall take necessary action to make good for such delays by increasing his
work force or by working overtime or otherwise to accelerate the progress of the
work and to comply with schedule and shall communicate such actions in writing to
the HVPNL, satisfying that his action will compensate for the delay. The Bidder
shall not be allowed any extra compensation for such action.

7.10 FIELD OFFICE RECORDS

The Bidder shall maintain at his site office up-to-date copies of all drawings,
specifications and other supplementary data complete with all the latest revisions
there to. The Bidder shall also maintain, in addition, the continuous record of all
changes to the above contract documents, drawings, specifications,
supplementary data, etc. effected at the field and on completion of his total
assignment under the contract shall incorporate data to indicate as installed
conditions of the material supplied and erected under the contract. Such drawings
and engineering data shall be submitted to the HVPNL in required number of
copies.

7.11 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND BIDDERS LIABLILITY

7.11.1 The Bidder will ensure provision of necessary safety equipment such as barriers,
sign-boards, warning lights and alarms, etc. to provide adequate protection to
persons and property. The Bidder shall be responsible to give reasonable notice to
the HVPNL and the HVPNLs of public or private property and utilities when such
property and utilities are likely to get damaged or injured during the performance of
his works and shall make all necessary arrangements with such HVPNLs, related
to removal and/or replacement or protection of such property and utilities.

Page-61

7.12 PROTECTON OF MONUMENTS AND REFERENCE POINTS

The Bidder shall ensure that any finds such as relics, antiques, coins, fossils, etc.
which he may come across during the course of performance of his works either
during excavation or elsewhere, are properly protected and handed over to the
HVPNL. Similarly, the Bidder shall ensure that the bench marks, reference points,
etc. which are marked either with the help of HVPNL or by the HVPNL shall not be
disturbed in any way during the performance of its works, if any work, is to be
performed which disturbs such reference, the same shall be done only after these
are transferred to other suitable locations under the direction of the HVPNL. The
Bidder shall provide all necessary materials and assistance for such relocation of
reference points etc.

7.13 WORK AND SAFETY REGULATIONS

7.13.1 The Bidder shall ensure safety of all the workmen, materials plant and equipment
belonging to him or to the others, working at the site. The Bidder shall also provide
for all safety notices and safety equipment required by the relevant legislations and
deemed necessary by the HVPNL.

7.13.2 The Bidder will notify, well in advance to the HVPNL, its intention to bring to the
site any container filled with liquid or gaseous fuel or explosive or petroleum
substance of such chemicals, which may involve hazards. The HVPNL shall have
the right to prescribe the conditions, under which such a container is to be stored,
handled and used during the performance of the works and the Bidder shall strictly
adhere to and comply with such Instructions. The HVPNL shall also have the right,
at his sole discretion, to inspect any such container or such construction
plant/equipment for which materials in the container is required to be used and if in
his opinion, its use is not safe, he may forbid its use.

No claim due to such prohibition or towards additional safety provisions called for
by him shall be entertained by the HVPNL.

Further, any such decision of the HVPNL shall not, in any way, absolve the Bidder
of his responsibilities and in case use of such a container or entry there- of into the
site area is forbidden by the HVPNL, the Bidder shall use alternative methods with
the approval of the HVPNL without any cost implication to the HVPNL or extension
of work schedule.

7.13.3 where it is necessary to provide and/or store petroleum products or petroleum
mixtures and explosives, the Bidder shall be responsible for carrying out such
provision and/or storage in accordance with the rules and regulations laid down in
petroleum act 1934, explosives act 1948 and amendments thereof, and petroleum
and carbide of calcium manual published by the Chief Inspector of explosives of
India. All such storage shall have prior approval of the HVPNL. In case, any
approval is necessary from the Chief Inspector (explosives) or any statutory
authorities, the Bidder shall be responsible for obtaining the same.

7.13.4 All equipment used in construction and erection by Bidder shall meet
Indian/International standards and where such standards do not exist, the Bidder
shall ensure these to be absolutely safe. All equipment shall be strictly operated
and maintained by the Bidder in accordance with manufactures operation manual
and safety instructions and as per any existing Guideline/Rules in this regard.
Page-62
7.13.5 Periodical examinations and all tests for all lifting/ hoisting equipment and tackle
shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant provisions of factories act.
1948, Indian Electricity Supply Act and associated Laws/ Rules in force from time
to time. A register of such examinations and tests shall be properly maintained by
the Bidder and will be promptly produced as and when desired by HVPNL or by
the persons authorized by him.

7.13.6 The Bidder shall provide suitable safety equipment of prescribe standard to all
employees and workmen according to the need, as may be directed by the HVPNL
who will also have the right to examine these safety equipment to determine their
suitability, reliability, acceptability and adaptability.

7.13.7 Where explosives are to be used, the same shall be used under the direct control
and supervision of an expert, experienced and qualified competent person, strictly
in accordance with the code of practices /rules framed under Indian Explosives Act
pertaining to handling, storage and use of explosive.

7.13.8 The Bidder employing more than 250 workmen, whether temporary casual,
probationer, regular or permanent or on contract, shall employ at least one full time
officer exclusively as safety officer to supervise safety aspects of the equipment
and workmen. Such an officer will co-ordinate with the project safety officer of the
HVPNL.

The name and address of such safety officer of the Bidder will be promptly
informed in writing to the HVPNL with a copy to the safety officer- incharge before
he starts work or immediately after any change of the incumbent is made during
currency of the contract.

7.13.9 In case any accident occurs during the construction/erection or other associated
activities undertaken by the Bidder, thereby causing any minor or major or fatal
injury to his employees due to any reason whatsoever, it shall be the responsibility
of the Bidder to promptly inform the same to the HVPNL and also to all the
authorities envisaged under the applicable laws.

7.13.10 The HVPNL shall have the right to stop the work, if in its opinion the work is
being carried out in such a way as may cause accidents and endanger the safety
of the persons and/or property. In such cases, the Bidder shall be informed in
writing about the nature of hazards and possible injury/accident and he shall
remove short-comings promptly. The Bidder, after stopping the specific work, can,
if felt necessary, appeal against the order of stoppage of work to the HVPNL within
3 days of such stoppage of work and the decision of the HVPNL in this respect
shall be conclusive.

7.13.11 The Bidder shall not be entitled for any damages/compensation for stoppage of
work due to safety reasons as provided in clause 7.13.10 above and the period of
such stoppage of work will not be taken as an extension of time for completion of
work and will not be the ground for waiver of any part of contactors liability for
timely completion of the works.

7.13.12 The Bidder shall follow and comply with all safety rules, relevant provisions of
applicable laws pertaining to the safety of workmen, employees, plant and
equipment as may be prescribed from time to time without any demur, protest or
contest or reservation. In case of any conflict between statutory requirement and
safety rules referred above, the most stringent clause shall be applicable.
Page-63
7.13.13 If the Bidder fails in providing safe working environment as per safety rules or
continues the work even after being instructed to stop work by the HVPNL as
provided in clause 7.13.10 above, the Bidder shall promptly pay to the HVPNL on
demand, compensation at the rate of Rs. 5,000/- per day or part thereof till the
instructions are complied with and so certified by the HVPNL. However, in case of
accident taking place causing injury, to any individual, the provisions contained in
clause 7.13.14 below shall also apply in addition to compensation mentioned in
this para.

7.13.14 If the Bidder does not take all safety precautions and/or fails to comply with the
safety rules as prescribed by the HVPNL or as prescribed under the applicable law
for the safety of the equipment, plant and personnel and the Bidder does not
prevent hazardous conditions which may cause injury to his own employees or
employees of other Bidders, or HVPNL or any other person at site or adjacent
thereto, the Bidder shall be responsible for payment of compensation to the
HVPNL as per the statutory provisions.

Permanent disability shall have the same meaning as indicated in workmens
compensation act. The compensation mentioned above shall be in addition to the
compensation payable to the workmen/employees under the provision of
workmens compensation act and rules framed there under or any other applicable
law as applicable from time to time. In case the HVPNL is made to pay such
compensation, the Bidder will be liable to reimburse the HVPNL such amount(s) in
addition to the compensation indicated above.

7.14 FOREIGN PERSONNEL

7.14.1 In case necessary for the execution of the works, the Bidder shall bring foreign
supervisors for the execution of the contract, at his own cost. The Bidder shall
submit to the HVPNL, data on all personnel he proposes to bring into India for the
performance of the works under the contract, at least sixty (60)days prior to their
arrival in India. Such data shall include the name of each person, his present
address, his assignment and responsibility in connection with the works, and a
short resume of his qualification, experience etc. in relation to the work to be
performed by him.

7.14.2 Any person, unsuitable and unacceptable to the HVPNL, shall not be brought to
India. Any person brought to India, and found unsuitable or unacceptable to the
HVPNL shall be immediately removed from site and repatriated back. If found,
necessary, he may be replaced by another personnel acceptable to the HVPNL.

7.14.3 No person brought to India by the Bidder, for the works shall be repatriated without
the consent of the HVPNL in writing, based on a written request from the Bidder for
such repatriation giving reasons for such an action to the HVPNL. The HVPNL
may give permission for such repatriation provided it is satisfied that the progress
of work will not suffer due to such repatriation.

7.14.4 The cost of passports, visas and all other travel expenses to and from India, shall
be to the Bidders account. The HVPNL will not provide any residential
accommodation and/ or furniture for any of the Bidders personnel including foreign
personnel Bidder shall make his own arrangements for such facilities.


Page-64

7.14.5 The Bidder and its expatriate personnel shall respect all Indian Acts, Laws, Rules
and Regulations and shall not, in any way, interfere with Indian political and
religious affairs and shall conform to any other rules and regulations which the
government of India, and the HVPNL may establish on them. The contactors
expatriate personnel shall work and live in close co-operation and co-ordination
with their co-workers and the community and shall not engage themselves in any
other employment either part-time or full-time nor shall they take part in any local
politics.

7.14.6 HVPNL shall assist the Bidder, to the extent possible, in obtaining necessary
permits to travel to India and back, by issue of necessary certificates and other
information needed by the government agencies.

7.15 CODE REQUIREMENTS

The erection requirements and procedures to be followed during the execution of
the project shall be in accordance with the applicable Indian/International
standards/regulations, as indicated in technical specifications, good engineering
practice, the Drawings and another applicable Indian codes, laws and regulations.
































Page-65






Annexure-IA




LIST OF DRAWINGS OF 132 KV TOWER ACCESSORIES

1. Tower Number plate
2. Tower circuit plate
3. Tower Phase plate
4. Danger plate
5. Pipe type earthing arrangement
6. Counterpoise earthing arrangement
7. Details of flats for earthing
8. Details of Anti-climbing device
9. Step Bolt Drawing
10. Single Suspension string
11. Single tension string
12. Double Suspension string
13. Double tension string
14. Compression type tension fitting for ground-wire
15. Suspension assembly for ground-wire

Annexure-1





DRAWINGS




FOR




132KV




TOWERS









ANNEXURE-IB


ROUTE ALIGNMENT DETAILS

S.No. Name of Line Tentative Length
of Line (approx.)
1. 132 KV D/C Line from 400kV S/Stn. Deepalpur to 132kV
S/Stn. Tajpur with 0.4sq ACSR.
9.540 Km
2. 132 KV S/C line from 220kV S/stn. Batta to Dhanouri with
ACSR 0.4sq Zebra.
20.00 Km
3. 132 KV S/C line from 220kV S/stn. Batta to Padla with
ACSR 0.4sq Zebra.
18.090 Km
4. 132 KV S/C line on D/C towers from 220kV S/Stn. Batta to
132kV S/Stn. Rajound with 0.4sq ACSR
28.060 Km
5. 132 KV S/C line on D/C towers from 132kV S/Stn.
Dhudiawali to Kariwala with 0.4sq ACSR.
14.00 Km


(DRAWINGS IN SEPARATE FOLIO AND LIST OF DRGS.

ATTACHED HEREWITH )


WB/G-14
132 KV D/C Line from 400kV S/Stn. Deepalpur to 132kV S/Stn. Tajpur with 0.4sq ACSR.
(Supply portion only) Tentative Length: - 9.540 Km (approx.)
S.N. DESCRIPTION UNIT Qty.
A Towers
1.0 Fabrication and supply of 132kV tower part with stubs, bolts & nuts, step bolts,
U-bolts, hangers, D-shakle etc. of following type of Towers as per D/C KRR
Design

1.1 i) DA type Tower (KRR Design)
ii) +3 mtr. Extn. for above
iii) +6 mtr. Extn. for above
iv) +25 mtr. Extn. for above
No.
No.
No.
No.
24
3
10
1
1.2 DB type Tower (KRR Design) No. 1
1.3 DC type Tower (KRR Design) No. 1
1.4 DD type Tower (KRR Design)
i) +3 mtr. Extn. for above
ii) +15 mtr. Extn. for above
No.
No.
No.
11
1
1
1.5 132kV KRR Design T2 type D/C Gantries. 1 set of Gantries
shall consist of 3No. T2 type structures & 2No. B1 type
beams.
Set 6
2.0 Supply of earthing of towers
i) Pipe type
ii) Counterpoise type
Sets
Sets
42
1
3.0 Supply of following Tower accessories
i) Danger Plate
ii) Number Plate
iii) Phase Plate(set of 3)
iv) Circuit Plate (set of 2)
v) Bird Guard (Set of 3)
vi) Anti climbing device

No.
No.
Sets
Sets
Sets
Sets
43
43
38
43
48
43
B Line material
2 Conductor (ACSR Zebra ) (54/7/3.18mm) Km 57.82
3 Earth wire(7/3.15 mm) Km 9.63
5 Anti-Fog type Disc Insulator or Silicon Rubber Polymer
Insulator strings
i) 70 kN
ii) 120 kN


No.
No.
153
240
6 132kV Post Insulator No. 36
7 Hardware Fittings
i) Single I Suspension String
ii) Single Suspension Pilot String
iii) Single Tension string
iv) Double Tension string

Set
Set
Set
Set

144
9
240
0
9. Conductor & Earth wire Accessories
i) Mid Span Compression Joint for conductor No. 39
ii) Mid Span Compression Joint for earth wire No. 5
iii) Repair sleeves for conductor No. 12
iv) Flexible copper Bond No. 43
v) Vibration damper for conductor No. 744
vi) Vibration damper for earthwire No. 124
vii) Earth-wire tension clamp No. 42
viii) Earth-wire suspension clamp No. 24
Note :- The Bidder shall offer only one of the option for the Insulator strings ( A/F disc or
Polymer) out of the two mentioned above in his bid.


WB/G-14
132 KV S/C line from 220kV S/stn. Batta to Dhanouri with ACSR 0.4sq Zebra.
(Supply portion only) Tentative Length: - 20.00 Km (approx.)

S N. DESCRIPTION UNIT Qty.
A Towers
1.0 Design, Proto-Testing, Fabrication and supply of 132kV S/C
towers with stubs, bolts & nuts, step bolts, U-bolts, hangers, D-
shakle etc. of following type of Towers as per Bidders
Design.

1.1 i) 132kV S/C A -type Tower No. 49
ii) +3 mtr. extn. only No. 17
1.2 i) 132kV S/C B -type Tower No. 6
1.3 i) 132kV S/C C-type Tower No. 7
1.4 i) 132kV S/C D type Tower No. 14
II) +6mtr. extn. only No. 2
1.5 S/C Gantry consisting of 2No. towers & 1No.Beam as per
Bidders Design
Set 4
2.0 Supply of earthing of towers
i) Pipe type
ii) Counterpoise type

Sets
Sets
79
1
3.0 Supply of following Tower accessories
i) Danger Plate
ii) Number Plate
iii) Phase Plate(set of 3)
iv) Circuit Plate
v) Bird Guard (Set of 3)
vi) Anti climbing device

No.
No.
Sets
Sets
Sets
sets

80
80
31
80
39
80
B Line material
2 Conductor (ACSR Zebra ) (54/7/3.18mm) Km 60.60
3 Earth wire(7/3.15 mm) Km 20.20
5 Anti-Fog type Disc Insulator or Silicon Rubber Polymer
Insulator strings
i) 70 kN
ii) 120 kN


No.
No.
150
204
6 132kV Post Insulator No. 12
7 Hardware Fittings
i) Single I Suspension String
ii) Single Suspension Pilot String
iii) Single Tension string
iv) Double Tension string

Set
Set
Set
Set

147
3
180
12
9. Conductor & Earth wire Accessories
i) Mid Span Compression Joint for conductor No. 40
ii) Mid Span Compression Joint for earth wire No. 10
iii) Repair sleeves for conductor No. 12
iv) Flexible copper Bond No. 80
v) Vibration damper for conductor No. 618
vi) Vibration damper for Earth wire No. 222
vii) Earth-wire tension clamp No. 64
viii) Earth-wire suspension clamp No. 49
Note :- The Bidder shall offer only one of the option for the Insulator strings ( A/F disc
or Polymer) out of the two mentioned above in his bid.
WB/G-14
132 KV S/C line from 220kV S/stn. Batta to Padla with ACSR 0.4sq Zebra.
(Supply portion only) Tentative Length: - 18.090 Km (approx.)

S N. DESCRIPTION UNIT Qty.
A Towers
1.0 Design, Proto-Testing, Fabrication and supply of 132kV S/C
towers with stubs, bolts & nuts, step bolts, U-bolts, hangers, D-
shakle etc. of following type of Towers as per Bidders
Design.

1.1 i) 132kV S/C A -type Tower No. 45
ii) +3 mtr. extn. only No. 16
1.2 i) 132kV S/C B -type Tower No. 8
1.3 i) 132kV S/C C-type Tower No. 4
1.4 i) 132kV S/C D type Tower No. 12
II) +6mtr. extn. only No. 2
1.5 S/C Gantry consisting of 2No. towers & 1No.Beam as per
Bidders Design
Set 2
2.0 Supply of earthing of towers
i) Pipe type
ii) Counterpoise type

Sets
Sets

70
1
3.0 Supply of following Tower accessories
i) Danger Plate
ii) Number Plate
iii) Phase Plate(set of 3)
iv) Circuit Plate
v) Bird Guard (Set of 3)
vi) Anti climbing device

No.
No.
Sets
Sets
Sets
sets

71
71
26
71
45
71
B Line material
2 Conductor (ACSR Zebra ) (54/7/3.18mm) Km 54.82
3 Earth wire(7/3.15 mm) Km 18.27
5 Anti-Fog type Disc Insulator or Silicon Rubber Polymer
Insulator strings
i) 70 kN
ii) 120 kN


No.
No.
141
174
6 132kV Post Insulator No. 6
7 Hardware Fittings
i) Single I Suspension String
ii) Single Suspension Pilot String
iii) Single Tension string
iv) Double Tension string

Set
Set
Set
Set

135
6
150
12
9. Conductor & Earth wire Accessories
i) Mid Span Compression Joint for conductor No. 36
ii) Mid Span Compression Joint for earth wire No. 9
iii) Repair sleeves for conductor No. 11
iv) Flexible copper Bond No. 71
v) Vibration damper for conductor No. 534
vi) Vibration damper for Earth wire No. 194
vii) Earth-wire tension clamp No. 54
viii) Earth-wire suspension clamp No. 45
Note :- The Bidder shall offer only one of the option for the Insulator strings ( A/F disc or
Polymer) out of the two mentioned above in his bid.
WB/G-14
132 KV S/C line on D/C towers from 220kV S/Stn. Batta to 132kV S/Stn. Rajound with 0.4sq
ACSR.
(Supply portion only) Tentative Length: - 28.060 Km (approx.)
S.N. DESCRIPTION UNIT Qty.
A Towers
1.0 Fabrication and supply of 132kV tower part with stubs, bolts & nuts, step bolts,
U-bolts, hangers, D-shakle etc. of following type of Towers as per D/C KRR
Design

1.1 i) DA type Tower (KRR Design)
ii) +3 mtr. Extn. for above
No.
No.
77
11
1.2 DB type Tower (KRR Design)
i) +9 mtr. Extn. for above
No.
No.
12
1
1.3 DC type Tower (KRR Design) No. 8
1.4 i) DD type Tower (KRR Design)
ii) +9 mtr. Extn. for above
No.
No.
8
1
2.0 Supply of earthing of towers
i) Pipe type
ii) Counterpoise type
Sets
Sets
104
1
3.0 Supply of following Tower accessories
i) Danger Plate
ii) Number Plate
iii) Phase Plate(set of 3)
iv) Circuit Plate (set of 2)
v) Bird Guard (Set of 3)
vi) Anti climbing device

No.
No.
Sets
Sets
Sets
Sets

105
105
56
105
154
105
B Line material
2 Conductor (ACSR Zebra ) (54/7/3.18mm) Km 85.03
3 Earth wire(7/3.15 mm) Km 28.34
5 Anti-Fog type Disc Insulator or Silicon Rubber Polymer
Insulator strings
i) 70 kN
ii) 120 kN


No.
No.
240
174
6 132kV Post Insulator No. 0
7 Hardware Fittings
i) Single I Suspension String
ii) Single Suspension Pilot String
iii) Single Tension string
iv) Double Tension string

Set
Set
Set
Set

231
9
174
0
9. Conductor & Earth wire Accessories
i) Mid Span Compression Joint for conductor No. 57
ii) Mid Span Compression Joint for earth wire No. 15
iii) Repair sleeves for conductor No. 17
iv) Flexible copper Bond No. 105
v) Vibration damper for conductor No. 798
vi) Vibration damper for earthwire No. 266
vii) Earth-wire tension clamp No. 60
viii) Earth-wire suspension clamp No. 77
Note :- The Bidder shall offer only one of the option for the Insulator strings ( A/F disc or
Polymer) out of the two mentioned above in his bid.

WB/G-14
132 KV S/C line on D/C towers from 132kV S/Stn. Dhudiawali to Kariwala with 0.4sq ACSR.
(Supply portion only) Tentative Length: - 14.00 Km (approx.)
S.N. DESCRIPTION UNIT Qty.
A Towers
1.0 Fabrication and supply of 132kV tower part with stubs, bolts & nuts, step bolts,
U-bolts, hangers, D-shakle etc. of following type of Towers as per D/C KRR
Design

1.1 i) DA type Tower (KRR Design)
ii) +3 mtr. Extn. for above
ii) +6 mtr. Extn. for above
No.
No.
No.
39
9
2
1.2 i) DB type Tower (KRR Design)
ii) +3 mtr. Extn. for above
ii) +6 mtr. Extn. for above
No.
No.
No.
5
2
1
1.3 i) DC type Tower (KRR Design)
ii) +3 mtr. Extn. for above
No.
No.
6
2
1.4 i) DD type Tower (KRR Design)
ii) +3 mtr. Extn. for above
ii) +6 mtr. Extn. for above
iv) +18 mtr. Extn. for above
No.
No.
No.
No.
7
1
1
1
2.0 Supply of earthing of towers
i) Pipe type
ii) Counterpoise type
Sets
Sets
56
1
3.0 Supply of following Tower accessories
i) Danger Plate
ii) Number Plate
iii) Phase Plate(set of 3)
iv) Circuit Plate (set of 2)
v) Bird Guard (Set of 3)
vi) Anti climbing device

No.
No.
Sets
Sets
Sets
Sets

57
57
36
57
78
57
B Line material
2 Conductor (ACSR Zebra ) (54/7/3.18mm) Km 42.42
3 Earth wire(7/3.15 mm) Km 14.14
5 Anti-Fog type Disc Insulator or Silicon Rubber Polymer
Insulator strings
i) 70 kN
ii) 120 kN


No.
No.
129
114
6 132kV Post Insulator No. 0
7 Hardware Fittings
i) Single I Suspension String
ii) Single Suspension Pilot String
iii) Single Tension string
iv) Double Tension string

Set
Set
Set
Set

117
12
114
0

9. Conductor & Earth wire Accessories
i) Mid Span Compression Joint for conductor No. 28
ii) Mid Span Compression Joint for earth wire No. 8
iii) Repair sleeves for conductor No. 9
iv) Flexible copper Bond No. 57
v) Vibration damper for conductor No. 450
vi) Vibration damper for earthwire No. 150
vii) Earth-wire tension clamp No. 40
viii) Earth-wire suspension clamp No. 39
Note :- The Bidder shall offer only one of the option for the Insulator strings ( A/F disc or
Polymer) out of the two mentioned above in his bid.

WB/G-14
















SECTION-VI










PART-II










SECTION-VI

(CHAPTER II)

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS


CONTENTS



S. No Clause Page No.

1.0 General Information 1

2.0 Scope 1

3.0 Weights and measures 1

4.0 General Technical conditions 1

5.0 Technical Description 6

6.0 Tests and Standards 6

7.0 Guaranteed Technical Particulars 6

8.0 Technical Information 6

SECTION-VI

(CHAPTER-II)
1. General Technical Requirements

1.1 The material covered in this specification shall be used in 132 kV transmission
lines of HVPNL.

2. Scope:

2.1 The material shall be designed, manufactured and tested as per the requirements
specified.

2.2 The material covered under various packages shall be supplied complete in all
respect, including all component, fittings and accessories which are necessary or
are usual for their efficient performance and satisfactory maintenance under the
various operating and atmospheric conditions. Such parts shall deemed to be
within the scope of the contract, whether specially included or not in the
specifications or in the contract schedules. The bidder shall not eligible for any
charges for such fittings etc.

3. Weights and measures

All weights and measures shall be in system international (SI) units. All fasteners
shall be of metric size only.

4 General Technical Conditions

4.1 The following provisions shall supplement all the detailed technical specifications
and requirements brought out in the accompanying technical specifications. The
bidders proposal shall be based on the use of equipment and materials complying
fully with the requirements, specified herein.

4.2 Equipment performance Guarantee

4.2.1 The performance requirements of the items are detailed separately in this
specification. These guarantees shall supplement the general performance
guarantee provisions covered under General Terms and Conditions of Contract in
clause entitles Guarantee.

4.2.2 Liquidated damages for not meeting specified performance shall be assessed and
recovered from the manufacturer. Such liquidated damages shall be without any
limitation whatsoever an shall be in addition to damage, if any payable under any
other clause of conditions of contract.

4.3 Engineering Data

4.3.1 The furnishing of engineering data by the bidder shall be in accordance with the
appropriate schedule of specification. The review of these data by the HVPNL will
cover only general conformance of the data to the specifications and drawings. This
review by the HVPNL may not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities
and details of the equipment, materials, any devices or items indicated or the
accuracy of the information submitted. This review and/or approval by the HVPNL
shall not be considered by the manufacturer, as limiting any of his responsibilities and
liabilities for mistakes and deviations from the requirements, specified under these
Specifications and documents.
Page-1
4.3.2 All engineering data submitted by the manufacturer after final process including review
and approval by the HVPNL shall form part of the contract document and the entire
works performed under these specifications shall be performed in strict conformity,
unless otherwise expressly requested by the HVPNL in writing.

4.4 Drawings

4.4.1 All drawings submitted by the manufacturer including those submitted at the time of
bid shall be in sufficient detail to dictate the type, size, arrangement, dimensions,
material description. Bill materials, weight of each component, break-up for packing
and shipment, fixing arrangement required, the dimensions required for installation
and any other information specifically requested in the specifications.

4.4.2 Each drawing submitted by the manufacturer shall be clearly marked with the name of
the HVPNL, the unit designation title, the specification number and the name of the
project. All titles, notings, markings and writings on the drawing shall be in English. All
the dimensions should be to the scale and in metric units.

4.4.3 The drawings submitted by the manufacturer shall be reviewed by the HVPNL as far
as practicable within four weeks and shall be modified by the manufacturer if any
modifications and/or corrections are required by the HVPNL. The manufacturer shall
incorporate such modifications and/or corrections and submit the final drawings for
approval. Any delays arising out of failure by the manufacturer to rectify the drawings
in good time shall not after the Contract completion date.

4.4.4 The drawings submitted for approval to the HVPNL shall be in quadruplicate. One
print of such drawings shall be returned to the manufacturer by the HVPNL marked
approved/approved with correction. The manufacturer shall thereupon furnish the
HVPNL additional print as stipulated in technical specification along with one
reproducible in original in original of the drawings after incorporating all corrections.

4.4.5 Further work by the manufacturer shall be strictly in accordance with these drawings
and no deviation shall be permitted with out the written approval of the HVPNL, it so
required.

4.4.6 All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment/material prior
to the approval of the drawings shall be at the manufacturers risk. The manufacturer
may make any changes in the design which are necessary to make the equipment
conform to the provisions and intent of the contract and such changes will again be
subject to approval by the HVPNL. Approval of manufacturers drawing or work by the
HVPNL shall not relieve the manufacturer of any of his responsibilities and liabilities
under the contract.

4.5 Manufacturing Schedule

The manufacturer shall submit to the HVPNL his manufacturing, testing and delivery
schedules of various items within thirty (30) days from the date of the Letter of Award
in accordance with the delivery requirements stipulated. Schedule shall also include
the material and items purchased from outside manufacturers, if any.

Page-2




4.6 Reference Standards

4.6.1 The codes and/or standards referred to in specifications shall govern, in all cases
wherever such references are made. In case of a conflict between such Codes and/or
Standards and the Specifications, latter shall govern. Such Codes and/or Standards,
referred to shall mean the latest revisions, amendments/changes adopted and
published by the relevant agencies. In case of any further conflict in this matter, the
same shall be referred to the HVPNL whose decision shall be final and binding.

4.6.2 Other internationally acceptable standards which ensure equivalent or better
performance than those specified shall also be accepted.

4.7 Design Improvements

4.7.1 The HVPNL or the manufacturer may propose changes in the specification of the
equipment or quality thereof and if the parties agree upon any such changes, the
specification shall be modified accordingly.

4.7.2 If any such agreed upon change is such that it affects the price and schedule of
completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the
price and/or schedule of completion before the manufacturer proceeds with the
change. Following such agreement, the provision thereof, be deemed to have been
amended accordingly.

4.8 HVPNL SUPERVISION

4.8.1 To eliminate delays and avoid disputes and litigation if is agreed between the parties
to the contract that all matters and questions shall be referred to the HVPNL and his
decision shall be final.

4.8.2 The manufacturing of the product shall be performed under the direction and
supervision of the HVPNL. The scope of the duties of the HVPNL, pursuant to the
contract, will include but not be limited to the following: -

a) Interpretation of all the terms and conditions of these documents and specifications.

b) Review and interpretation of all the manufacturers drawings, engineering data etc.

c) Witness or authorize his representative to witness tests at the manufacturers works or
at site, or at any place where work is performed data etc.

d) Inspect accept or reject any equipment, material and work under the contract.

e) Issue certificate of acceptance and/or progressive payment and final payment
certificate.

f) Review and suggest modification and improvement in completion schedule from time
to time; and

g) Supervision the Quality Assurance programme implementation at all stages of the
works.
Page-3

4.9 Inspection, Testing & Inspection Certificate

4.9.1 The HVPNL, his duly authorized representative and/or outside inspection agency
acting on behalf of the HVPNL shall have at all reasonable times access to the
manufacturers premises or works and shall have the power at all reasonable times to
inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the product during its
manufacture and if part of the product is being manufactured or assembled at other
premises or works, the manufacturer shall obtain from the HVPNL and/or his duly
authorized representative permission to inspect as if the equipment/materials were
manufactured or assembled on the manufacturers own premises or works.

4.9.2 The manufacturer shall give the HVPNL/inspector fifteen (15) days written notice of
any material being ready for testing. Such tests shall be to the manufactures account
except for the expenses of the inspector. The HVPNL/inspector, unless witnessing of
the tests is virtually waived, will attend such tests within fifteen (15) days of the date of
which the equipment is notified as being ready for test/inspection or on a mutually
agreed date, failing which the manufacturer may proceed and he shall forthwith
forward to the inspector duly certified copies of tests triplicate.

4.9.3 The HVPNL/ inspector shall, within fifteen (15) days from the date of inspector as
defined herein give notice in writing to the manufacturer, of any objection to any
drawings and all or any equipment and workmanship which in his opinion is not in
accordance with the contract. The manufacturer shall give due consideration to such
objections and shall make the modifications that may be necessary to meet the said
objections.

4.9.4 When the factory tests have been completed at the manufacturers or sub-
manufacturers work, the HVPNL/inspector shall issue a certificate to this effect within
fifteen (15) days after completion of tests but if the tests are not witnessed by the
HVPNL/inspector, the certificate shall be issued within fifteen (15) days of receipt of
the manufacturers test certificate by the HVPNL/inspector. The completion of these
tests of the issue of the certificate shall not bind the HVPNL to accept the equipment
should it, on further tests after erection, be found not to comply with the contract.

4.9.5 In all cases where the contract provides for tests whether at the premises or works of
the manufacturer or of any sub-manufacturer, the manufacturer except where
otherwise specified shall provide free of charge such item as labour, materials,
electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably
demanded by the HVPNL/inspector or his authorized representative to carry out
effectively such tests of the equipment in accordance with the contract and shall give
facilities to the HVPNL/inspector or his authorized representative to accomplish
testing.

4.9.6 The inspection by HVPNL and issue of inspection certificate thereon shall in no way
limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the manufacturer in respect of the agreed
Quality Assurance Programme forming a part of the contract.


Page-4





5. Technical Description

5.1 The technical description of conductor, earthwire, insulators, hardware fittings &
conductor and earthwire accessories shall be as specified in part-II of this technical
specification.

6. Tests and Standards

6.1 The tests and standards for conductor, earthwire, insulators, hardware fittings &
conductor and earthwire accessories are specified in part-II B, IIC & II D of this
Technical Specification.

7 Guaranteed Technical Particulars

The Guaranteed Technical Particular of the various items covered under this
specification shall be furnished by the bidders in one original and four (4) copies in the
prescribed schedules of the specifications. The bidder shall also furnish any other
schedule informations as in their opinion is needed to give fully description and details
to judge the item (s) offered by them.

8 Technical Information

8.1 Electrical system data for 132 kV line

a) Nominal voltage 132KV

b) Maximum system voltage 145 KV

c) Bil (Impulse) 650 KV (peak)

d) Power frequency withstand voltage (wet) 275KV (rms)


For 132kV lines with ACSR Panther Conductor
a) Name ACSR Panther
b) Strands and wire diameter

i) Aluminum 30/3.00 mm
ii) Steel 7/3.00 mm
c) Conductor per phase One

d) Inter phase spacing Vertical 4900 mm(min.)
Horizontal 8400 mm (Min.)

e) Configuration D/C line Vertical
S/C line Triangular

f) Overall diameter 21.00 mm

g) Weight 974 kg/km

h) Minimum ultimate tensile strength 89.67 KN
Page-5


8.1.1 B) For 132kV lines with ACSR Zebra

8.1.2 Conductor

a) Name ACSR ZEBRA

c) Strands and wire diameter

i) Aluminum 54/3.18 mm

ii) Steel 7/3.18 mm

c) Conductor per phase One

d) Inter phase spacing Vertical 4900 mm(min.)
Horizontal 8400 mm (Min.)

e) Configuration D/C line Vertical


f) Overall diameter 28.62 mm

g) Weight 1621 kg/km

h) Minimum ultimate tensile strength 130.32 KN

8.1.3 Galvanised Steel Earthwire

a) Size (strands & wire diameter) 7/3.15 mm

b) Overall diameter 9.45 mm

c) Standard weight 428 kg/km

d) Location of earthwire One continuous earthwire to run
horizontally on top of the towers and
conductors.

e) Minimum ultimate tensile strength 57kN

f) Ruling Design span 300 Meters

g) Wind Zone (As per IS: 875:1987) 4





Page-6
SECTION-VI , CHAPTER III ( A )


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION


CONTENTS



S. No Clause Page No.

1. Technical Description of Conductor for ACSR Panther lines 1

2 Technical Description of Earth wire 9

5. Tests and Standards 11

6. Annexure-A 20



SECTION-VI

(CHAPTER-III-A)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF CONDUCTOR

1. DETAIL OF ACSR PANTHER CONDUCTOR

1.1.1 The conductor shall generally conform to IS: 398-1998 excepts where otherwise
specified herein. Conductor shall only be accepted from those who have got the ISI
certification and documentary proof for having such certification shall be submitted
with the tender.

1.1.2 The conductor shall be ACSR Panther and the details of the conductor are
tabulated below:

a) Stranding and wire diameter : 30/3.00 mm Aluminium
+7/3.00 mm steel

b) Number of Strands :

Core : 1

1
st
layer : 6

2
nd
layer : 12

3
rd
layer : 18

c) Total sectional area Aluminium : 212.1 sq. mm

d) Total sectional area : 261.5 sq.mm

e) Overall diameter : 21.0 mm

f) Approximate weight : 974Kg/km

g) Calculated DC resistance at : 0.140 ohm/km
20 deg. Centigrade (Max.)

h) Minimum UTS : 89.67 kN
i) Direction of lay of outer : Right hand
j) Modulus of elasticity : 8158 (Kg/sq. mm)
k) Co-efficient of linear
expansion (per
o
C) : 17.8x10
-6




Page-1




1.1.3 a) The details of Aluminium strands are as follows:

i) Minimum breaking load of strand before stranding : 1.17 KN
ii) Minimum breaking load of strand after stranding : 1.11 KN
iii) Maximum D.C. resistance of strand at 20 deg. : 4.107
Centigrade Ohms/km

b) The details of steel strand are as follows:
i) Minimum breaking load of strand before stranding : 9.29 KN
ii) Minimum breading load of strand after stranding : 8.85 KN

1.2 Workmanship:

1.2.1 All the aluminium and steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free from all
imperfections, such as spills and splits, diemarks, scratches, abrasions and kinks after
drawing and also after stranding.


1.2.2 The finished conductor shall have a smooth surface without any surface cuts,
abrasions, scuff marks and shall be free from dirt, grit, etc.

1.2.3 The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanized and shall have a minimum zinc coating
of 260g/m
2
after stranding. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous, of uniform
thickness, free from imperfections and shall withstand a minimum of two and one half
dips in the standard preece test. The steel wire rods shall be of such quality and purity
that, when drawn to the size of the strands specified and coated with zinc, the finished
strands and the individual wires shall be of uniform quality and have the same
properties and characteristics as prescribed in IEC:888-1987.

1.2.4 The steel strands shall be preformed and postformed in order to prevent spreading of
strands in the event of cutting of composite core wire. Care shall be taken to avoid
damages to galvanization during preforming and postforming operations.

1.3 Joints in Wires:

1.3.1 Aluminium Wires

No joints shall be permitted in the individual wires in the outer most layer of the
finished conductor. However, joints in the 12 wire inner layer of the conductor
unavoidably broken during stranding provided such breaks are not associated with
either inherently defective wire or with the use of short lengths of aluminium wires.
Such joints shall not be more than four (4) per conductor lengths. These joist shall be
made by cold pressure butt-welding and shall be such that no two such joints are
within 15 metres of each other in the complete stranded conductor.

1.3.2 Steel Wires

There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished wire entering into the manufacture of
the strand nor strand joint or strand splices in any length of the complete stranded
steel core of the conductor.


Page-2


1.4 Tolerances

The manufacturing tolerances to the extent of following limits only shall be permitted in
the diameter of individual Aluminium and steel strands and lay-ratio of the conductor:

a) Diameter of Aluminium & steel Strands

Nominal Maximum Minimum


Aluminium 3.0 mm 3.03 mm 2.97 mm

Steel 3.0 mm 3.06 mm 2.94 mm

b) Lay ratio of Conductor

Max. Min.

6 Wire layer 28 (Steel) 16

12 wire layer 16 (Al.) 10

18 wire layer 14 (Al.) 10

1.5 Materials

1.5.1 The Aluminium strands shall be hard drawn from electrolytic aluminum rods having a
purity of not less than 99.5% and a copper content not exceeding 0.04%. They shall
have the same properties and characteristics as prescribed in IEC:889-1987.

1.5.2 The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel wire rods produced by
either the acid or basic open hearth process, the electric furnace process, or the basic
oxygen process and shall conform to the following requirements as to the chemical
composition:

Element % composition

Carbon 0.50 to 0.85

Manganese 0.50 to 1.10

Phosphorus Not more than 0.035

Sulphur Not more than 0.045

Silicon 0.10 to 0.35

The steel wire stands shall have the same properties and characteristics as
proscribed for regular strength steel wire in IEC:888-1987..

1.5.3 The zinc used for galvanizing shall be electrolytic high grade Zinc of 99.95% purity. It
shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209.
Page-3

1.6 Standard Length

1.6.1 The Standard Length of the conductor shall be 1500 meters. Bidder shall indicate the
standard length of the conductor to be offered by them. A tolerance of +/- 5% on the
standard length offered by the Bidder shall be permitted. All lengths outside this limit
of tolerance shall be treated as random lengths.

1.6.2 Random lengths will be accepted provided no length is less than 70% of the standard
length and total quantity of such random lengths shall not be more than 10% of the
quantity ordered. When one number random length has been manufactured at any
time, five (5) more individual lengths, each equivalent to the above random length with
a tolerance of +/- 5% shall also be manufactured and all the above six random lengths
shall be despatched in the same shipment. At any point, the cumulative quantity
supplied including such random lengths shall not be more than 12.5% of the total
cumulative quantity supplied including such random lengths. However, the last 20% of
the quantity ordered shall be supplied only in standard lengths as specified.

1.6.3 Bidder shall also indicate the maximum single length, above the standard length, he
can manufacture in the guaranteed technical particulars of offer. This is required for
special stretches like river crossing etc. The HVPNL reserves the right to place orders
for the above lengths on the same terms and conditions applicable for the standard
lengths during pendency of the contract.

1.7 DETAIL OF ACSR ZEBRA CONDUCTOR

1.7.1 The conductor shall generally conform to IS: 398-1998 excepts where otherwise
specified herein. Conductor shall only be accepted from those who have got the ISI
certification and documentary proof for having such certification shall be submitted
with the Bid.

1.7.2 The conductor shall be ACSR Zebra and the details of the conductor are tabulated
below:

a) Stranding and wire diameter : 54/3.18 mm Aluminium
+7/3.18 mm steel

b) Number of Strands :

Core : 1

1
st
layer : 6

2
nd
layer : 12

3
rd
layer : 18

4
th
layer : 24

c) Total sectional area Aluminium : 428.9 sq. mm

d) Total sectional area : 484.5 sq.mm
Page-4



e) Overall diameter : 28.62 mm

f) Approximate weight : 1621Kg/km

g) Calculated DC resistance at : 0.06868 ohm/km
20 deg. Centigrade (Max.)

h) Minimum UTS : 130.32 kN


1.7.3 a) The details of Aluminium strands are as follows:

i) Minimum breaking load of strand before stranding : 1.29 KN

ii) Minimum breaking load of strand after stranding : 1.23 KN

iii) Maximum D.C. resistance of strand at 20 deg. : 3.626
Centigrade Ohms/km

b) The details of steel strand are as follows:

i) Minimum breaking load of strand before stranding : 10.43 KN

ii) Minimum breading load of strand after stranding : 9.95 KN

iii) Minimum number of twists to be withstood : 18 before stranding
in torsion test when tested on gauge length
of 100 times of diameter of wire. : 16 after stranding

1.8 Workmanship:

1.8.1 All the aluminium and steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free from all
imperfections, such as spills and splits, diemarks, scratches, abrasions and kinks after
drawing and also after stranding.

1.8.2 The finished conductor shall have a smooth surface without any surface cuts,
abrasions, scuff marks and shall be free from dirt, grit, etc.

1.8.3 The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanized and shall have a minimum zinc coating
of 260 g/m
2
after stranding. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous, of uniform
thickness, free from imperfections and shall withstand a minimum of two and one half
dips in the standard preece test. The steel wire rods shall be of such quality and purity
that, when drawn to the size of the strands specified and coated with zinc, the finished
strands and the individual wires shall be of uniform quality and have the same
properties and characteristics as prescribed in IEC:888-1987.

1.8.4 The steel strands shall be preformed and postformed in order to prevent spreading of
strands in the event of cutting of composite core wire. Care shall be taken to avoid
damages to galvanization during preforming and postforming operations.


Page-5



1.9 Joints in Wires:

1.9.1 Aluminium Wires

No joints shall be permitted in the individual wires in the outer most layer of the
finished conductor. However, joints in the 12 wire and 18 wire inner layer of the
conductor shall be allowed but these joints shall be made by cold pressure butt-
welding and shall be such that no two such joints are within 15 metres of each other in
the complete stranded conductor. The joint shall withstand a stress of not less than
the breaking strength of individual strand guaranteed.

1.9.2 Steel Wires

There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished wire entering into the manufacture of
the strand nor strand joint or strand splices in any length of the complete stranded
steel core of the conductor.

1.10 Tolerances

The manufacturing tolerances to the extent of following limits only shall be permitted in
the diameter of individual strands and lay-ratio of the conductor:

b) Diameter of Aluminium & steel Strands

Nominal Maximum Minimum


Aluminium 3.18 mm 3.21 mm 3.15 mm

Steel 3.18 mm 3.24 mm 3.12 mm

b) Lay ratio of Conductor

Max. Min.

6 Wire layer 28 (Steel) 13

12 wire layer 17 (Al.) 10

18 wire layer 16 (Al.) 10

24 wire layer 14 (Al.) 10

1.11 Materials

1.11.1 The Aluminium strands shall be hard drawn from electrolytic aluminum rods having a
purity of not less than 99.5% and a copper content not exceeding 0.04%.



Page-6






1.11.2 The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel wire rods produced by
either the acid or basic open hearth process, the electric furnace process, or the basic
oxygen process and shall conform to the following requirements as to the chemical
composition:

Element % composition

Carbon 0.50 to 0.85

Manganese 0.50 to 1.10

Phosphorus Not more than 0.035

Sulphur Not more than 0.045

Silicon 0.10 to 0.35

1.11.3 The zinc used for galvanizing shall be electrolytic high grade Zinc of 99.95% purity. It
shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209.

1.12 Standard Length

1.12.1 The Standard Length of the conductor shall be 1500 meters. A tolerance of +/- 5% on
the standard length offered by the Bidder shall be permitted. All lengths outside this
limit of tolerance shall be treated as random lengths.

1.12.2 Random lengths will be accepted provided no length is less than 70% of the standard
length and total quantity of such random lengths shall not be more than 10% of the
quantity ordered. When one number random length has been manufactured at any
time, five (5) more individual lengths, each equivalent to the above random length with
a tolerance of +/- 5% shall also be manufactured and all the above six random lengths
shall be despatched in the same shipment. At any point, the cumulative quantity
supplied including such random lengths shall not be more than 12.5% of the total
cumulative quantity supplied including such random lengths. However, the last 20% of
the quantity ordered shall be supplied only in standard lengths as specified.

1.12.3 Bidder shall also indicate the maximum single length, above the standard length, he
can manufacture in the guaranteed technical particulars of offer. This is required for
special stretches like river crossing etc. The HVPNL reserves the right to place orders
for the above lengths on the same terms and conditions applicable for the standard
lengths during pendency of the contract.






Page-7

2. Technical Description of Earthwire
2.1 Details of Earthwire

2.1.1 The galvanized steel earthwire shall generally conform to the specification of ACSR
core wire as mentioned in IS:398 (part-II)-1976 except where otherwise specified
herein.

2.1.2 The details of the earthwire are tabulated below:

a) Stranding and wire diameter : 7/3.15 mm steel

b) Number of Strands :

Steel core : 1

Outer steel layer : 6

c) Total sectional area : 54.55 sq.mm

d) Overall diameter : 9.45 mm

e) Approximate weight : 428Kg/km

f) Calculated DC resistance at : 2.95 ohm/km
20 deg. Centigrade

g) Minimum ultimate tensile : 57 kN
strength

h) Direction of lay of outer layer : Right hand

i) Minimum tensile strength : 1100 kgf/mm. sq.

2.2.1 All steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free from all imperfection, such as spills
and splits, diemarks, scratches, abrasions and kinks after drawing and also after
stranding.

2.2.2 The finished material shall have minimum brittleness as it will be subjected to
appreciable vibration while in use.

2.2.3 The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanized and shall have a minimum zinc coating
of 240 g/m
2
after stranding. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous, of uniform
thickness, free from imperfections and shall withstand three and a half dips after
stranding in standard preece test. The steel wire rods shall be of such quality and
purity that, when drawn to the size of the strands specified and coated with the
finished strands shall be of uniform quality and have the same properties and
characteristics as prescribed in ASTM designation B498-74.

2.2.4 The steel strands shall be preformed and postformed in order to prevent spreading of
strands while cutting of composite earthwire. Care shall be taken to avoid damages to
galvanization during performing and postforming operations.

2.2.5 To avoid susceptibility towards wet storage stains (white rust), the finished material
shall be provided with a protective coating of boiled linseed oil.

Page-8

2.3 Joints in Wires

There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished steel wire strand entering into
manufacture of the earthwire. There shall be no strand joints or strand splice any
length of the complete stranded earthwire.

2.4 Tolerances

The manufacturing tolerance to the extent of the following limits only shall permitted in
the diameter of the individual steel strands and lay length of earthwire.

Standard Maximum Minimum

Diameter 3.15 mm 3.20 mm 3.10 mm

Lay length 160 mm 175 mm 145 mm

2.5 Materials

2.5.1 Steel

The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel rods and shall conform to
the following requirements as to the chemical composition:

Element % composition
Carbon Not more than 0.55
Manganese 0.4 to 0.9
Phosphorus Not more than 0.04
Sulphur Not more than 0.04
Silicon 0.15 to 0.35

2.5.2 Zinc

The zinc used for galvanizing shall be electrolytic high grade zinc of 99.95% purity. It
shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209/1979.

2.6 Standard Length
2.6.1 The Standard Length of the earthwire shall be 2000 meters. The tolerance on length
shall be +/- 5% on the standard length.

2.6.2 Random lengths will be accepted provided no length is less than 70% of the standard
length and total quantity of random lengths is not be more than 10% percent of the
total quantity in each shipment.

3. Tests and standards

3.1 Tests

3.1.1 The following acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture shall be
carried out on the conductor and earthwire. For the purpose of this clause, the
following shall apply.
Page-9

3.1.2 Acceptance tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried out on samples taken
from each lot offered for pre-despatch inspection, for the purpose of acceptance of
that lot.

3.1.3 Routine tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on each strand/
spool/length of the conductor and earthwire to check requirements which are likely to
vary during production.

3.1.4 Tests during manufacture shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out during the
process of manufacture and end inspection by the manufacture to ensure the desired
quality of the end product to be supplied by him.

3.1.5 For all acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be the values guaranteed by the
bidder in the guaranteed technical particulars of his proposal or the acceptance value
specified in this specification, whichever is more stringent for that particular test.

3.2 Type Tests

3.2.1 The equipment should be offered type tested. Test reports should not be more than
seven years old reckoned from the date of bid opening in respect of all the tests
carried out in accredited laboratories ( based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic
body or witnessed by HVPNL or another electric power utility and be submitted by the
successful Bidder to HVPNL for approval as per schedule given in Bar chart.
a) Surface condition test
b) Test for ultimate breaking load on stranded conductor
c) Stress-strain test
d) Measurement of diameter of individual aluminium and steel wires.
e) Measurement of lay ratio.
f) Breaking load of individual wires.
g) Ductility test
h) Wrapping test
i) Resistance test and
j) Galvanizing test

3.2.2 Acceptance Tests

a) Visual and dimensional check on drum )
) Annexure-A
b) Visual check for joints scratches etc. )
and lengths of conductor by rewinding )
)
c) Dimensional check on steel and )
Aluminium strands )
)
d) Galvanising test on steel strands ) Annexure-A
)
e) Torsion and elongation test )
On steel strands )
)
f) Check for lay-ratios of various layers ) Annexure-A
Page-10

g) Breaking load test on steel and )
aluminum strands )
)
h) Wrap test on steel and aluminum ) IS:398 (part-II)
strands )
)
i) DC resistance test on aluminium strands )

j) UTS Test on welded joint of strands ) Annexure-A

Note: All the tests except (j) shall be carried out on Aluminium and steel strands after
stranding only.

3.2.3 Acceptance Tests on Earthwire

a) Visual and dimensional check on drum )
)
c) Visual check for joints scratches etc. )
and lengths of Earthwire by rewinding )
)
d) Dimensional check ) Annexure-A
)
d) Lay length check )
)
e) Galvanising test )
)
f) Torsion test )

g) Elongation test ) IS:398 (part-II)-1976
)
h) Wrap test )
)
i) DC resistance test )
)
j) Breaking load test )

k) Chemical analysis of steel ) IS:398 (part-II)-1976

3.3 Routine Tests

3.3.1 Routine tests on Conductor

a) Check to ensure that the joints are as per specification.

b) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands.

c) Check that drums are as per specification.

d) All acceptance test as mentioned above to be carried out on each coil.


Page-11


3.3.2 Routine tests on Earthwire

a) Check for correctness of stranding.

b) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands.

c) Check that drums are as per specification.

3.4 Tests during manufacture.

3.4.1 Tests during manufacture on conductor

a) Chemical analysis of zinc )
used for galvanizing ) Annexure-A
)
b) Chemical analysis of aluminium )
used for making aluminium strands ) Annexure-A

3.4.2 Tests during manufacture Earthwire.

a) Chemical analysis of zinc )
used for galvanizing ) Annexure-A
)
b) Chemical analysis of steel )

3.5 Testing Expenses

The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during
manufacture specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price
except for the expenses of the inspector/ HVPNL representative.

3.6 Addition Tests

The HVPNL reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other test (s) of
reasonable nature carried out at Manufacturers premises, at site, or in any other
place in addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests to satisfy himself
that materials comply with the specifications.

3.7 Test Reports

3.7.1 Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the manufacturer at his works for
periodic inspection by the HVPNL representative.

3.7.2 Test certificates of tests during manufacture shall be maintained by the manufacturer.
These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the HVPNL.

3.8 Inspection

3.8.1 The HVPNL representative shall at all times be entitled to have access to the works
and all places of manufacture, where conductor shall be manufactured and
representative shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the manufacturer
works, raw materials and process of manufacture for conducting necessary tests as
detailed herein.
Page-12

3.8.2 The manufacturer shall keep the HVPNL informed in advance of the time of starting
and of the progress of manufacture of conductor in its various stages so that
arrangements can be made for inspection.

3.8.3 No material shall be despatched from its point of manufacture before it has been
satisfactorily inspected and tested, unless the inspection is waived off by the HVPNL
in writing. In the later case also the conductor shall be despatched only after
satisfactory testing for all tests specified herein have been completed.

3.8.4 The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the manufacturer of
any of his responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification, and shall
not prevent subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective.

3.9 Test Facilities

3.9.1 The following additional test facilities shall be available at the manufacturers works:

a) Calibration of various testing and measuring equipment including tensile testing
machine, resistance measurement facilities, burette, thermometer, barometer etc.

b) Standard resistance for calibration of resistance bridges.

c) Finished conductor/Earthwire shall be checked for length verification and surface
finish on separate rewinding machine at reduced speed (variable from 8 to 16
meters per minute). The rewinding facilities shall have appropriate clutch system and
free of vibrations, jerks etc. with traverse laying facilities.

3.10 Packing for conductor

3.10.1 The Conductor and earthwire shall be supplied in non-returnable, strong, wooden/
steel drums provided with lagging of adequate strength, constructed to protect the
conductor against all damage and displacement during transit, storage and
subsequent handing and stringing operations in the field. The manufacturer shall
be responsible for any loss or damage during transportation, handling and storage
due to improper packing. The drums shall generally conform to IS: 1778-1980,
except as otherwise specified hereinafter.

3.10.2 The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for letting off the
Conductor/earthwire under a minimum controlled tension of the order of 5 KN.

3.10.3 The general outline of the drum for earthwire shall be as per annexed drawing.
The bidder should submit their proposed drawings alongwith the bid.

3.10.4 For conductor, one standard length and for earthwire two standard lengths shall
be wound on each drum.

3.10.5 For Earthwire, each strand shall be individually welded to prevent parting of two
lengths at a tension less than 15 kN. The two ends where the first length finishes
and the second length starts, shall be clearly marked with adhesive tape and no
weld should be present outside these marks. The length between the two marks
shall be treated as scrap and will not be taken into account for measurement
purposes.
Page-13

3.10.6 All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned soft wood free
from defects that may materially weaken the component parts of the drums.
Preservative treatment shall be applied to the entire drum with preservatives of a
quality, which is not harmful to the conductor and earthwire.

3.10.7 The flanges shall be of two ply construction with each ply at right angles to the
adjacent ply and nailed together. The nails shall be driven from the inside face
flange, punched and then clenched on the outer face. The thickness of each ply
shall not very by more than 3 mm from that indicated in the figure. There shall be
at least 3 nails per plank of ply with maximum nail spacing of 75 mm. Where a
slot is cut in the flange to receive the inner end of the conductor, the entrance
shall be in line with the periphery of the barrel.


3.10.8 The wooden battens used for making the barrel of the conductor shall be of
segmental type. These shall be nailed to the barrel supports with at least two
nails. The battens shall be closely butted and shall provide a round barrel with
smooth external surface. The edges of the battens shall be rounded or
chamfered to avoid damage to the conductor and earthwire.

3.10.9 Barrel studs shall be used for the construction of drums. The flanges shall be
holed and the barrel supports slotted to receive them. The barrel studs shall be
threaded over a length on either end, sufficient to accommodate washers,
spindle plates and nuts for fixing flanges at the required spacing.

3.10.10 Normally, the nuts on the studs shall stand protruded of the flanges. All the Niles
used on the inner surface of the flanges and the drum barrel shall be counter
sunk. The ends of barrel shall generally be flushed with the top of the nuts.

3.10.11 The inner cheek of the flanges and drum barrel surface shall be painted with
bitumen based paint.

3.10.12 Before reeling, card board or double corrugated or thick bituminised waterproof
bamboo paper shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges of the
drum by means of a suitable commercial adhesive material. After reeling the
conductor and earthwire, the exposed surface of the outer layer of
conductor/earthwire shall be wrapped with water proof thick bituminised bamboo
paper to preserve the conductor/earthwire from dirt, grit and damage during
transport and handling.

3.10.13 A minimum space of 75 mm for conductor and 50 mm for earthwire shall be
provided between the inner surface of the external protective lagging and outer
layer of the conductor/earthwire.

3.10.14 Each batten shall be securely nailed across grains as far as possible to the
flange, edges with at least 2 nails per end. The length of the nails shall not be
less than twice the thickness of the battens. The nails shall not protrude above
the general surface and shall not have exposed sharp, edges or allow the
battens to be released due to corrosion.

3.10.15 The nuts on the barrel studs shall be tack welded on the one side in order to fully
secure them. On the second end, a spring washer shall be used.
Page-14

3.10.16 Outside the protective lagging, there shall be minimum of two binder consisting of
hoop iron/galvanised steel wire. Each protective lagging shall have two recesses
to accommodate the binders.

3.10.17 The conductor ends shall be properly sealed on the side of one of the flanges to
avoid loosening of the conductor layers during transit and handling.

3.11 Marking

Each drum shall have the following information stenciled on it in indelible ink alongwith
other essential data:

a) Contract / Award letter number.

b) Name and address of consignee.

c) Manufacturers name and address.

d) Drum number.

e) Size of conductor/earthwire.

f) Length of conductor/earthwire in meters.

g) Gross weight of drum with conductor/earthwire.

h) Gross weight of drum without lagging.

i) Weight of empty drum with lagging.

j) Bevel diameter at three locations and an arrow marking at the location of
measurement.

k) Number of turns in the outer most layer.

l) Arrow marking for unwinding.

m) Position of the conductor/earthwire ends.

n) Distance between outer most layer of conductor and the inner surface of
lagging.

o) The conductor drum should bear ISI Monogram or equivalent internationally
recognized Monogram.


3.12 Verification of conductor and earthwire length.

The HVPNL reserves the right to verify the length of conductor and earthwire after
unreeling at least ten (10) percent of the drums in a lot offered for inspection.


Page-15





3.13 Standards

The conductor/earthwire shall conform to the following Indian / International
standards, which shall mean latest revisions, amendments /changes adopted and
published, unless otherwise specified herein before. International and internationally
recognized standards to which these standards generally correspond are also listed
below:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sr. Indian Title International
No Standard Standards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. IS: 209-1979 Specification for Zinc BS: 3436-1986
2 IS: 398-1982 Specification for aluminium
conductors for overhead
transmission purposes
BS: 215-1970
IEC:1089
3 IS:398-1982
Part (II)
Aluminum conductor
galvanized steel reinforced
BS: 215-1970

4 IS:1778-1980

Reels and drums for bare
conductors
BS:1559-1949
5 IS:1521-1972 Method of tensile testing of
steel wire
ISO:R8901959
6 IS:2629-1985 Recommended practice for
hot dip galvanizing of iron
and steel

7 IS:2633-1992 Method of testing uniformity
of coating on zinc coated
articles

8 IS:4826-1992 Galvanised coating on
round steel wires
ASTM A472-729
BS: 443-1969
9 IS:6745-1990 Methods of determination of
weight of zinc coating of
zinc coated iron and steel
articles
BS:433-1969
10 Zinc coated aluminium wire
for overhead line conductor
IEC 888-1987
11 Hard drawn aluminium wire
for overhead line conductor
IEC 889-1987








Page-16

The standard mentioned above are available from:

Reference Abbreviation Name and Address


BS British Standards, British
Standards Institution 101,
Pentonvile Road, N-19-ND
UK

IEC/CISPR International Electrotechnical
Commission, Bureau Central
De la Commission, Electro
Technique International, 1
Rue de verembe, Geneva
Switzerland

BIS Bureau of Indian Standards,
Mank Bhavan,-9, Bahadur
Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi
110001, INDIA

ISO International Organisation for
Standardization, Danish Board
Of Standardization Danish
tandardising Sraat, Aurehoegvej-
12, DK-2900, Heeleprup, DENMARK.

NEMA National Electric Manufacture
Association, 155, East 44
th
Street,
New York, NY 10017
U.S.A.















Page-17







ANNEXURE-A

1. Tests on Conductor

1.1 Surface condition & UTS test on stranded Conductor

Circles perpendicular to the axis of the conductor shall be marked at two places
on a sample of conductor of minimum 5m length suitably fixed by appropriate
fittings on a tensile testing machine. The load shall be increased at a steady
rate upto 50% of UTS and held for one minute. The circles drawn shall not be
distorted due to relative movement of strands. Thereafter the load shall be
increased at steady rate of 100% of UTS and held for one minute. The
conductor sample shall not fail during this period. The applied load shall then
be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.

1.2 D.C Resistance test on stranded conductor

On a conductor sample of minimum 5 m length two contact-clamps shall be
fixed with a pre-determined bolt torque. The resistance shall be measured by a
Kelvin double bridge by placing the clamps initially zero metre and
subsequently one metre apart. The test shall be repeated at least five times
and the average value recorded. The value obtained shall be corrected to the
value at 20
o
C. The resistance corrected at 20
o
C shall conform to the
requirement of this specification.

1.3 Chemical Analysis of Aluminium and Steel

Samples taken from the aluminium and steel ingots/coils/strands shall be
chemically/spectrographically analysed. The shall be in conformity to the
requirements stated in this specification.

1.4 Chemical Analysis of Zinc

Samples taken from the zinc ingots shall be chemically/spectrographically
analysed. The same shall be in conformity requirements stated in the
specification.

1.5 Visual and Dimensional Check on Drums

The drums shall be visually and dimensionally checked to ensure that they
conform to the requirements of this specification.

1.6 Visual Check for Joints, Scratches etc.

Conductor drums shall be rewound in the presence of the HVPNL. The HVPNL
shall visually check for scratches, joints etc. and that the conductor generally
conform to the requirements of this specification.

1.7 Dimensional check on strands

The individual strands shall be dimensionally checked to ensure that they
conform to the requirement of this specification.

Page-18

1.8 Check for Lay-ratios of Various Layers

The Lay-ratios of various layers shall be checked to ensure that they conform
to the requirements of this specification.

1.9 Breaking load test on welded Aluminium strands

Two Aluminium wire shall be welded as per the approved quality plan and shall
be subjected to tensile load. The welded joint of the wire shall be able to
withstand a minimum breaking load of the individual strand guaranteed by the
manufacturer.

1.10 Galvanising test

The Test procedure shall be as specified in IS:4826. The material shall conform
to the requirements of this specification. The adherence of zinc shall be
checked by wrapping around a mandrel four times the diameter of steel wire.

1.11 Torsion an Elongation tests on steel strands.

The test procedure shall be as specified in IS: 13.6.1 and 13.6.2 of IS:398 part-
5. In the torsion test, the number of complete twists before fracture shall not be
less than 18 on a length equal to 100 times the standard diameter of the strand
before stranding, and should not be less than 16 after stranding. The case test
sample length is less or mode than 100 times the stranded diameter of the
strand the minimum number of twists shall be proportioned to the length with
fractional numbers rounded off to next higher whole number. In the elongation
test the elongation of the strand shall not be less than 4% for a gauge length of
200mm.

2. Tests on earthwire

2.1 UTS test

Circles perpendicular to the axis of the earthwire shall be marked at two places
on a sample of earthwire of minimum 5 m length suitably compressed with
dead end clamps at either end. The load shall be increased at a steady rate
upto 50% of UTS and held for one minute. The circles drawn shall not be
distorted due to relative movement of strands. Thereafter the load shall be
increased at steady rate to 100% of UTS and held for one minute. The
earthwire sample shall not fail during this period. The applied load shall then be
increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.

2.2 D.C Resistance Test
On a earthwire sample of minimum 5 m length two contact- clamps shall be
fixed will a pre-determined bolt torque. The resistance shall be measured by a
Kelvin double bridge by placing the clamps initially zero metre and
subsequently one metre. The test shall be repeated at least five times and the
average value recorded. The value obtained shall be corrected to the value at
20
o
C. The resistance corrected at 20
o
C shall conform to the requirements of
this specification.


Page-19


2.3 Chemical Analysis of zinc
Samples taken from the zinc ingots shall be chemically/spectrographically
analysis. The same shall be in conformity to the requirements stated in the
specification.

2.4 Chemical Analysis of steel
Sample taken from the steel ingots/coils/strands shall be
chemically/specigraphically analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the
requirements stated in this specification.

2.5 Visual and Dimensional Check on Drum
The drum shall be visually and dimensionally checked to ensure that they
conform to the requirements of this specification.

2.6 Visual Check for joints, Scratches etc. and length of earthwire
Ten percent drums from each lot shall be rewound in the presence of the
HVPNL. The HVPNL shall visually check for scratches, joints etc. and see that
the earthwire generally conforms to the requirements of this specification. The
length of earthwire wound on the drum shall be measured with the help of
counter meter during rewinding.

2.7 Dimensional Check

The individual strands shall be dimensionally checked to ensure that they
conform to the requirements of this specification.
2.8 Lay length check

The lay length shall be checked to ensure that they conform to the
requirements this specification.

2.9 Galvanising Test
The test procedure shall be as specified in IS:4826-1968. The material shall
conform to the requirements of this specification. The adherence of zinc shall
be checked by wrapping around a mandrel four times the diameter of steel
wire.

2.10 Torsion Test
The minimum number of twists which a single steel strand shall withstand
during torsion test shall be eighteen for a length equal to100 times the standard
diameter of the strand. In case test sample length is less or more than 100
times the stranded diameter of the strand, the minimum number of twists will be
proportioned to the length and if number comes in the fraction then it will be
rounded off to next higher whole number.








Page-20





SECTION- VI,

CHAPTER-III (B)

1.0 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION OF ANTI-FOG TYPE DISC INSULATORS

1.1 DETAILS OF ANTI-FOG TYPE DISC INSULATORS FOR LINES WITH ACSR
PANTHER CONDUCTOR

1.1.1 The Insulator strings shall consist of Anti-Fog Type discs for a three phase, 50 Hz,
effectively earthed 132 KV transmission system in a heavily polluted atmosphere. The
discs shall be cap and pin, ball and socket type.

1.1.2 Bidder shall quote for disc insulators made of electro-porcelain .

1.1.3 The size of disc insulator, minimum creepage distance, the number to be used in
different type of strings, their electromechanical strength and mechanical strength of
insulator string alongwith hardware fittings shall be as follows:

Sr.
No
Type of string Size of disc
insulator
(mm)
Minimum
Creepage
distance of
each
disc(mm)
No. of
discs
E & M
strength of
of each
string (kN)
1 2 3 4 5 6

1. Single Suspension 255x145 432 1x9 70

2. Single Tension 255x145 432 1x10

90
3. Single Suspension
Pilot
255x145 432 1x9 70
4. Double Tension 255x145 432 2x10

90

1.2 Pin and cap

1.2.1 Pin and cap shall be designed to transmit the mechanical stresses to the shell by
compression and develop uniform mechanical strength in the insulator. The cap shall
be circular with the inner and outer surfaces concentric, of such design that will not
yield or distort under load conditions.

1.2.2 The pin ball shall move freely in the cap socket but without danger of accidental
uncoupling during erection or in position. The design of the disc should be such that
stresses due to expansion or contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to
deterioration. Page-1


1.3 Security clip

1.3.1 Security clip for use with ball and socket coupling shall be of R-shaped hump type
which shall provide positive locking of the coupling as per IS: 2486- (part-III)/ IEC:372.
The legs of the security clips shall be spread after installation to prevent complete
withdrawal from the socket. The locking device should be resilient, corrosion
resistant and of suitable mechanical strength. There shall be no rise of the locking
device being displaced accidentally or being rotated when in position. Under no
circumstances shall locking device allow separation of insulator units or fittings.

1.3.2 The hole for the security clip shall be countersunk and the clip shall be of such that the
eye of clip may be engaged by a hot line clip puller to provide for disengagement
under energized conditions. The force required to pull the security clip into its
unlocked position shall not be less than 50 N (5 kg) or more than 500 N (50 kg).

1.4 Ball and socket Designation

The dimensions of the balls and sockets for 70 KN & 90 kN Anti-Fog Type discs shall
be of 16mm Alt-B designation respectively in accordance with the standard
dimensions stated in IS:2486- (Part-II)/IEC: 120.

1.5 Dimensional Tolerance of Insulator Disc.

Permitted dimensional tolerances of the Anti-Fog Type disc insulators shall be as
under:-
a) On all dimensions for which (0.04d + 1.5) mm where
special tolerance do not apply d being the dimension in mm.

b) On spacing of string insulator unit (0.03S + 0.3) mm where
S is spacing in mm.
1.6 Interchangeability

The disc insulators inclusive of the ball and socket fittings shall be of standard design
suitable for use with the hardware fittings of any make confirming to relevant
Indian/International standards.

1.7 Corona and RI performance

All surfaces must be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or projections. No part
shall be subjected to excessive localised pressure. The metal parts and porcelain
shall be so designed and manufactured that it shall not generate any Radio
Interference beyond specified limit and not produce any noise generating corona
under all operating conditions.

1.8 Maintenance

1.8.1 The disc insulators offered shall be suitable for employment of hot line maintenance
techniques so that the usual hot line operations can be carried our with ease, speed
and safety.

1.8.2 Bidders shall indicate the methods generally used in the routine hot and dead line
maintenance of EHV line for which similar disc insulators have been supplied by them.
Bidders shall also indicate the recommended periodicity of such maintenance.
Page-2
1.9 DETAILS OF ANTI-FOG TYPE DISC INSULATORS FOR LINES WITH ACSR
ZEBRA CONDUCTOR

1.9.1 The Insulator strings shall consist of Anti-Fog Type discs for a three phase, 50 Hz,
effectively earthed 132 KV transmission system in a heavily polluted atmosphere. The
discs shall be cap and pin, ball and socket type.

1.9.2 Bidder shall quote for disc insulators made of electro-porcelain .

1.9.3 The size of disc insulator, minimum creepage distance, the number to be used in
different type of strings, their electromechanical strength and mechanical strength of
insulator string alongwith hardware fittings shall be as follows:

Sr.
No
Type of string

Size of disc
insulator
(mm)
Minimum
Creepage
distance of
each disc(mm)

No. of
discs
E & M
strength of of
each string
(kN)
1 2 3 4 5 6

5. Single Suspension 255x145 432 1x9 70

6. Single Tension 280x145 432 1x10

120
7. Single Suspension
Pilot
255x145 432 1x9 70
8. Double Tension 280x145 432 2x10

2X120

1.10 Pin and cap

1.10.1 Pin and cap shall be designed to transmit the mechanical stresses to the shell by
compression and develop uniform mechanical strength in the insulator. The cap shall
be circular with the inner and outer surfaces concentric, of such design that will not
yield or distort under load conditions.

1.10.2 The pin ball shall move freely in the cap socket but without danger of accidental
uncoupling during erection or in position. The design of the disc should be such that
stresses due to expansion or contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to
deterioration.

1.11 Security clip

1.11.1 Security clip for use with ball and socket coupling shall be of R-shaped hump type
which shall provide positive locking of the coupling as per IS: 2486- (part-III)/ IEC:372.
The legs of the security clips shall be spread after installation to prevent complete
withdrawal from the socket. The locking device should be resilient, corrosion
resistant and of suitable mechanical strength. There shall be no rise of the locking
device being displaced accidentally or being rotated when in position. Under no
circumstances shall locking device allow separation of insulator units or fittings.

Page-3


1.11.2 The hole for the security clip shall be countersunk and the clip shall be of such that the
eye of clip may be engaged by a hot line clip puller to provide for disengagement
under energized conditions. The force required to pull the security clip into its
unlocked position shall not be less than 50 N (5 kg) or more than 500 N (50 kg).

1.12 Ball and socket Designation

The dimensions of the balls and sockets for 70 KN & 120 kN Anti-Fog Type discs
shall be of 16mm Alt-B and 20 mm designation respectively in accordance with the
standard dimensions stated in IS:2486- (Part-II)/IEC: 120.

1.13 Dimensional Tolerance of Insulator Disc.

Permitted dimensional tolerances of the Anti-Fog Type disc insulators shall be as
under:-

a) On all dimensions for which (0.04d + 1.5) mm where
special tolerance do not apply d being the dimension in mm.

b) On spacing of string insulator unit (0.03S + 0.3) mm where
S is spacing in mm.

1.14 Interchangeability

The disc insulators inclusive of the ball and socket fittings shall be of standard design
suitable for use with the hardware fittings of any make confirming to relevant
Indian/International standards.

1.15 Corona and RI performance

All surfaces must be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or projections. No part
shall be subjected to excessive localised pressure. The metal parts and porcelain
shall be so designed and manufactured that it shall not generate any Radio
Interference beyond specified limit and not produce any noise generating corona
under all operating conditions.

1.16 Maintenance

1.16.1 The disc insulators offered shall be suitable for employment of hot line maintenance
techniques so that the usual hot line operations can be carried our with ease, speed
and safety.

1.16.2 Bidders shall indicate the methods generally used in the routine hot and dead line
maintenance of EHV line for which similar disc insulators have been supplied by them.
Bidders shall also indicate the recommended periodicity of such maintenance.




Page-4






1.17 Materials

1.17.1 Porcelain

The porcelain used in the manufacture of shells shall be sound, free from defects
thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed.

1.17.2 Glaze


The finished porcelain shall be glazed in Brown colour. The glaze shall cover all
exposed parts of the insulator and shell have a good luster, smooth surface and
good performance under the extreme weather conditions of a tropical climate. It shall
not be cracked or chipped by ageing under the normal service conditions. The glaze
shall have the same co-efficient of expansion as that of the porcelain body
throughout the working temperature range.

1.17.3 Cement

Cement used in the manufacture of the insulator shall not cause fracture by expansion
or loosening by contraction. The cement shall not give rise to chemical reaction with
metal fittings and its thickness shall be as small and uniform as possible. Proper care
shall be taken to correctly centre and locate individual parts during cementing.

1.17.4 Pins and Caps
Pins and caps shall be made of drop forged steel and malleable cast iron/ spherodal
graphite iron / drop forged steel respectively, duly hot dip galvanized and shall not be
made by jointing, welding, shrink fitting or any other process from more than one
piece of material.

1.17.5 Security Clips

Security clips shall be made of good quality stainless steel or phosphor bronge
as per IS:1385-1968. 2.5% extra security clip shall be provided.

1.18 Workmanship

1.18.1 All the material shall be of the latest design and conform to the best modern
practices adopted in the extra High voltage field. Bidders shall offer only such
insulators as are guaranteed by him to be satisfactory and suitable for 132 kV
transmission line and will give continued good service.

1.18.2 The design, manufacturing process and material control at various stages shall
be such as to give maximum working load, highest mobility, best resistance to
corrosion, good finish and elimination of sharp edges and corners to limit corona
and radio interference.

1.18.3 The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and
contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration.

1.18.4 Metal caps shall be free from cracks, seams, shrinks, air holes, burrs and rough
edges. All surfaces of the metal parts shall be perfectly smooth with no projecting
points or irregularities which may cause corona. All load bearing surfaces shall
be smooth and uniform so as to distribute the loading stresses uniformly.
Page-5

1.18.5 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized to give a minimum average coating of
Zinc equivalent to 610 gm/sq m and shall be in accordance with the requirement
of IS: 2629-1966 and shall satisfy the tests mentioned in IS: 2633-1972. The zinc
used for galvanizing shall be of grade Zn 99.95 as per IS:209-1979. The zinc
coating shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably bright, continous and free
from imperfections such as flux, ash, rust stains, bulky white deposits, and
blisters. The galvanized metal part shall be guaranteed to withstand atleast six
successive dips each lasting for one (1) minute duration under the standard
preece test.

1.18.6 Before ball fittings are galvanized, all die flashing on the shank and on the
bearing surface of the ball shall be carefully removed without reducing the
dimensions below the design requirements

1.18.7 The design of the insulators shall be such that the shell shall not engage directly
with hard metal. The design shall also be such that when units are coupled
together there is no contact between the shell of one unit and metal of the next
adjacent unit. The design of the shell ribs shall be such that the security clip of
the insulator can be engaged and disengaged easily with hot stick without
damaging the shell ribs.

1.18.8 Insulator units after assembly shall be concentric and co-axial within limits as
permitted by the relevant Indian standards.

1.18.9 The manufacturer of the disc insulators shall guarantee an insulator failure rate
not exceeding 1 (one) per 10000 (ten thousand) per year. In case the annual
failure rate during the first ten years of service exceeds the above figure, the
manufacture shall supply to the HVPNL free of cost spare insulators equal to 10
time the excess failure.

1.18.10 The manufacture shall guarantee that there shall not be any decapping of
insulators on line under normal operating conditions. In event of any decapping
and subsequent line drop, during the first three years of service the manufacturer
shall have to pay Rs. 50,000/- (Rs. Fifty thousand only) per dropped string
towards expenditure to be incurred by HVPNL for this repair.

1.19 Equipment Marking.

1.19.1 Each insulator disc shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the trademark of the
manufacture and year of manufacture. The guaranteed combined mechanical and
electrical strength shall be indicated in kilo Newtons followed by the word kN to
facilitate easy identification and to ensure proper use.

1.19.2 For porcelain insulator, the marking shall be on porcelain. The marking shall be
printed, not impressed and shall be applied before firing.

1.19.3 One 10 mm thick ring of suitable quality of paint shall be marked on the cap of
each insulator of particular strength for easy identification of the type of insulator.
The paint shall not have any deteriorating effect on the insulator performance.
Following codes shall be used as identification mark.
For 70 KN disc : red
For 90KN disc : Black
For 120KN disc : yellow
Page-6
1.20 Bid Drawings

1.20.1 The successful Bidder shall submit 4 sets of following fully dimensional
drawings complete in all respect for approval to HVPNL as per time
schedule given in Bar Chart:-

Shell diameter and ball to ball spacing with manufacturing
tolerances.

b) Minimum creepage distance with positive tolerance.

c) Protected creepage distance.

d) Eccentricity of the disc
i) Axial run out
ii) Radial run out
e) Unit mechanical an electrical characteristics.
f) Size and weight of ball an socket parts
g) Weight of unit insulator disc.
h) Materials
i) Identification mark
j) Manufacturers catalogue number

1.20.2 After placement of award, the manufacturer shall submit full dimensioned
insulator drawings containing all the details as given in clause No. 1.12.1
above, in four (4) copies to HVPNL representative for approval. After
getting approval from HVPNL representative and successful completion of
all the type tests, the manufacturer shall submit. 12 more copies of the
same drawing to the HVPNL representative for further distribution and field
use at HVPNL representative s end.

1.20.3 After placement of award the manufacture shall also submit fully
dimensioned insulator create drawing for different type of insulators.










Page-7






2. Tests and standards

2.1 TESTS

The following acceptance, routine tests and tests during manufacture shall
be carried on the disc insulator individually and alongiwth hardware fittings.
For the purpose of this clause: -

2.1.1 Acceptance tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried out on
samples taken from each lot offered for pre-despatch inspection for the
purpose of acceptance of that lot.

2.1.2 Routine tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on each
disc insulator/hardware fitting to check requirements which are likely to vary
during production.

2.1.3 Tests during manufacture shall mean those tests which are to be carried out
during the process of manufacture and end inspection by the manufacture to
ensure the desired quality of the end product to be supplied by him.

2.1.4 For all acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be the values
guaranteed by the bidder in the Guaranteed Technical Particulars of his
proposal or the acceptance value specified in this specification whichever is
more stringent for that particular test.

2.2. Type tests

The equipment should be offered fully type tested for all the type tests
mentioned in IS:731-1971/IEC-60383-1993/IS:8704-1995 (latest version).
Test reports should not be more than seven years old reckoned from the
date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited
laboratories ( based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or
witnessed by HVPNL or another electric power utility and be submitted by
the successful Bidder to HVPNL for approval as per schedule given in Bar
chart.

2.3 Acceptance tests

2.3.1 For Disc Insulators

Visual examination IS:731-1971

b) Verification of dimensions IS:731-1971

c) Temperature cycle test IS:731-1971

d) Galvanizing test IS:731-1971

e) Electromechanical failing load test IS:731-1971

f) Mechanical Performance test IEC:60383-1993

g) Residual strength test IEC:60383-1993

Page-8



h) Eccentricity test IEC:60383-1993

i) Test on locking device for ball IS: 2486 (Part-IV)
and socket coupling

j) Vibration test
(only once for each type of disc Annexure-A
Insulator under the contract)

2.4 For porcelain insulators

a) Puncture test IEC: 60383-1993/IS:731-
1971

b) Porosity test IS:731-1971

2.5 Routine Tests

2.5.1 For Disc Insulators

a) Visual Inspection )
) IS: 731-1971
b) Mechanical routine test ) Clause 10.13, 10.14 &
10.15
c) Electrical routine test )

2.5.2 Tests During Manufacture

On all components as applicable

a) Chemical analysis of zinc used )
for Glavansing )
)
b) Chemical analysis, mechanical )
metallographic test and magnetic ) Annexure-A
particle inspection for malleable )
castings. )

c) Chemical analysis, hardness )
tests and magnetic particle ) Annexure-A
inspection for forgings )
)
d) Hydraulic internal pressure )
tests on disc insulator shells )
)
e) Metallurgical tests for metal )
Fittings only (in black condition) )
i) Grain size )
ii) Inclusion rating )
iii) Micro structure )

Page - 9

2.6 Testing Expenses

The entire cost of testing for acceptance and routine tests and tests during
manufacture specified herein shall be treated included in the quoted Ex-works
price except for the expenses of the inspector/HVPNL representative.

2.7 Schedule of testing and additional tests

2.7.1 The bidder has to indicate the schedule of following activities in their bids:

a. Submission of drawing for approval.
b. Submission of Quality Assurance programme for approval.

2.7.2 The HVPNL representative reserves the right of having at his own expense any
other test (s) of reasonable nature carried out at manufacturers premises, at
site, or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and
routine tests to satisfy himself that the material comply with the specifications.

2.7.3 The HVPNL representative also reserves the right to conduct all the tests
mentioned in this specification at his own expense on the samples drawn from
the site at manufacturers premises or at any other test center. In case of
evidence of non compliance, it shall be binding on the part of the manufacture to
prove the compliance of the items to the technical specifications by repeat tests
or correction of deficiencies, or replacement of defective items, all without any
extra cost to the HVPNL representative .

2.8 Co- ordination for testing

The Bidder/insulator manufacturer shall have to co-ordinate testing of insulators
with hardware fittings to be supplied by other manufacturer and shall have to also
guarantee overall satisfactory performance of the insulators with the hardware
fittings.

2.9 Test Reports

2.9.1 Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the manufacturer at his works
for periodic inspection by the HVPNL representative s representative.

2.9.2 Test certificates of test during manufacture shall be maintained by the
manufacturer. These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the
HVPNL representative .

2.10 NSPECTION

2.10.1 The HVPNL representative s representative shall at all times be entitled to have
access to the works and all places of manufacture, where insulators, and its
component parts shall be manufactured and the representatives shall have full
facilities for unrestricted inspection of the manufacturers and sub-manufacturers
works, raw materials, manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary test
as detailed herein.

2.10.2 The material for final inspection shall be offered by the manufacturer only under
packed condition as detailed in clause No. 2.12 of the specification. The HVPNL
representative shall select samples at random from the packed lot for carrying out
acceptance tests.
Page-10

2.10.3 The manufacturer shall keep HVPNL informed in advance of the time of starting and
the progress of manufacture of material in their various stages so that arrangements
could be made inspection.

2.10.4 No material shall be despatched from its point of manufacture before it has been
satisfactorily inspected and tested unless the inspection is waived off by the HVPNL
representative in writing. In the latter case also the material shall be despatched
only after satisfactory testing for all tests specified herein have been completed.

2.10.5 The acceptance of any quantity of material shall be in no way relieve the
manufacturer of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection, if such material are later
found to be defective.

2.11 Packing and Marking

2.11.1 All insulators shall be packed in strong seasoned wooden crates. The gross weight
of the crates along with the material shall not normally exceed 200 kg. to avoid
handling problem. For marine transportation crates shall be palleted.

2.11.2 The packing shall be of sufficient strength of withstand rough handling during transit,
storage at site and subsequent handling in the field.

2.11.3 Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacers shall be provided to
prevent damage or deformation during transit and handling.

2.11.4 All packing cases shall be marked legibly and correctly so as to ensure safe arrival
at their destination and to avoid the possibility of goods being lost or wrongly
despatched on account of faulty packing and faulty or illegible markings. Each
wooden case/crate shall have all the markings stenciled on it in indeliable ink.
2.12 Standards

2.12.1 The insulators strings and its components shall conform to the following
Indian/international standards which shall mean latest revision, with
amendments/changes adopted and published, unless specifically stated otherwise in
the Specification.

2.12.2 In the event of supply of insulators conforming to standards other than specified the
Bidder shall confirm in his bid that these standards are equivalent to those specified.
In case of award salient features of comparison between the standards proposed by
the manufacturer and those specified in his document will be provided by the
manufacturer to establish equivalence.

Sr. No. Indian Standard Title International
Standards
1. IS: 209-1992 Specification for Zinc BS: 3436-1986
2 IS: 406-1991 Method of chemical
analysis of slab zinc

3 IS: 731-1991 Porcelain insulators for
overhead power line with a
nominal voltage greater
than 1000V
BS: 137-1982
(I&II)
IEC:383-1993
Page-11

4 IS:2071
Part (I)-1993
Part (II)-1991
Part (III)-1991
Methods of High Voltage
Testing
IEC:60-1-1989
5 IS:2486

Specification for Insulator
fittings for overhead power
line with a nominal voltage
greater than 1000V

Part (I)-1993 General Requirements and
tests
BS:3288-1979
Part (II)-1989 Dimensional Requirements IEC:120-1984

Part (III)-1991 Locking devices IEC:372-1984
6 IS:2629-1990 Recommended practice for
hot Dip galvanization for
iron and steel
ISO:1461 (E)
7 IS:2633-1992 Testing of Uniformity of
coating of zinc coated
articles

8 IS:3188-1988 Dimensions for Disc
Insulators
IEC:305-1978
9 IS:6745- 1990 Determination of weight of
zinc coating on zinc coated
iron and steel articles.
ISO:1460 (E)
10 IS:8263-1990 Methods of RI test on HV
insulators
IEC:437-1973
NEMA Publication
No. 107/1964/CISPR
11 IS:8269-1990 Methods for switching
impulse test on HV
insulators
IEC:506-1975
12 Thermal mechanical
performance test and
mechanical performance
test on string insulator
units.
IEC:575-1977
13 Salt fog pollution voltage
withstand test
IEC:507-1991
14 Residual strength of string
insulator units of glass or
ceramic material for
overhead line after
mechanical damage of the
dielectric
IEC:797-1984
15 Guide for the selection of
insulators in respect of
polluted conditions
IEC:815-1986
16 Tests on insulators of
ceramic material or glass
for overhead line with a
nominal voltage greater
than 1000V
IEC:383-1993


Page-12






The standard mentioned above are available from:


Reference Abbreviation Name and Address


BS British Standards, British
Standards Institution 101,
Pentonvile Road, N-19-ND
UK

IEC/CISPR International Electrotechnical
Commission, Bureau Central
De la Commission, Electro
Technique International, 1
Rue de verembe, Geneva
Switzerland

IS Bureau of Indian Standards,
Mank Bhavan,-9, Bahadur
Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi
110001, INDIA

ISO International Organisation for
Standardization, Danish Board
Of Standardization Danish
Standardising Sraat,
Aurehoegvej- 12
DK-2900, Heeleprup,
DENMARK.

NEMA National Electric Manufacture
Association, 155, East 44
th

Street,
New York, NY 10017
U.S.A.





Page-13

ANNEXURE-A

1. Tests on complete strings with Hardware fittings.

1.1 Voltage distribution test

The voltage across each insulator unit shall be measured by sphere gap
method. The result obtained shall be converted into percentage. The
voltage across any disc shall not exceed 20% for suspension insulator
string and 22% for tension insulator string.

1.2 Mechanical strength test

The complete insulator string along with its hardware fitting excluding
arcing horn, and suspension assembly/dead end assembly shall be
subjected to a load equal to 50% of the specified minimum ultimate tensile
strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the
minimum UTS specified. The load shall be held for five minutes and then
removed. After removal of the load, the string components shall not show
any visual deformation and it shall be possible to disassemble them by
hand. Hand tools may be used to remove cotter pins and loosen the nuts
initially. The string shall then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS
and the load shall be further increased at a steady rate till the specified
minimum UTS and held for one minute. No fracture should occur during
this period. The applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is
reached and the value recorded.

1.3 Vibration test

The suspension string shall be tested in suspension mode, and tension
string in tension mode itself in laboratory span of minimum 30 metres. In
the case of suspension string a load equal to 600 Kg shall be applied along
the axis of the suspension string by means of turn buckle. The insulator
string along with hardware fittings and conductor tensioned at 2500 Kgf
shall be secured with clamps. The system shall be suitable to maintain
constant tension on the conductor throughout the duration of the test.
Vibration dampers shall not be used on the test span. The conductor shall
be vertically vibrated at one of the resonance frequencies of the insulators
string (more than 10 Hz) by means of vibration inducing equipment. The
peak to peak, displacement in mm of vibration at the antinode point nearest
to the string shall be measured and the same shall not be less than 1000 /
f
1.8
where is the frequency of vibration in cycles/sec. The insulator string
shall be vibrated for not less than 10 million cycles without any failure. After
the test the disc insulators shall be examined for looseness of pins and cap
or any crack in the cement. The hardware shall be examined for looseness,
fatigue failure and mechanical strength test. There shall be no deterioration
of properties of hardware components and insulators after the vibration
test. The insulators shall be subjected to the following tests as per relevant
standards:



Page-14



TESTS PERCENTAGE OF DISC INSULATOR
UNITS TO BE TESTED

a) Temperature cycle test 60
Followed by mechanical
Performance test

b) Puncture test 40


2. On disc insulator units

2.1 Steep wave front test

The following test shall be performed on 10 nos. of disc insulators selected
at random from the lot offered for selection of sample for type test.

a) Each insulator unit shall be subjected to five successive positive and
negative impulse flashovers with a wave having minimum effective rate
of rise of 2500 kV per microseconds.

b) Each unit shall be subjected to three dry power frequency voltage
flashovers.

2.2 Acceptance Criteria

An insulator shall be deemed to have met the requirement of this test if,
having been successfully subjected to the ten impulse flashovers, the
arithmetic mean of the three subsequent dry power frequency voltage
flashover values equals or exceeds 95% of the rated dry power frequency
flashover voltage.

An insulator shall be deemed to have failed to meet the requirement of
above testing , if

a) It has not flashed over when the oscillogram or peak voltage indicator
shows a marked reduction in voltage.

or

b) Any one of the subsequent three dry power frequency voltage flashover
value is less than 80% of the value specified. Failure of any one unit
either in the steep front of wave or subsequent low frequency voltage
test shall be cause for testing on double number of units.




Page-15





2.3 Hydraulic Internal Pressure Test on Shells

The test shall be carried out on 100% shells before assembly. The details
regarding test will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the
manufacturer and HVPNL in Quality Assurance Programme.

2.4 Thermal Mechanical Performance Test

Thermal Mechanical Performance Test shall be performed in accordance
with IEC-383-1-1993 clause 20 with the following modifications:

(1) The applied mechanical load during this test shall be 70% of the
rated electromechanical strength value.

(2) The acceptance criteria shall be

a) X greater than or equal to R+3S.

Where
X Mean value of the individual mechanical failing load.

R Rated electromechanical strength test.

S Standard deviation

b) The minimum sample size shall be taken as 20.

c) The individual electromechanical failing load shall be at least equal to
the rated value. Also puncture shall not occur before the ultimate
fracture.

2.5 Electromechanical Failing Load Test

This test shall be performed in accordance with clause 18 and 19 of IEC-
383 with the following acceptance.

i) X gareater than or equal to R+3S

Where
X Mean value of the Electromechanical strength test.

R Rated electromechanical strength test.

S Standard deviation

ii) The minimum sample size shall be taken as 20. However for larger lot
size IEC 591 shall be applicable.

iii) The individual electro-mechanical strength shall be at least equal to the
rated value. Also electrical puncture shall not occur before the ultimate
fracture.
Page-16







2.6 Residual strength test

The above test shall be performed as per clause 4.4 and 4.5 of IEC 797
preceded by the temperature cycle test, on orcelain disc insulators. The
sample size shall be 25 and the evaluation of the results and acceptance
criteria shall be as per clause No 4.6 of IEC 797.


3. Tests on all components (As applicable)

3.1 Chemical Analysis of Zinc used for Galvanizing

Samples taken form the zinc ingot shall be chemically analysed as per IS:
209-1979. The purity of zinc shall not be less than 99.95%.

3.2 Tests for Forgings

The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for
forgings, will be as per the internationally recognized procedures for these
tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch
the details regarding test will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the
manufacturer and HVPNL in quality assurance Programme.

3.3 Tests on castings

The chemical analysis, mechanical and metallographic tests and magnetic
particle inspection for castings will be as per the internationally recognized
procedures for these tests. The samplings will be based on heat umber and
heat treatment batch. The details regarding test will be as discussed and
mutually agreed to by the manufacturer and HVPNL in quality assurance
programme.




















Page-17
`

SECTION- VI, PART-II, CHAPTER-III (C)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF

SILICONE RUBBER POLYMER INSULATORS

CONTENTS


S. No Clause Page No.

1. Technical Description of Silicone Polymer Insulators 1

2. Tests and Standards 6

3. Annexure-A 13



SECTION- VI, PART-II, CHAPTER-III (C)


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF COMPOSITE LONG ROD INSULATORS
1.1 Details of Composite Long Rod Insulators
1.1.1 The insulators of the strings shall consist of composite long rod insulators for a three
phase, 50 Hz, effectively earthed 132kV transmission system application in a very
heavy polluted environment. Couplings shall be ball and socket type.

1.1.2 Bidder shall quote such composite insulators which have proven use under
foggy/humid operational conditions in polluted industrial environment combined with
smoke and dust particles. The Bidder shall furnish evidence in the form of certification
from the power utilities that the similar type of product supplied to them had been
performing satisfactory. The Bidder shall also submit certified test report for an
accelerated ageing test of 5000 hours such as that described in Appendix-C of IEC-
61109.

1.1.3 Insulators shall have sheds of the open aerodynamic profile without any under ribs
with good self-cleaning properties. Insulator shed profile, spacing projection etc. shall
be strictly in accordance with the recommendation of IEC-60815.

1.1.4 The size of long rod insulator, minimum creepage distance, the number to be used in
different type of strings, their electromechanical strength and mechanical strength of
insulator string alongwith hardware fittings shall be as follows:


1.2 PARTICULARS OF SILICONE POLYMER INSULATOR STRINGS FOR ACSR
PANTHER :-

Sr
No
TYPE of
String
Size of
Composite
Insulator
(mm)
Min.
Creepage
Distance
(mm)
No. of
Individual
units per
string
(Nos.)
EM
strength
of
Insulator
Unit (KN)
Mechanical
strength of
Insulator
string
alongwith
Hardware
fittings
(kN)
1 Single
Suspension

20X1305 4495 1X1 70 70
2 Single pilot
Suspension

20X1305 4495 1X1 70 70
4 Single
Tension

20X1450 4495 1X1 90 90
5 Double
Tension

20X1450 4495 2X1 2X90 2X90

Page-1

1.3 PARTICULARS OF SILICONE POLYMER INSULATOR STRINGS FOR ACSR
ZEBRA :-
Sr
No
TYPE of
String
Size of
Composite
Insulator
(mm)
Min.
Creepage
Distance
(mm)
No. of
Individual
units per
string
(Nos.)
EM
strength
of
Insulator
Unit (KN)
Mechanical
strength of
Insulator
string
alongwith
Hardware
fittings
(kN)
1 Single
Suspension

20X1305 4495 1X1 70 70
2 Single pilot
Suspension

20X1305 4495 1X1 70 70
4 Single
Tension

20X1450 4495 1X1 120 120
5 Double
Tension

20X1450 4495 2X1 2X120 2X120
Note: *The core dia of composite insulators mentioned at column No.3 is
minimum requirement. The bidder shall offer composite long rod insulators of
suitable core dia to meet specified E&M strength requirements. For offered core
dia, the bidder shall submit documentary evidence of past supplies & satisfactory
operation of the same for minimum period of three years. However, the overall
string length shall be within the limits specified in the drawing.

1.4 Pin and Cap

1.4.1 Pin and cap shall be designed to transmit the mechanical stress and develop uniform
mechanical strength in the insulator. The cap shall be circular with the inner and outer
surfaces concentric of such design that it will not yield or distort under load conditions.

1.4.2 The design shall be such as to permit easy removal of replacement of either insulator
units or fittings under the live line conditions.

1.5 Ball and Socket Designation

The dimensions of the Ball and Socket shall be of 16mm (Alt-B) for 70kN /90kN and
20 mm for 120 kN Insulators in accordance with the standard dimensions stated in
IEC:120/ IS:2486 (Part-II).

1.6 Dimensional Tolerance of Composite Insulators
The tolerances on all dimensions e.g. diameter, length and creepage distance shall be
allowed as follows:
(0.04d+1.5) mm when d300 mm.
(0.025d+6) mm when d>300 mm.

Where, d being the dimensions in millimeters for diameter, length or creepage
distance as the case may be.However, no negative tolerance shall be applicable to
creepage distance.
Page-2
1.7 Interchangeability

The composite long rod insulators inclusive of the ball & socket connection shall be
standard design suitable for use with the hardware fittings of any make conforming to
relevant IEC standards.

1.8 Corona and R1 Performance

All surfaces shall be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or projections. No part
shall be subjected to excessive localized pressure. The insulator and metal parts
shall be so designed and manufactured that it shall avoid local corona formation and
shall not generate any radio interference beyond specified limit under the operating
conditions.

1.9 Maintenance

1.9.1 The long rod insulators offered shall be suitable for employment of hot line
maintenance technique so that usual hot line operation can be carried out with ease,
speed and safety.

1.9.2 All insulators shall be designed to facilitate cleaning and insulators shall have the
minimum practical number of sheds and grooves. All grooves shall be so
proportioned that any dust deposit can be removed without difficulty either by wiping
with a cloth or by remote washing under live line condition.

1.10 Materials

1.10.1 Core

It shall be a glass-fiber reinforced (FRP rod) epoxy resin rod of high strength. Glass
fibers and resin shall be optimized. The rod shall be electrical grade corrosion
resistant (ECR), boron free glass and shall exhibit both high electrical integrity and
high resistance to acid corrosion.

1.10.2 Housing & Weathersheds

The FRP rod shall be covered by a seamless sheath of a silicone rubber compound of
a thickness of minimum 3mm. The housing & weathersheds should have silicon
content of minimum 30% by weight. It should protect the FRP rod against
environmental influences, external pollution and humidity. It shall be extruded or
directly molded on the core. The interface between the housing and the core must be
uniform and without voids. The strength of the bond shall be greater than the tearing
strength of the polymer. The manufacturer shall follow non-destructive technique
(N.D.T.) to check the quality of jointing of the housing interface with the core. The
technique being followed with detailed procedure and sampling shall be furnished
along with the bid. The details for this shall be finalized during detailed engineering
and finalization of MQP.



Page-3
The weathersheds of the insulators shall be of alternate shed profile. The
weathersheds shall be vulcanized to the sheath (extrusion process) or molded as part
of the sheath (injection moulding process) and free from imperfections. The
vulcanization for extrusion process shall be at high temperature and for injection
moulding shall be at high temperature & high pressure. Any seams / burrs protruding
axially along the insulator, resulting from the injection moulding process shall be
removed completely without causing any damage to the housing. The track resistance
of housing and shed material shall be class 1A4.5 according to IEC60587. The
strength of the weathershed to sheath interface shall be greater than the tearing
strength of the polymer. The composite insulator shall be capable of high pressure
washing.

1.10.3 End Fittings

End fittings transmit the mechanical load to the core. They shall be made of malleable
cast iron spheroidal graphite or forged steel. They shall be connected to the rod by
means of a controlled compression technique. The manufacturer shall have in-
process Acoustic emission arrangement or some other arrangement to ensure that
there is no damage to the core during crimping. This verification shall be in-process
and done on each insulator. The gap between fitting and sheath shall be sealed by a
flexible silicone rubber compound. The system of attachment of end fitting to the rod
shall provide superior sealing performance between housing and metal connection.
The sealing must be humidity proof and durable with time.

1.10.4 Grading Rings

Grading rings shall be used at both ends of each composite insulator unit for reducing
the voltage gradient on and within the insulator and to reduce radio and TV noise to
acceptable levels. The size and placement of the metallic grading rings shall be
designed to eliminate dry band arcing/corona cutting/ exceeding of permissible
electrical stress of material. The bidder shall furnish calculations along with the
proposed placement and design of corona ring in support of the above. Grading rings
shall be capable of installation and removal with hot line tools without disassembling
any other part of the insulator assembly.

The supply of grading rings shall be in the scope of the composite insulator supplier.

1.10.5 Workmanship

1.10.5.1 All the materials shall be of latest design and conform to the best modern practices
adopted in the extra high voltage field. Bidders shall offer only such insulators as
are guaranteed by him to be satisfactory and suitable for transmission lines
specified and will give continued good service.
1.10.5.2 The design, manufacturing process and material control at various stages shall be
such as to give maximum working load, highest mobility, best resistance to
corrosion, good finish and elimination of sharp edges and corners to limit corona
and radio interference.
1.10.5.3 The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and
contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration.
1.10.5.4 The core shall be sound and free of cracks and voids that may adversely affect the
insulators.
Page-4



1.10.5.5 Weathersheds shall be uniform in quality. They shall be clean, sound, smooth and
free from gross defects and excessive flashing at parting lines.

1.10.5.6 End fittings shall be free from cracks, seams, shrinks, air holes and rough edges.
End fittings should be effectively, sealed to prevent moisture ingress, effectiveness
of sealing system must be supported by test documents. All surfaces of the metal
parts shall be perfectly smooth with the projecting points or irregularities which
may cause corona. All load bearing surfaces shall be smooth and uniform so as to
distribute the loading stresses uniformly.

1.10.5.7 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized to give a minimum average coating of
zinc equivalent to 600 gm/sq.m. and shall be in accordance with the requirement of
ISO:1461 (E) and shall satisfy the tests mentioned in ISO:1460 (E). The zinc used
for galvanizing shall be of purity of 99.95%. The zinc coating shall be uniform,
adherent, smooth, reasonably bright continuous and free from imperfections such
as flux, ash rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The galvanized metal
parts shall be guaranteed to withstand at least six successive dips each lasting for
one (1) minute duration under the standard preece test. The galvanizing shall be
carried out only after any machining.

2.0 Equipment Marking
2.1 Each composite long rod unit shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the trade mark
of the manufacturer, name of HVPNL and month & year of manufacture. The
guaranteed combined mechanical and electrical strength shall be indicated in kilo
Newton followed by the word kN to facilitate easy identification and to ensure proper
use.
2.2 One 10 mm thick ring or 20 mm thick spot of suitable quality of paint shall be marked
on the cap/end fitting of each composite long rod of particular strength for easy
identification of the type of insulator. The paint shall not have any deteriorating effect
on the insulator performance. Following codes shall be used as identification mark :
For 70 KN disc : red
For 90KN disc : Black
For 120KN disc : yellow

3.0 Bid Drawings
3.1 The Bidder shall furnish full description and illustration of the material offered.
3.2 The Bidder shall furnish along with the bid the outline drawing (6 copies) of each
insulator unit including a cross sectional view of the long rod insulator unit. The
drawing shall include but not limited to the following information :
(a) Long rod diameter and ball to ball spacing with manufacturing tolerances
(b) Minimum Creepage distance with positive tolerance
(c) Protected creepage distance
(d) Eccentricity of the long rod unit
(i) Axial run out
(ii) Radial run out

Page-5
(e) Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics
(f) Size and weight of ball and socket parts
(g) Weight of composite long rod units
(h) Materials
(i) Identification mark
(ii) Manufacturer's catalogue number
3.3 After placement of award, the Supplier shall submit full dimensioned insulator
drawings containing all the details as given in Clause No. 3.2 above, in four (4) copies
to Employer for approval.
3.4 After placement of award the Supplier shall also submit fully dimensioned insulator
crate drawing for different type of insulators.
3.5 After placement of award, the Supplier shall submit full dimensioned manufacturing
drawing of composite long rod insulator unit in six (6) copies to the Employer for
reference and record.
4.0 Tests and Standards
4.1 Type Tests
The equipment should be offered fully type tested for all the type tests as detailed
below . Test reports should not be more than seven years old reckoned from the date
of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories ( based
on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPNL or another electric
power utility and be submitted by the successful Bidder to HVPNL for approval as per
schedule given in Bar chart :-
4.1.1 On the complete composite Long Rod Insulator String with Hardware Fittings

(a) Power frequency voltage withstand test with
corona control rings/grading ring and arcing horns
under wet condition
IEC:383-1993/
Annexure A
(b) Switching surge voltage withstand test under wet
condition
IEC:383-1993

(c) Impulse voltage withstand test under dry condition IEC:383-1993

(d) Corona and RIV test under dry condition Annexure-A
(e) Mechanical Strength test Annexure-A
(f) Vibration test Annexure-A
(g) Salt-fog pollution withstand test Annexure-A

4.1.2 On Composite Insulator Units
(a) Tests on interfaces and connections of metal fittings (Tests
to be performed on the same samples in the sequence given
below)
Dry power frequency voltage test
Sudden load release test
Thermal mechanical test
Water immersion test
Steep front impulse voltage test
Dry power frequency voltage test
IEC: 61109

Page-6

(b) Assembled core load time test
i) Determination of the average failing load of the
core of the assembled unit
ii) Control of the slope of the strength time curve of
the insulator
IEC: 61109

(c) Brittle fracture resistance test Annexure-A
(d) Test of housing, Tracking and erosion test IEC: 61109
(e) Tests for the core material
i) Dye penetration test
ii) Water diffusion test
IEC:61109

(f) Flammability test IEC:61109
(g) Recovery of Hydrophobicity test Annexure-A
(h) Mechanical Load Time test and test of tightness between
end firings and insulator housing
IEC:61109

(i) Silicone content test Annexure-A
(j) High Pressure washing test Annexure-A

4.1.4 All the type test given in Clause No. 4.1.1 shall be conducted on Single I suspension,
Single Tension, Double tension insulator string along with hardware fittings. All the
type tests given in Clause No. 4.1.1 (a) to (e) shall also be conducted on Single 'I' Pilot
suspension insulator string along with hardware fittings.
4.2 Acceptance Tests:
4.2.1 For Composite Long Rod Insulators

(a) Verification of dimensions ) IEC : 61109

(b) Galvanising test ) IEC : 60383

(c) Verification of locking system ) IEC : 60383

(d) Verification of tightness ) IEC : 61109
of interface between end fittings and )
insulator housing and of specified )
mechanical load )

(d) Recovery of Hydrophobicity ) Annexure-A

Tests on interfaces and connections of ) IEC: 61109
metal fittings (Tests to be performed on )
the same samples in the sequence given below)

i) Dry power frequency voltage test
ii) Sudden load release test
iii) Thermal mechanical test
iv) Water immersion test
v) Steep front impulse voltage test
vi) Dry power frequency voltage test


Page-7

(f) Silicone content test Annexure-A

The test 4.2.1.(e) shall be carried out in case total quantity of insulators of a
particular rating exceeds 5000 nos.
The test 4.2.1.(f) shall be done against each lot or against every 5000 nos. of
insulators whichever is less.
In the event of failure of the sample to satisfy the acceptance test(s) specified
in 4.2 above, the retest procedure shall be as per clause 7.6 of IEC 61109.
4.3 Routine Tests
4.3.1 For Composite Long Rod Insulator Units
a) Visual Inspection As per IEC:61109

b) Mechanical routine test As per IEC:61109

4.4 Tests During Manufacture
On all components as applicable
a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising As per Annexure-
A

b) Chemical analysis, mechanical, metallographic
test and magnetic particle inspection for
malleable castings.
As per Annexure-
A

c) Chemical analysis hardness tests and magnetic
particle inspection for forgings
As per Annexure-
A

d) Tracking and erosion test on insulating material IEC 60587

4.5 Testing Expenses
4.5.1 The entire cost of testing for acceptance and routine tests and tests during
manufacture specified herein shall be treated included in the quoted Ex-works
price except for the expenses of the inspector/HVPNL representative.

4.6 Schedule of testing and additional tests
4.6.1 The bidder has to indicate the schedule of following activities in their bids:

a. Submission of drawing for approval.

b. Submission of Quality Assurance programme for approval.

4.6.2 The HVPNL representative reserves the right of having at his own expense any
other test (s) of reasonable nature carried out at manufacturers premises, at
site, or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and
routine tests to satisfy himself that the material comply with the specifications.


Page-8

4.6.3 The HVPNL representative also reserves the right to conduct all the tests
mentioned in this specification at his own expense on the samples drawn from
the site at manufacturers premises or at any other test center. In case of
evidence of non compliance, it shall be binding on the part of the manufacture to
prove the compliance of the items to the technical specifications by repeat tests
or correction of deficiencies, or replacement of defective items, all without any
extra cost to the HVPNL representative .

4.7 Co- ordination for testing

The Bidder/insulator manufacturer shall have to co-ordinate testing of insulators
with hardware fittings to be supplied by other manufacturer and shall have to also
guarantee overall satisfactory performance of the insulators with the hardware
fittings.

4.8 Test Reports
4.8.1 Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6) copies along with
one original. One copy shall be returned duly certified by the Employer only after
which the commercial production of the concerned material shall start.
4.8.2 Copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6) copies. One
copy shall be returned duly certified by the Employer, only after which the material
shall be dispatched

4.8.3 Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the manufacturer at his works for
periodic inspection by the HVPNL representative.

4.8.4 Test certificates of test during manufacture shall be maintained by the manufacturer.
These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the HVPNL
representative.

4.9 Inspection

4.9.1 The HVPNL representative shall at all times be entitled to have access to the works
and all places of manufacture, where insulators, and its component parts shall be
manufactured and the representatives shall have full facilities for unrestricted
inspection of the manufacturers and sub-manufacturers works, raw materials,
manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary test as detailed herein.

4.9.2 The material for final inspection shall be offered by the manufacturer only under
packed condition. The HVPNL representative shall select samples at random from
the packed lot for carrying out acceptance tests.

4.9.3 The manufacturer shall keep HVPNL informed in advance of the time of starting and
the progress of manufacture of material in their various stages so that arrangements
could be made inspection.

4.9.4 No material shall be despatched from its point of manufacture before it has been
satisfactorily inspected and tested unless the inspection is waived off by the HVPNL
representative in writing. In the latter case also the material shall be despatched
only after satisfactory testing for all tests specified herein have been completed.


Page-9

4.9.5 The acceptance of any quantity of material shall be in no way relieve the
manufacturer of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection, if such material are later
found to be defective.

4.10 Packing and Marking

4.10.1 All insulators shall be packed in suitable PVC/ plastic tubes/any other suitable packing
along with temporary wrap-on shields/shrouds for each insulator unit. The packing
shall provide protection against rodent. The shields/shrouds shall be for protection
during transport and for preventing bird pecking during erection. Further, the
shields/shrouds shall be made of opaque, weather proof material of adequate strength
and shall be colour coded. The shields/shrouds shall have smaller diameter than the
insulator to stay in place against winds & weather and shall be designed so as to
leave only the end fittings exposed for attachment of insulator to tower and line
hardware until line construction is complete. The shield/shroud shall have suitable pull
off loop for easy detachment just prior to charging of the line without causing any
damage to the insulator. The contractor shall furnish detailed design of the packing
and shield/shroud along with attachment and detachment procedure in this regard.
For marine transportation, crates shall be palleted.
4.10.2 The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during transit,
storage at site and subsequent handling in the field.
4.10.3 Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacers shall be provided to
prevent damage or deformation during transit and handling.
4.10.4 The Supplier shall guarantee the adequacy of the packing and shall be responsible for
any loss or damage during transportation, handling, storage and installation due to
improper packing.
4.10.5 All packing cases shall be marked legibly and correctly so as to ensure safe arrival at
their destination and to avoid the possibility of goods being lost or wrongly dispatched
on account of faulty packing and faulty or illegible markings. Each case/crate shall
have all the markings stenciled on it in indelible ink.

4.11 Standards
The insulator strings and its components shall conform to the following Indian/
International Standards which shall mean latest revision, with amendments/
changes adopted and published, unless specifically stated otherwise in the
Specification.
4.11.1 In the event of supply of insulators conforming to standards other than specified, the
Supplier shall confirm in his bid that these standards are equivalent or better to those
specified. In case of award, salient features of comparison between the standards
proposed by the Supplier and those specified in this document will be provided by the
Supplier to establish equivalence.

Sl. No. Indian
Standard
Title International
Standard
1. IS:209-
1992
Specification for zinc BS:3436
Page-10

2. IS:406-
1991
Method of Chemical Analysis of Slab
Zinc
BS:3436
3. IS:731-
1991
Porcelain insulators for overhead
Power lines with a nominal voltage
greater than 1000 V
BS:137-
(I&II)
IEC:60383
4. IS:2071
Part (I)
1993
(Part(II)-
1991
Part(III)-
1991
Methods of High Voltage Testing IEC:60060-1


5. IS:2486
Part- I-
1993
Part- II-
1989
Part-III-
1991
Specification for Insulator fittings for
Overhead Power Lines with a
nominal voltage greater than 1000V
General Requirements and Tests
Dimensional Requirements
Locking Devices



BS:3288
IEC:60120
IEC:60372
6. IS:2629-
1990
Recommended Practice for Hot, Dip
Galvanisation for iron and steel
ISO-1461
(E)
7. IS:2633-
1992
Testing of Uniformity of Coating of
zinc coated articles

8. IS:3188-
1988
Dimensions for Disc Insulators IEC:60305
9. IS:6745-
1990
Determination of Weight of Zinc
Coating on Zinc coated iron and
steel articles
BS:433-1969
ISO:1460-
1973
10. IS:8263-
1990
Methods of RI Test of HV insulators IEC:60437
NEMA Publi-
cation
No.07/ 1964/
CISPR
11. IS:8269-
1990
Methods for Switching Impulse test
on HV insulators
IEC:60506
12. Thermal Mechanical Performance
test and mechanical performance
test on string insulator units
IEC: 60575
13. Salt Fog Pollution Voltage Withstand
Test
IEC:60507
14. Composite insulators for A.C.
Overhead lines with nominal voltage
greater than 1000V Definitions,
test methods and acceptance criteria
IEC 61109
15. Guide for the selection of insulators
in respect of polluted conditions
IEC:60815

16. Tests on insulators of Ceramic
material or glass or glass for
overhead lines with a nominal
voltage greater than 1000V
IEC:60383

17. Characteristics of string insulator
units of the long rod type
IEC : 60433
Page-11

The standards mentioned above are available from:
Reference Abbreviation

Name and Address
BS British Standards,
British Standards Institution
101, Pentonvile Road,
N - 19-ND, UK
IEC/CISPR International Electro technical
Commission,
Bureau Central de la Commission,
electro Technique international,
1 Rue de verembe,
Geneva, SWITZERLAND
BIS/IS Beureau Of Indian Standards.
Manak Bhavan,
9, Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg,
New Delhi - 110001. INDIA
ISO International Organisation for
Standardization.
Danish Board of Standardization
Danish Standardizing Sraat,
Aurehoegvej-12
DK-2900, Heeleprup, DENMARK
NEMA National Electric Manufacture
Association,
155, East 44th Street.
New York, NY 10017 U.S.A.
ASTM American Society for Testing and
Materials,
1916 Race St. Philadelphia, PA19103
USA












Page-12
ANNEXURE-A
1.0 Tests on Complete Strings with Hardware Fittings
1.1 Voltage distribution test

The voltage across each insulator unit shall be measured by sphere gap
method. The result obtained shall be converted into percentage. The voltage
across any disc shall not exceed 20% for suspension insulator string and 22%
for tension insulator string.

1.2 Mechanical Strength Test

The complete insulator string along with its hardware fitting excluding arcing
horn, corona control ring, grading ring and suspension assembly/dead end
assembly shall be subjected to a load equal to 50% of the specified minimum
ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a steady rate to 67%
of the minimum UTS specified. The load shall be held for five minutes and then
removed. After removal of the load, the string components shall not show any
visual deformation and it shall be possible to disassemble them by hand. Hand
tools may be used to, remove cotter pins and loosen the nuts initially. The string
shall then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be
further increased at a steady rate till the specified minimum UTS and held for
one minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The applied load shall
then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.

1.3 Vibration Test

The suspension string shall be tested in suspension mode, and tension string in
tension mode itself in laboratory span of minimum 30 metres. In the case of
suspension string a load equal to 600 Kg shall be applied along the axis of the
suspension string by means of turn buckle. The insulator string along with
hardware fittings and conductor tensioned at 2500 Kgf shall be secured with
clamps. The system shall be suitable to maintain constant tension on the
conductor throughout the duration of the test. Vibration dampers shall not be
used on the test span. The conductor shall be vertically vibrated at one of the
resonance frequencies of the insulators string (more than 10 Hz) by means of
vibration inducing equipment. The peak to peak, displacement in mm of
vibration at the antinode point nearest to the string shall be measured and the
same shall not be less than 1000 /f1.8 where is the frequency of vibration in
cycles/sec. The insulator string shall be vibrated for not less than 10 million
cycles without any failure. After the test the disc insulators shall be examined
for looseness of pins and cap or any crack in the cement. The hardware shall
be examined for looseness, fatigue failure and mechanical strength test. There
shall be no deterioration of properties of hardware components and insulators
after the vibration test. The insulators shall be subjected to the Mechanical
performance test followed by mechanical strength test as per relevant
standards.

1.4 Salt-fog pollution withstand test
This test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC : 60507. The salinity
level for composite long rod insulators shall be 160 Kg/m3 NACL.


Page-13

2.0 Composite Longrod Insulator Units

2.1 Brittle Fracture Resistance Test

Assembled core load time test with container that contains1n-HNO3 concentric
acid that is applied at the naked rod. The rod should be held at 80% of SML for
the duration of the test.

The rod should not fail within the 96 hour test duration

2.2 Recovery of Hydrophobicity Test

(1) The surface of selected samples shall be cleaned with isopropyl alcohol. Allow
the surface to dry and spray with water. Record the HC classification. Dry the
sample surface.

(2) Treat the surface with corona discharges to destroy the hydrophobicity. This
can be done utilizing a high frequency corona tester, Holding the electrode
approximately 3mm from the sample surface, slowly move the electrode over
an area approximately 1 x 1. Continue treating this area for 2 3 minutes,
operating the tester at maximum output.

(3) Immediately after the corona treatment, spray the surface with water and
record the HC classification. The surface should be hydrophilic, with an HC
value of 6 or 7. If not, dry the surface and repeat the corona treatment for a
longer time until an HC of 6 or 7 is obtained. Dry the sample surface.

(4) Allow the sample to recover and repeat the hydrophobicity measurement at
several time intervals. Silicone rubber should recover to HC 1 HC 2 within 24
to 48 hours, depending on the material and the intensity of the corona
treatment.


2.3 Silicone content test

Minimum content of silicone as guaranteed by supplier shall be verified through
FT-IR spectroscopy & TGA analysis or any other suitable method mutually
agreed between Employer & Supplier in Quality Assurance Programme .

2.4 High Pressure washing test

The test is to be carried out at 3800 kPa with nozzles of 6 mm diameter at a
distance of 3m from nozzles to the insulator, followed by a dry power frequency
voltage test as per IEC 61109.

Page-14


3. Tests on All components (As applicable)

3.1 Chemical Analysis of Zinc used for Galvanizing

Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analysed as
per IS:209-1979. The purity of zinc shall not be less than 99.95%.

3.2 Tests for Forgings

The chemical analysis hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for
forgings, will be as per the internationally recognised procedures for these tests.
The sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The
details regarding test will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the
Supplier and Employer in Quality Assurance Programme.

3.3 Tests on Castings

The chemical analysis, mechanical and metallographic tests and magnetic,
particle inspection for castings will be as per the internationally recognised
procedures for these tests. The samplings will be based on heat number and
heat treatment batch. The details regarding test will be as discussed and
mutually agreed to by the Supplier and Employer in Quality Assurance
Programme.



























Page-15



SECTION- VI, PART-II, CHAPTER-III (D)


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF

BUS POST INSULATORS

CONTENTS


S. No Clause Page No.

1. Technical Description of Bus Post Insulators 1

2. Tests and Standards 3
SECTION- VI, PART-II, CHAPTER-III (D)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 145 kV BUS POST INSULATORS

1. SCOPE

This specification covers design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection
and testing before despatch packing, forwarding and delivery at site of 145 kV
outdoor type bus Post Insulators and its clamps at the Gantries.

It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of the
insulator. However, the insulator shall conform in all respects to the high standard of
engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in
continuous commercial operation up to the Bidders guarantee in a manner acceptable
to the HVPNL. The equipment offered shall be complete in all components necessary
for its effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be
within the scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in
this specification or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall be
interchangeable.

2. STANDARD
The Post Insulators and their Hardwares shall comply as regards general
requirements, test voltages and test with the latest edition of IS 2544/1973 IS-5350 (P-
II) 1973 IS-5350 (P-III) 1971/IEC-168/1979 except in so far as the same may be
modified by this Specification.

3. TYPE AND RATING
The 145 kV Bus Post Insulators are required for outdoor-system conforming to IS
2544/1973 or latest version thereof suitable for heavily polluted atmosphere. The Post
Insulators shall be specifically suitable to meet the particular requirements of ultimate
torsional strength and cantilever loads etc. which they will be called upon to resist
during service at the rated voltage.

The principal rating of bus Post Insulators shall be as under: -

Sr.
No.
Particulars Unit
i. Nominal system
voltage
kV 132
ii. Highest system
voltage
kV 145
iii. Rated frequency 50+/-2.5H
iv. Minimum creepage
distance
mm 3625
v. One minute power
frequencywithstand
voltage
kV(rms) 275
vi. Impulsewithstand
voltage
(+ve & -ve)
kV(peak) 550
vii. Minimum visual
discharge voltage
level (extinction)
kV(rms) -

Page-1



viii. Radio interference
voltage (Micro volt at
1 MHz) at a system
voltage of 156 kV.
Micro Volt >500
ix. Cantilever strength
(Upright)
Kg. 400
x. Torsion strength nm 3000
xi. Bending strength N 4000
xii. Tensile strength N 50000
xiii. Compressive strength N 100000
xiv. Applicable standard
xv. Pitch Circle Dia:
a. Top mm 127
b. Bottom mm 178
xvi. Height of insulator mm 1220+1
xvii. No. of Insulator per
stack
No. 1
4. CLIMATIC CONDITION

As per 1.6 of Section-VI, Part-1.

5. GENERAL REQUIREMENT

145 kV Bus Post Insulator shall be either solid core or polycon type insulators
complete with all fittings and accessories required for holding single ACSR Panther
/ACSR Zebra as the case of line may be . The bus Post Insulator pedestal shall be
suitable for fixing on the Gantries.

The bus Post Insulator shall be provided with a completely galvanised steel base
designed for mounting on the Gantries. The base and mounting arrangement shall be
such that the insulator shall be rigid and self supporting and no guying or cross
bracings between phases shall be necessary.

Cap to be provided on top of the insulator shall be of high grade cast iron or malleable
steel casting. It shall be machine faced and hot dip galvanised. The cap shall have
four nos. of tapped holes spaced on a pitch circle diameter to accommodate the
terminal clamp . The holes shall be suitable for bolts with threads having anticorrosive
protection. The effective depth of threads shall not be less than the nominal diameter
of the bolt.

The Post Insulator clamps are to be fitted on the top of the bus Post Insulator
for holding single conductor ACSR Panther/ACSR Zebra tightly and rigidly. The
clamps shall be made of Aluminium alloy and shall comply with relevant ISS. The
clamps shall be supplied with galvanised steel studs of the suitable size and
maintain the requisite pressure to ensure good and tight joint of low resistance.

The insulators shall be entirely free from sharp edges, ridges or points and shall not
exhibit appreciable corona formation during service.

Castings shall be free from blow holes, flaws, cracks and other defects and shall be
smooth, close grained and of true forms and dimensions.

Page-2


The porcelain shall be white, finished brown glazed, non-porous of high di-electric,
mechanical and thermal strength, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified. Cement
used shall be of high quality, durable and high strength Portland cement. Cement is
not to be treated as an adhesive medium between the porcelain and metal parts of an
insulator. Preference will be given to a fixing medium of an approved metal alloy.
Cement shall be a replenishment material for filling gap between the porcelain and
metal parts to fix them.

6. GALVANISING

All the ferrous metal parts shall be hot dip galvanised smoothly, as per IS 3638 (as
amended up to date). IS 2633 or any other equivalent authoritative standard. The
material shall be galvanised only after shop operations upon it have been completed.
The metal parts before galvanising should be thoroughly cleaned of any paint, grease,
rust, scales or alkalis, or any foreign deposit which are likely to come in the way of
galvanising process. The metal parts coating shall withstand minimum four for one
minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per IEC-168.

The bus Post Insulator unit shall be assembled in a suitable jig to ensure correct
positioning of the top and bottom metal fittings relative to one another. The faces of
the metal fittings shall be parallel and at right angles to the axis of the insulator and
the corresponding holes in the top and the bottom metal fittings shall be in a vertical
plane containing the axis of the insulator.

All nuts, bolts and spring washers etc. required for the assembly of the complete
insulator stack shall be in scope of supply. The bolts and nuts shall be hot dip
galvanised and shall be of high strength generally conforming to IS-136 or any other
equivalent international standard.

7. TESTS

7.1 Type Tests

The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not be more than
seven years old reckoned from the date of bid opening in respect of all the tests
carried out in accredited laboratories ( based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic
body or witnessed by HVPNL or another electric power utility and be submitted by
the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as per schedule given in Bar chart.

1. Visual examination
2. Verification of dimensions
3. Visible discharge test
4. Impulse voltage withstand test
5. Dry power frequency voltage withstand test.
6. Wet power frequency voltage withstand test.
7. Temperature cycle test
8. Test for mechanial strength
9. Puncture test
10. Porosity test
11. Galvanising test Page-3


7.2 Acceptance and Routine Tests

7.2.1 All the acceptance and routine tests as detailed below shall be carried out by the
supplier in the presence of HVPNL representative. No material shall be dispatched
without the approval of test certificates:-

1. Verification of dimensions
2. Temperature cycle test
3. Test for mechanial strength
4 Puncture test
5. Porosity test
6. Galvanising test

8. INSPECTION

The inspection may be carried by the HVPNL at any stage of manufacture. The
successful Bidder shall grant free access to the HVPNLrepresentative at a reasonable
time when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under
this Specification by the HVPNL shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of
furnishing equipment in accordance with the Specification and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if the equipment is found to be defective.

The Bidder shall keep the HVPNL informed in advance about the manufacturing
programme so that arrangement can be made for inspection.

The HVPNL reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of
the bought out items.

9. GUARANTEED DATA

Guaranteed technical particulars and other technical data in respect of
equipment/material offered should be furnished duly signed in the performa given in
GTPs. Any other particulars considered necessary may also be given in addition to
those listed in the schedule.


10. DRAWING AND LITERATURE

The successful bidder shall submit 4 sets of following fully dimentional drawings
complete in all respect for approval to HVPNL as per time schedule given in Bar
Chart.

11. MARKING

Each porcelain insulator unit shall legibly and indelibly be marked to show the
following:
a) Name or Trade Mark of the manufacture.
b) Month and year of manufacture.
c) Country of manufacture.
Marking on the porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing.


Page-4



12. PACKING AND FORWARDING

12.1 The equipments shall be packed in crates suitable to withstand handling during
transport and outdoor storage during transit. The supplier shall be responsible for any
damage to the equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing. The
easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate
caution symbols. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting
hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall
be supplied by supplier without any extra cost.

12.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the
following information: -

a) Name of the consignee.
b) Details of the consignment.
c) Destination.
d) Total weight of consignment.
e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
f) Handling and unpacking instructions.
g) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.


























Page-5

SECTION-VI

CHAPTER-III-E

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION



CONTENTS


S. No Clause Page No.

1. Hardware Fittings for lines with ACSR Panther 1

2. Accessories for lines with ACSR Panther 11

3. Hardware Fittings for lines with ACSR Zebra 17

4 Accessories for lines with ACSR Zebra 27

5. Earthwire Accessories for lines with ACSR Zebra / 33
ACSR Panther.

6. Tests and Standards 37

7. Type Tests 38

8 Annexure-A 48

9 Annexure-B 56

SECTION-VI

(CHAPTER-III E)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Technical Description of Hardware Fittings
1.1 DETAILS OF HARDWARE FITTINGS FOR LINES WITH ACSR PANTHER
CONDUCTOR

1.1.1 The hardware fittings shall be as per the specification drawings enclosed with this part
of the specification. Each hardware fitting shall be supplied complete in all respects
and shall include the following hardware parts.

1.1.2 Single suspension, Single Tension, Single suspension (Pilot), Double Suspension and
Double Tension hardware fittings, shall be supplied suitable for attaching to
hanger/strain plate fixed to tower. The dimension of hanger/strain plate and hole etc.
will be intimated to the successful bidder.

1.1.3 Suitable arcing horn/intermediate arcing horns as specified in clause 1.8 hereinafter.

1.1.4 Suitable yoke plates complying with the specifications given hereunder.

1.1.5 Suspension and dead end assembly to suit conductor size as detailed in clause 1.10
and 1.11 hereinafter.

1.1.6 Other necessary fittings as eye links, ball clevis, socket clevis, clevis eye, U-clevis and
chain link etc. to make the hardware fittings complete.

1.1.7 2.5% extra fasteners and Aluminum filler plugs.

1.2 Dimensions of Insulator String Alongwith Hardware Fitting

The various limiting dimensions of the various Suspension, pilot and tension insulator
strings alongwith hardware fittings shall be as per the specification drawings enclosed
with this part of the specification.

1.3 Interchangeability

1.3.1 The hardware for insulator strings with disc insulators together with ball and socket
fittings shall be of standard design, so that these hardware are interchangeable with
each other and suitable for use with disc insulators of any make conforming to
relevant Indian/International Standard.

1.4 Corona and RI Performance

Sharp edges and scratches on all the hardware fittings shall be avoided. All surfaces
must be clean, smooth, without cuts and abrasions or projections. The Bidder must
give suitable assurance about the satisfactory corona and radio interference
performance of the materials offered by him

1.5 Maintenance

1.5.1 The hardware fittings offered shall be suitable for employment of hot line maintenance
techniques so that usual hot line operations cab be carried out with ease, speed and
safety. The technique adopted for hot line maintenance shall be generally bare hand
method & hot stick method. The Bidder should clearly establish in the bid, the
suitability of his fittings for hot line maintenance.
Page-1

1.6 Designation

1.6.1 Ball and Socket Designation

The dimensions of the ball and socket shall be of 16mm designation for 70 KN
and 90kN Insulators. The designation should be in accordance with the
standard dimensions stated in IS 2486 (Part-II)/ IEC: 120. The dimensions shall
be checked by the appropriate gauge after galvanising only.

1.7 Security Clips and Split Pins

1.7.1 Security clips for use with ball and socket coupling shall be R-shaped, hump
type which provides positive locking of the coupling as per IS:2486 (Part-III)
/IEC : 372. The legs of the security clips shall be spread after assembly in the
works to prevent complete withdrawal from the socket. The locking device
should be resilient, corrosion resistant and of suitable mechanical strength.
There shall be no risk of the locking device being displaced accidentally or
being rotated when in position. Under no circumstances shall the locking
devices allow separation of fittings.

1.7.2 The hole for the security clips shall be countersunk and the clip should be of
such design that the eye of clips may be engaged by a hot line clip puller to
provide for disengagement under energised conditions. The force required to
pull the security clip into its unlocked position shall not be less than 50 N (5 kg)
or more than 500 N (50 kg).

1.7.3 Split pins shall be used with bolts & nuts.

1.8 Arcing Horn/Intermediate Arcing Horn

1.8.1 The arcing horn shall be either ball ended rod type or tubular type.

1.8.2 For insulators strings with disc insulators, the arcing horn shall be provided as
shown on the drawings of the hardware fittings in this specification.

1.8.3 The spark gap shall be so adjusted to ensure effective operation under actual
field conditions.

1.9 Yoke Plates

The strength of yoke plates shall be adequate to withstand the minimum
ultimate tensile strength, as specified in the bid drawings.

The plates shall be either triangular or rectangular in shape as may be
necessary. The design of yoke plate shall take into account the most
unfavourable loading conditions likely to be experienced as a result of
dimensional tolerances for disc insulators as well as components of hardware
fittings within the specified range. The plates shall have suitable holes for fixing
arcing horn. All the corners and edges should be rounded off with a radius of at
least 3 mm. Design calculations i.e. for bearing & tensile strength, for deciding
the dimensions of yoke plate shall be furnished by the bidder. The holes
provided for bolts in the yoke plate should satisfy shear edge condition as per
Clause No. 8.10 of IS: 800-1984.
Page-2

1.10 Suspension Assembly

1.10.1 The suspension assembly shall be suitable for ACSR Panther Conductor.

1.10.2 The suspension assembly shall include either free centre type suspension
clamp alongwith standard preformed armour rods or armour grip suspension
clamp except for pilot insulator string for which only suitable envelope type
suspension clamps shall be used.

1.10.3 The suspension clamp alongwith standard preformed armour rods set shall be
designed to have maximum mobility in any direction and minimum moment of
inertia so as to have minimum stress on the conductor in the case of oscillation
of the same.

1.10.4 The suspension clamp alongwith standard preformed armour rods/armour grip
suspension clamp set shall have a slip strength between 11 to 16 KN for ACSR
Panther.

1.10.5 The suspension assembly shall be designed, manufactured and finished to give
it a suitable shape, so as to avoid any possibility of hammering between
suspension assembly and conductor due to vibration. The suspension
assembly shall be smooth without any cuts, grooves, abrasions, projections,
ridges or excrescence which might damage the conductor.

1.10.6 The suspension assembly/clamp shall be designed so that it shall minimise the
static & dynamic stress developed in the conductor under various loading
conditions as well as during wind induced conductor vibrations. It shall also
withstand power arcs & have required level of corona/RIV performance.

1.10.7 FREE CENTER TYPE SUSPENSION CLAMP

For the free Center Suspension Clamp seat shall be smoothly rounded and
curved into a bell mouth at the ends. The lip edges shall have rounded bead.
There shall be at least two U-bolts for tightening of clamp body and keeper
pieces together.

1.10.8 STANDARD PREFORMED ARMOUR ROD SET

1.10.8.1 The preformed Armour Rod Set suitable for ACSR Panther conductor shall be
used to minimise the stress developed in the conductor due to different static
and dynamic loads because of vibration due to wind, slipping of conductor from
the suspension clamp as a result of unbalanced conductor tension in adjacent
spans and broken wire condition. It shall also withstand power arcs, chafing
and abrasion from suspension clamp and localised heating effect due to
magnetic power losses from suspension clamps as well as resistance losses of
the conductor.

1.10.8.2 The preformed Armour rods set shall have right hand lay and the inside
diameter of the helics shall be less than the outside diameter of the conductor
to have gentle but permanent grip on the conductor. The surface of the Armour
rod when fitted on the conductor shall be smooth and free from projections,
cuts and abrasions etc.
Page-3

1.10.8.3 The pitch length of the rods shall be determined by the Bidder but shall be less
than that of the outer layer of conductor and the same shall be accurately
controlled to maintain uniformity and consistently reproducible characteristic
wholly independent of the skill of linemen.

1.10.8.4 The length of each rod and diameter shall be as follows:

Length dia

ACSR Panther 1930 16 6.35 .10

The tolerance in length of the rods in complete set should be within 13 mm
between the longest and shortest rod. The ends of Armour rod shall be parrot
billed.

1.10.8.5 The number of Armour rods in each set shall be Eleven. Each rod shall be
marked in the middle with paint for easy application on the line.

1.10.8.6 The amour rod shall not loose their resilience even after five applications.

1.10.8.7 The conductivity of each rod of the set shall not be less than 40% of the
conductivity of the International Annealed Copper Standard (IACS).

1.10.9 ARMOUR GRIP SUSPENSION CLAMP

1.10.9.1 The Armour grip suspension clamp shall comprise of retaining strap, support
housing, elastomer inserts with aluminum re-enforcements and AGS preformed
rod set.

1.10.9.2 Elastomer insert shall be resistant to the effects of temperature up to 75
0
C,
Ozone ultraviolet radiations and other atmospheric contaminants likely to be
encountered in service. The physical properties of the elastomer shall be of
approved standard. It shall be electrically shielded by a cage of AGS preformed
rod set. The elastomer insert shall be so designed that the curvature of the AGS
rod shall follow the contour of the neoprene insert.

1.10.9.3 The AGS preformed rod set shall be as detailed in clause 1.10.8.1 to 1.10.8.7 in
general except for the following.

1.10.9.4 The length of the AGS preformed rods shall be such that it shall ensure
sufficient slipping strength as detailed under clause 1.10.4 and shall not
introduce unfavorable stress on the conductor under all operating conditions.

1.10.10 ENVELOPE TYPE SUSPENSION CLAMP

The seat of the envelope type suspension clamp shall be smoothy rounded and
suitably curved at the ends. The lip edges shall have a rounded bend. There
shall be at least two U-Bolts for tightening of clamp body and keeper pieces
together. Hexagonal bolts and nuts with split pins shall be used for attachment
of the clamp.
Page-4

1.11 DEAD END ASSEMBLY

1.11.1 The dead end assembly shall be suitable for ACSR Panther conductor.

1.11.2 The dead end assembly shall be compression type with provision for
compressing jumper terminal at one end. The angle of jumper terminal to be
mounted should be 30
0
with respect to the vertical line. The area of bearing
surface on all the connections shall be sufficient to ensure positive electrical and
mechanical contract and avoid local heating due to I
2
R losses. The resistance
of the clamp when compressed on Conductor shall not be more than 75% of the
resistance of equivalent length of Conductor.

1.11.3 Die compression areas shall be clearly marked on each dead-end assembly
designed for continuous die compressions and shall bear the words
COMPRESS FIRST suitably, inscribed near the point on each assembly where
the compression begins. If the dead end assembly is designed for intermittent
die compressions, it shall bear identification marks COMPRESSION ZONE
AND NON-COMPRESSION ZONE distinctly with arrow marks showing the
direction of compressions and knurling marks showing the end of the zones.
Tapered aluminum filler plugs shall also be provided at the line of demarcation
between compression & non-compression zone. The letters, number and other
marking on the finished clamp shall be distinct and legible. The dimensional
tolerances of the cross section of aluminum for dead end assembly for ACSR
Panther conductor shall be as per the table given below: -

TABLE-I

Sl.
No.
Item Dimension before
Compression
Dimension after
Compression

Outer dia

(mm)
Corner to
corner width
(mm)
Face to face
width (mm)

Dead end Assembly

1. Aluminum sleeve 381 370.5 320.5

2. Steel 180.5 15.10.5 17.40.5

1.11.4 The assembly shall not permit slipping of, damage to, or failure of the complete
conductor or any part there of at a load less than 95% of ultimate tensile strength
of the conductor.





Page-5

1.12 FASTENERS: BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS

1.12.1 All bolts and nuts shall conform to IS: 6639-1972/ISO-R-272-1968. All bolts and
nuts shall be galvanized. All bolts and nuts shall have hexagonal heads, the
heads being forged out of solid truly concentric, and square with the shank,
which must be perfectly straight.

1.12.2 Bolts up to M 16 and having length up to 10 times the diameter of the bolt
should be manufactured by cold forging and thread rolling process to obtain
good and reliable mechanical properties and effective dimensional control. The
shear strength of bolt for 5.6 grade should be 310 MPa minimum as per IS:
12427. Bolts should be provided with washer face in accordance with IS: 1363
part-i/ISO-4016-1979 to ensure proper bearing.

1.12.3 Nuts should be double chamfered as per the requirement of IS: 1363 Part-III,
1984. It should be ensured by the manufacturer that nuts should not be over-
tapped beyond 0.4 mm oversize on effective diameter for size up to M 16.

1.12.4 Fully threaded bolts shall not be used. The length of the bolt shall be such that
the threaded portion shall not extend into the place of contact of the component
parts.

1.12.5 All bolts shall be threaded to take the full depth of the nuts and threaded
enough to permit the firm gripping of the component parts but no further. It shall
be ensured that the threaded portion of the bolt protrudes not less than 3 mm
and not more than 8 mm when fully tightened. All nuts shall fit and tight to the
point where shank of the bolt connects to the head.

1.12.6 Flat washers and spring washers shall be provided wherever necessary and
shall be of positive lock type. Spring washers shall be electro-galvanized. The
thickness of washers shall conform to IS: 2016-1967.

1.12.7 The Bidder shall furnish bolt schedules giving thickness of components
connected, the nut and the washer and the length of shank and the threaded
portion of bolts and size of holes and any other special details of this nature.

1.12.8 To obviate bending stress in bolt, it shall not connect aggregate thickness more
than three time its diameter.

1.12.9 Bolts at the joints shall be so staggered that nuts may be tightened with
spanners without fouling.

1.12.10 Fastners of grade higher than 8.8 are not to be used.

1.13 Materials

The materials of the various components shall be as specified hereunder.
However components made of alternative materials giving equivalent or better
performance shall also be considered. The Bidder shall indicate the material
proposed to be used for each and every component of hardware fittings stating
clearly the class grade or alloy designation of the material, manufacturing
process & heat treatment details and the reference standards.

1.13.1 The details of material for different component are listed as in Table No. II.
Page-6

1.14 Workmanship

1.14.1 All the equipment shall be of the latest design and conform to the best modern
practices adopted in the Extra High Voltage field. The Bidder shall offer only
such equipment as guaranteed by him to be satisfactory and suitable for 132
kV transmission line and will give continued good performance.

1.14.2 The design, manufacture process and quality control of all the materials shall
be such as to give the specified mechanical rating, highest mobility, elimination
of sharp edges and corners to limit corona and radio-interference, best
resistance corrosion and a good finish.

1.14.3 All ferrous parts including fasteners shall be hot dip galvanised, after all
machining has been completed. Nuts may, however, be tapped (threaded) after
galvanising and the threads oiled. Spring washers shall be electro-galvanised.
The bolt threads shall be undercut to take care of the increase in diameter due
to galvanising. Galvanising shall be done in accordance with IS: 2629-1985 and
shall satisfy the tests mentioned in IS: 2633-1986. Fasteners shall withstand
four dips while spring washers shall withstand three dips of one-minute duration
in the standard preece test. Other galvanised materials shall be guaranteed to
withstand at least six successive dips each lasting one (1) minute under the
standard preece test for galvanising.

1.14.4 Before ball fittings are galvanised, all die flashing on the shank and on the
bearing surface of the ball shall be carefully removed without reducing the
dimensions below the design requirements.

1.14.5 The zinc coating shall be perfectly adherent, of uniform thickness, smooth
reasonably bright, continuous and free from imperfections such as flux, ash,
rush stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The zinc used for galvanising
shall be grade Zn 99.95 as per IS: 209-1979.

1.14.6 Pin balls shall be checked with the applicable GO gauges in at least two
directions, one of which shall be across the line of die flashing, and the other
90
0
to this line. NO GO gauges shall not pass in any direction.

1.14.7 Socket ends, before galvanising, shall be of uniform contour. The bearing
surface of socket ends shall be uniform about the entire circumference without
depressions of high spots. The internal contours of socket ends shall be
concentric with the axis of the fittings as IS: 2486/IEC: 120.

The axis of the bearing surfaces of socket ends shall be coaxial with the axis of
the fittings. There shall be no noticeable tilting of the bearing surfaces with the
axis of the fittings.

1.14.8 In case of casting, the same shall be free from all internal defects like
shrinkage, inclusion, blowholes, cracks etc. Pressure die casting shall not be
used for casting of components with thickness more than 5 mm.

1.14.9 All current carrying parts shall be so designed and manufactured that contact
resistance is reduced to minimum.

Page-7


1.14.10 No equipment shall have sharp ends or edges, abrasions or projections and
cause any damage to the conductor in any way during erection or during
continuous operation which would produce high electrical and mechanical
stresses in normal working. The design of adjacent metal parts and mating
surfaces shall be such as to prevent corrosion of the contact surface and to
maintain good electrical contact under service conditions.

1.14.11 All the holes shall be cylinderical, clean cut and perpendicular to the plane of
the material. The periphary of the holes shall be free from burrs.

1.14.12 All fasteners shall have suitable corona free locking arrangement to guard
against vibration loosening.

1.14.13 Welding of aluminum shall be by inert gas shielded tungesten arc or inert gas
shielded metal arc process. Welds shall be clean, sound, smooth, uniform
without overlaps, properly fused and completely sealed. There shall be no
cracks, voids incomplete penetration, incomplete fusion, under-cutting or
inclusions. Porosity shall be minimized so that mechanical properties of the
aluminum alloys are not affected. All welds shall be properly finished as per
good engineering practices.

1.15 Bid Drawings

The successful Bidder shall submit 4 sets of following fully dimensional
drawings complete in all respect for approval to HVPNL as per time
schedule given in Bar Chart:-

(i) Attachment of the hanger or strain plate.

(ii) Suspension or dead end assembly.

(iii) Arcing horn/intermediate Arcing Horn attachment to the string as
specified in clause 1.8 of this technical Specification.

(iv) Yoke plates.

(v) Hardware fittings of ball and socket for interconnecting units to the top
and bottom Yoke plates.

(vi) Links with suitable fittings.

1.15.1 All drawings shall be identified by a drawing number and contract number. All
drawing shall be neatly arranged. All drafting & lettering shall be legible. The
minimum size of lettering shall be 3 mm. All dimensions & dimensional tolerances
shall be mentioned in mm:

(i) Dimensions and dimensional tolerance.

(ii) Material, fabrication details including any weld details & any specified finishes &
coatings. Regarding material, designation & reference of standards are to be
indicated.

(iii) Catalogue No.
Page-8

(iv) Marking.

(v) Weight of assembly.

(vi) Installation instructions.

(vii) Design installation torque for the bolt or cap screw.

(viii) Withstand torque that may be applied to the bolt or cap screw without failure of
component parts.

(ix) The compression die number with recommended compression pressure.

(x) All other relevant terminal details.

1.15.2 After placement of award, the Manufacturer shall submit fully dimensioned drawing
including all the components in four (4) copies to the HVPNL for approval.

Table-II
Details of Materials
...
Sr. No. Name of Item Material Process of Reference Remark
Treatment Standard
...
1. Security Clips Stainless -- AISI 302
Steel/Phos 304-L-As per
Pher Bronze IS-1385-1968

2. Arcing Horn/ Mild Steel Hot dip As per IS-226
Intermediate Rod/Tube galvanized 1975 or equivalent
Arching Horn Type

3. Ball Fittings, Class-IV Drop As per IS:2004
Socket, All Steel or forged & 1978 or equivalent
Shackles links equivalent normalized
Hot dip
galvanized

4. Yoke Plate Mild Steel Hot dip As per IS:226
galvanized 1975 or equivalent
standard
5. Free Centre
Clamp

(a) Clamp Body/ High Stre- Casted IS: 617 or
Keeper Piece gth Al. Alloy /forged equivalent
4600 or LM Heat
-6 or equiv- treated
alent/6061

Page-9



(b) Cotter bolts, Galvanized Hot dip IS: 226-1975
Hangers, Mild Steel Galvanized IS: 2062-1992
Shackles,
Brackets -

(c) U Bolts Stainless Forged & AISI 302 or 304-L
Steel or heat treated
High Stren-
gth Al. Alloy

6. P.A. Rod High Stren- Heat ASTM-B429 Minimum
gth Al. Alloy treatment tensile
type 6061 or during strength
equivalent manufacturing of 35 Kg
/mm
2



7. AGS Clamp High Stren- Cast IS: 617 or
(a) Supporting gth Corros forged equivalent
House -ion resistant Heat
AL. Alloy LM6, treated
4600 or
equivalent/6061

(b) Al. Insert & High Strength Forged & ASTM-B429
Retaining Al. Alloy of type Heat treated
strap 6061 or
equivalent.

(c) Elastomer Moulded on Al.
Cushion reinforcement

8. Dead End Assembly

(a) Outer Sleeve EC grade Al. of
dead end purity not less
assembly than 99.5%
for ACSR
Panther
Conductor

(b) Steel Sleeve Mild Steel Hot dip As per IS: 2062
Galvanised or equivalent







Page-10
2. ACCESSORIES OF CONDUCTOR FOR LINES WITH PANTHER
CONDUCTOR
2.1 General

2.1.1 This portion details the technical particulars of the accessories for ACSR
Panther Conductor.

2.1.2 2.5% extra fasteners and retaining rods shall be provided.

2.2 Mid Span Compression Joint.

2.2.1 Mid Span Compression Joint shall be used for joining two lengths of conductor.
The joint shall have a resistively less than 75% of the resistivity of equivaler
length of conductor. The joint shall not permit slipping off, damage to, or failure
of the complete conductor or any part thereof at a load less than 95% of the
ultimate tensile strength of the conductor.

2.2.2 The joint shall be made of Steel and aluminum sleeves for jointing the
conductor. The aluminum sleeve shall have aluminum of purity not less than
99.5%. If whole of the sleeve is not to be compressed than tapered aluminum
filler plugs shall also be provided on the line of demarcation between
compression and non-compresion zone. The steel sleeve should not crack nor
fail during compression. The Brinnel Hardness of steel sleeve shall not exceed
160. The steel sleeve shall be hot dip Galvanised. The dimensions and
dimensional tolerances of mid span compression joint shall be as per Table-III.

2.3 Repair Sleeve

Repair Sleeve of compression type shall be used to repair conductor with not
more than two strands broken in the outer layer. The sleeve shall be
manufactured from 99.5% pure aluminum and shall have a smooth surface.
The repair sleeve shall comprise of two pieces with a provision of seat for
sliding of the keeper piece. The edges of the seat as well as the keeper piece
shall be so rounded that the conductor strands are not damaged during
installation. The dimensions and dimensional tolerances of repair sleeve shall
be as per Table-III.

2.4 Vibration Damper

2.4.1 Vibration dampers of 4R-stockbridge type with four (4) different resonances
spread with the specified aeolian frequency band width corresponding to wind
speed of 1m/s to 7 m/s shall be used at suspension and tension points on each
conductor in each span to damp out aeolian vibrations as mentioned herein
after.

2.4.2 Alternate damping systems or offering equivalent or better performance also
shall be accepted provided the manufacturer meets the qualifying requirements
stipulated in the Specifications. Relevant technical documents to establish the
technical suitability of alternate systems shall be furnished by the Bidder along
with the bid.

2.4.3 One damper minimum on each side of conductor for suspension points and two
dampers minimum on each side of conductor for tension points shall be used
for ruling design span of 305 m..
Page-11

2.4.4 The Bidder may offer damping system involving more number of dampers per
ruling design span than the specified. However suitable price compensation
shall be considered for evaluation. For the purposed of price compensation
80% of the towers as suspension locations and 20% of the towers as tension
locations and all the spans shall be assumed to be ruling design spans.

2.4.5 The clamp of the vibration damper shall be made of high strength aluminum
alloy of type LM-6 or equivalent. It shall be capable of supporting the damper
and prevent damage or chafing of the conductor during erection or continued
operation. The clamp shall have smooth and permanent grip to keep the
damper in position on the conductor without damaging the strands or causing
premature fatigue failure of the conductor under the clamp. The clamp groove
shall be in uniform contact with the conductor over the entire clamping surface
except for the rounded edges. The groove of the clamp body and clamp cap
shall be smooth, free form projections, grit or other materials which could cause
damage to the conductor when the clamp is installed. Clamping bolts shall be
provided with self locking nuts and designed to prevent corrosion of threads or
loosening in service.

2.4.6 The messenger cable shall be made of high strength galvanized steel/stainless
steel with a minimum strength of 135 kg/sq mm. It shall be of preformed and
postformed quality in order to prevent subsequent droop of weight and to
maintain consistent flexural stiffness of the cable in service. The number of
strands in the messenger cable shall be 19. The messenger cable other than
stainless steel shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with the
recommendations of IS: 4826-1979 for heavily coated wires.

2.4.7 The damper mass shall be made of hot dip galvanized mild steel/cast iron or a
permanent mould cast zinc alloy. All castings shall be free from defects such as
cracks, shrinkage, inclusions and blowholes etc. The surface of the damper
masses shall be smooth.

2.4.8 The damper clamp shall be casted over the messenger cable and offer
sufficient and permanent grip on it. The messenger cable shall not slip out of
the grip at a load less than the mass pull-off value of the damper. The damper
masses made of material other than zinc alloy shall be fixed to the messenger
cable in a suitable manner in order to avoid excessive stress concentration on
the messenger cables which shall cause premature fatigue failure of the same.
The messenger cable ends shall be suitably and effectively sealed to prevent
corrosion. The damper mass made of zinc alloy shall be casted over the
messenger cable and have sufficient and permanent grip on the messenger
cable under all service conditions.

2.4.9 The damper assembly shall be so designed that it shall not introduce radio
interference beyond acceptable limits.

2.4.10 The vibration damper shall be capable of being installed and removed from
energized line by means of hot line techniques. In addition, the clamp shall be
capable of being removed and reinstalled on the conductor at the designated
torque without shearing or damaging of fasteners.
Page-12

2.4.11 The manufacturer must indicate the clamp bolt tightening torque to ensure that
the slip strength of the clamp is maintained between 2.5 kN. and 5 kN. The
clamp when installed on the conductor shall not cause excessive stress
concentration on the conductor leading to permanent deformation of the
conductor strands and premature fatigue failure in operation.

2.4.12 The vibration damper shall not have magnetic power loss more than 1 watt at
350 Amps. 50 Hz alternating current in conductor.

2.4.13 The vibration analysis of the system, with and without damper and dynamic
characteristics of the damper as detailed under Annexure-A, shall have to be
submitted by the Bidder along with his bid. The technical particulars for
vibration analysis and damping design of the system are as follows.

...
Sr. No. Description Technical Particulars
...

ACSR Panther conductor

1. Configuration Single ACSR Panther (37/3.00)
conductor per
Phase
2. Span length in meters

(i) Ruling design span : 305 Meters

(ii) Maximum span : 1100 Meters

(iii) Minimum span : 100 Meters

3. Wind Zone : 4 (47 m/s)
As per IS:875-1987

4. Tensile Load in Conductor
At temperature of 0 deg. C : 2530 Kgf
And still air

5. Armour rods used : Standard preformed
: armour rods/AGS

6. Maximum permissible
dynamic strain : 150 microstrains

...


Page-13
2.4.14 The damper placement chart for spans ranging from 100m to 1100m shall be
submitted by the Bidder. Placement charts should be duly supported with
relevant technical documents and sample calculations.

2.4.15 The damper placement charts shall include the following: -

(1) Location of the dampers for various combinations of spans and line
tensions clearly indicating the number of dampers to be installed per
conductor per span.

(2) Placement distances clearly identifying the extremities between which
the distances are to be measured.

(3) Placement recommendation depending upon type of suspension clamps
(viz Free centre type/Armour grip type etc.)

(4) The influence of mid span compression joints, repair sleeves and armour
rods (standard and AGS) in the placement of dampers.

2.5 Material and Workmanship

2.5.1 All the equipments shall be of the latest proven design and conform to the best
modern practice adopted in the extra high voltage field. The Bidder shall offer
only such equipment as guaranteed by him to be satisfactory and suitable for
132 kV transmission line application and will give continued good performance.

2.5.2 The design, manufacturing process and quality control of all the materials shall
be such as to achieve requisite factor of safety for maximum working load,
highest mobility, elimination of sharp edges and corners, best resistance to
corrosion and a good finish.

2.5.3 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized, after all machining has been
completed. Nuts may, however, be tapped (threaded) after galvanising and the
threads oiled. Spring washers shall be electro galvanised. The bolt threads
shall be undercut to take care of increase in diameter due to galvanising.
Galvanising shall be done in accordance with IS: 2629-1985 and satisfy the
tests mentioned in IS: 2633-1986. Fasteners shall withstand four dips while
spring washers shall withstand three dips. Other galvanised materials shall be
guaranteed to withstand at least six dips each lasting one minute under the
standard Preece test for galvanising unless otherwise specified.

2.5.4 The zinc coating shall be perfectly adherent, of uniform thickness, smooth,
reasonably bright, continuous and free from imperfections such as flux, ash,
rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The zinc used for galvanising
shall be of grade Zn 99.95 as per IS: 209-1979.




Page-14
2.5.5 In case of castings, the same shall be from all internal defects like shrinkage
inclusion, blow holes, cracks etc.

2.5.6 All current carrying parts shall be so designed and manufactured that contact
resistance is reduced to minimum and localized heating phenomenon is averted.

2.5.7 No equipment shall have sharp ends or edges, abrasions or projections and shall
not cause any damage to the conductor in any way during erection or during
continuous operation which would produce high electrical and mechanical stresses
in normal working. The design of adjacent metal parts and mating surfaces shall be
such as to prevent corrosion of the contact surface and to maintain good electrical
contact under all service conditions.

2.5.8 Particular care shall be taken during manufacture and subsequent handling to
ensure smooth surface free from abrasion or cuts.

2.5.9 The fasteners shall conform to the requirements of IS: 6639-1972. All fasteners and
clamps shall have corona free locking arrangement to guard against vibration
loosening.

2.6 Compression Markings

Die compression areas shall be clearly marked on each equipment designed for
continuous die compressions and shall bear the words COMPRESS FIRST suitably
inscribed on each equipment where the compression begins. If the equipment is
designed for intermittent die compressions, it shall bear the identification marks
COMPRESSION ZONE and NON-COMPRESSION ZONE distinctly with arrow
marks showing the direction of compression and knurling marks showing the end of
the zones. The letters, number and other markings on finished equipment shall be
distinct and legible.

2.7 Bid Drawings

2.7.1 The successful Bidder shall submit 4 sets of following fully dimensional drawings
complete in all respect for approval to HVPNL as per time schedule given in Bar
Chart

(i) Dimensions and dimensional tolerences.

(ii) Material, fabrication details including any weld details and any specified
finishes and coatings. Regarding material, designations and reference of
standards are to be indicated.

(iii) Catalogue No.

(iv) Marking

(v) Weight of assembly

(vi) Installation Instructions

(vii) Design installation torque for the bolt or cap screw.
Page-15

(viii) Withstand torque that may be applied to the bolt or cap screw without
failure of component parts.

(ix) The compression die number with recommended compression pressure.

(x) All other relevant technical details.


2.7.3 Placement charts for Vibration damper

2.7.4 The above drawings shall be submitted in five copies with all the details as
stated above along with the bid document. After the placement of award, the
Manufacturer shall again submit the drawings in four copies to the HVPNL for
approval.

Table-III

Dimensions & Dimensional Tolerances for Mid Span Compression
Joint and Repair Sleeve for ACSR Panther Conductor




Sr. No. Item Dimension before Dimensions
Compression after compression

Outer Length Corner Face
dia. To to
Corner face
width width
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)

1. Mid Span Compression Joint

AluminumSleeve 381 6105 370.5 320.5

Steel Sleeve 180.5 2035 17.40.5 15.10.5


2. Repair Sleeve 381 241 5 370.5 320.5

..







Page-16


3 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION OF HARDWARE FITTINGS FOR LINES WITH
ACSR ZEBRA CONDUCTOR

4.1 Details of Hardware Fittings

4.1.1 The hardware fittings shall be as per the specification drawings enclosed with
this part of the specification. Each hardware fitting shall be supplied complete in
all respects and shall include the following hardware parts.

4.1.2 Single suspension, Single Tension, Single suspension (Pilot), Double
Suspension and Double Tension hardware fittings, shall be supplied suitable
for attaching to hanger/strain plate fixed to tower.

4.1.3 Suitable arcing horn/intermediate arcing horns as specified in clause 4.8
hereinafter.

4.1.4 Suitable yoke plates complying with the specifications given hereunder.

4.1.5 Suspension and dead end assembly to suit conductor size as detailed in clause
4.10 and 4.11 hereinafter.

4.1.6 Other necessary fittings as eye links, ball clevis, socket clevis, clevis eye, U-
clevis and chain link etc. to make the hardware fittings complete.

4.1.7 2.5% extra fasteners and Aluminum filler plugs.


4.2 Dimensions of Insulator String Alongwith Hardware Fitting

The various limiting dimensions of the various Suspension, pilot and tension
insulator strings alongwith hardware fittings shall be as per the specification
drawings enclosed with this part of the specification.

4.3 Interchangeability

The hardware for insulator strings with disc insulators together with ball and
socket fittings shall be of standard design, so that these hardware are
interchangeable with each other and suitable for use with disc insulators of any
make conforming to relevant Indian/International Standard.

4.4 Corona and RI Performance

Sharp edges and scratches on all the hardware fittings shall be avoided. All
surfaces must be clean, smooth, without cuts and abrasions or projections. The
Bidder must give suitable assurance about the satisfactory corona and radio
interference performance of the materials offered by him

4.5 Maintenance

4.5.1 The hardware fittings offered shall be suitable for employment of hot line
maintenance techniques so that usual hot line operations cab be carried out
with ease, speed and safety. The technique adopted for hot line maintenance
shall be generally bare hand method & hot stick method. The Bidder should
clearly establish in the bid, the suitability of his fittings for hot line maintenance.
Page-17

3.6 Designation

3.6.1 Ball and Socket Designation

The dimensions of the ball and socket shall be of 16mm designation for 70 KN
disc Insulators and 20 mm for 120 KN insulators. The designation should be in
accordance with the standard dimensions stated in IS 2486 (Part-II)/ IEC: 120.
The dimensions shall be checked by the appropriate gauge after galvanising
only.

3.7 Security Clips and Split Pins

3.7.1 Security clips for use with ball and socket coupling shall be R-shaped, hump
type which provides positive locking of the coupling as per IS:2486 (Part-III)
/IEC : 372. The legs of the security clips shall be spread after assembly in the
works to prevent complete withdrawal from the socket. The locking device
should be resilient, corrosion resistant and of suitable mechanical strength.
There shall be no risk of the locking device being displaced accidentally or
being rotated when in position. Under no circumstances shall the locking
devices allow separation of fittings.

3.7.2 The hole for the security clips shall be countersunk and the clip should be of
such design that the eye of clips may be engaged by a hot line clip puller to
provide for disengagement under energised conditions. The force required to
pull the security clip into its unlocked position shall not be less than 50 N (5 kg)
or more than 500 N (50 kg).

3.7.3 Split pins shall be used with bolts & nuts.

3.8 Arcing Horn/Intermediate Arcing Horn

3.8.1 The arcing horn shall be either ball ended rod type or tubular type.

3.8.2 For insulators strings with disc insulators, the arcing horn shall be provided as
shown on the drawings of the hardware fittings in this specification.

3.8.3 The spark gap shall be so adjusted to ensure effective operation under actual
field conditions.

3.9 Yoke Plates

The strength of yoke plates shall be adequate to withstand the minimum
ultimate tensile strength, as specified in the bid drawings.

The plates shall be either triangular or rectangular in shape as may be
necessary. The design of yoke plate shall take into account the most
unfavourable loading conditions likely to be experienced as a result of
dimensional tolerances for disc insulators as well as components of hardware
fittings within the specified range. The plates shall have suitable holes for fixing
arcing horn. All the corners and edges should be rounded off with a radius of at
least 3 mm. Design calculations i.e. for bearing & tensile strength, for deciding
the dimensions of yoke plate shall be furnished by the bidder. The holes
provided for bolts in the yoke plate should satisfy shear edge condition as per
Clause No. 8.10 of IS: 800-1984.
Page-18
3.10 Suspension Assembly

3.10.1 The suspension assembly shall be suitable for ACSR Zebra Conductor.

3.10.2 The suspension assembly shall include either free centre type suspension
clamp alongwith standard preformed armour rods or armour grip suspension
clamp except for pilot insulator string for which only suitable envelope type
suspension clamps shall be used.

3.10.3 The suspension clamp alongwith standard preformed armour rods set shall be
designed to have maximum mobility in any direction and minimum moment of
inertia so as to have minimum stress on the conductor in the case of oscillation
of the same.

3.10.4 The suspension clamp alongwith standard preformed armour rods/armour grip
suspension clamp set shall have a slip strength between 16 to 24 KN.

3.10.5 The suspension assembly shall be designed, manufactured and finished to give
it a suitable shape, so as to avoid any possibility of hammering between
suspension assembly and conductor due to vibration. The suspension
assembly shall be smooth without any cuts, grooves, abrasions, projections,
ridges or excrescence which might damage the conductor.

3.10.6 The suspension assembly/clamp shall be designed so that it shall minimise the
static & dynamic stress developed in the conductor under various loading
conditions as well as during wind induced conductor vibrations. It shall also
withstand power arcs & have required level of corona/RIV performance.

3.10.7 FREE CENTER TYPE SUSPENSION CLAMP

For the free Center Suspension Clamp seat shall be smoothly rounded and
curved into a bell mouth at the ends. The lip edges shall have rounded bead.
There shall be at least two U-bolts for tightening of clamp body and keeper
pieces together.

3.10.8 STANDARD PREFORMED ARMOUR ROD SET

3.10.8.1 The preformed Armour Rod Set suitable for ACSR Zebra (61/3.18) conductor
shall be used to minimise the stress developed in the conductor due to different
static and dynamic loads because of vibration due to wind, slipping of
conductor from the suspension clamp as a result of unbalanced conductor
tension in adjacent spans and broken wire condition. It shall also withstand
power arcs, chafing and abrasion from suspension clamp and localised heating
effect due to magnetic power losses from suspension clamps as well as
resistance losses of the conductor.

3.10.8.2 The preformed Armour rods set shall have right hand lay and the inside
diameter of the helics shall be less than the outside diameter of the conductor
to have gentle but permanent grip on the conductor. The surface of the Armour
rod when fitted on the conductor shall be smooth and free from projections,
cuts and abrasions etc.

3.10.8.3 The pitch length of the rods shall be determined by the Bidder but shall be less
than that of the outer layer of conductor and the same shall be accurately
controlled to maintain uniformity and consistently reproducible characteristic
wholly independent of the skill of linemen.

Page-19




3.10.8.4 The length of each rod and diameter shall be as follows:

Length dia

ACSR Zebra 2540 25 7.87 .10

The tolerance in length of the rods in complete set should be within 13 mm
between the longest and shortest rod. The ends of Armour rod shall be parrot
billed.

4.10.8.5 The number of Armour rods in each set shall be twelve. Each rod shall be
marked in the middle with paint for easy application on the line.

4.10.8.6 The amour rod shall not loose their resilience even after five applications.

4.10.8.7 The conductivity of each rod of the set shall not be less than 40% of the
conductivity of the International Annealed Copper Standard (IACS).

4.10.9 ARMOUR GRIP SUSPENSION CLAMP

4.10.9.1 The Armour grip suspension clamp shall comprise of retaining strap, support
housing, elastomer inserts with aluminum re-enforcements and AGS
preformed rod set.

4.10.9.2 Elastomer insert shall be resistant to the effects of temperature up to 75
0
C,
Ozone ultraviolet radiations and other atmospheric contaminants likely to be
encountered in service. The physical properties of the elastomer shall be of
approved standard. It shall be electrically shielded by a cage of AGS preformed
rod set. The elastomer insert shall be so designed that the curvature of the
AGS rod shall follow the contour of the neoprene insert.

4.10.9.3 The AGS preformed rod set shall be as detailed in clause 4.10.10.1 to
4.10.10.7 in general except for the following.

4.10.9.4 The length of the AGS preformed rods shall be such that it shall ensure
sufficient slipping strength as detailed under clause 1.10.4 and shall not
introduce unfavorable stress on the conductor under all operating conditions.

4.10.10 ENVELOPE TYPE SUSPENSION CLAMP

The seat of the envelope type suspension clamp shall be smoothy rounded and
suitably curved at the ends. The lip edges shall have a rounded bend. There
shall be at least two U-Bolts for tightening of clamp body and keeper pieces
together. Hexagonal bolts and nuts with split pins shall be used for attachment
of the clamp.




Page-20

4.11 DEAD END ASSEMBLY

4.11.1 The dead end assembly shall be suitable for ACSR Zebra (61/3.18) mm
conductor.

4.11.2 The dead end assembly shall be compression type with provision for
compressing jumper terminal at one end. The angle of jumper terminal to be
mounted should be 30
0
with respect to the vertical line. The area of bearing
surface on all the connections shall be sufficient to ensure positive electrical and
mechanical contract and avoid local heating due to I
2
R losses. The resistance
of the clamp when compressed on Conductor shall not be more than 75% of the
resistance of equivalent length of Conductor.

4.11.3 Die compression areas shall be clearly marked on each dead-end assembly
designed for continuous die compressions and shall bear the words
COMPRESS FIRST suitably, inscribed near the point on each assembly where
the compression begins. If the dead end assembly is designed for intermittent
die compressions, it shall bear identification marks COMPRESSION ZONE
AND NON-COMPRESSION ZONE distinctly with arrow marks showing the
direction of compressions and knurling marks showing the end of the zones.
Tapered aluminum filler plugs shall also be provided at the line of demarcation
between compression & non-compression zone. The letters, number and other
marking on the finished clamp shall be distinct and legible. The dimensional
tolerances of the cross section of aluminum for dead end assembly for ACSR
Zebra conductor shall be as per the table given below: -

TABLE-I

Sl.
No.
Item Dimension
before
Compression
Dimension after
Compression

Inner
dia

(mm)
Outer
dia

(mm)
Corner to
corner
width
(mm)
Face
to face
width
(mm)

Dead end Assembly

1. Aluminum 310.5 481 460.5 400.5

2. Steel 100.2 200.5 190.5 160.5


4.11.4 The assembly shall not permit slipping of, damage to, or failure of the complete
conductor or any part there of at a load less than 95% of ultimate tensile strength
of the conductor.



Page-21

4.12 FASTENERS: BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS

4.12.1 All bolts and nuts shall conform to IS: 6639-1972. All bolts and nuts shall be
galvanized. All bolts and nuts shall have hexagonal heads, the heads being
forged out of solid truly concentric, and square with the shank, which must be
perfectly straight.

4.12.2 Bolts up to M 16 and having length up to 10 times the diameter of the bolt
should be manufactured by cold forging and thread rolling process to obtain
good and reliable mechanical properties and effective dimensional control. The
shear strength of bolt for 5.6 grade should be 310 MPa minimum as per IS:
12427. Bolts should be provided with washer face in accordance with IS: 1363
Part-I to ensure proper bearing.

4.12.3 Nuts should be double chamfered as per the requirement of IS: 1363 Part-III,
1984. It should be ensured by the manufacturer that nuts should not be over-
tapped beyond 0.4 mm oversize on effective diameter for size up to M 16.

4.12.4 Fully threaded bolts shall not be used. The length of the bolt shall be such that
the threaded portion shall not extend into the place of contact of the component
parts.

4.12.5 All bolts shall be threaded to take the full depth of the nuts and threaded
enough to permit the firm gripping of the component parts but no further. It shall
be ensured that the threaded portion of the bolt protrudes not less than 3 mm
and not more than 8 mm when fully tightened. All nuts shall fit and tight to the
point where shank of the bolt connects to the head.

4.12.6 Flat washers and spring washers shall be provided wherever necessary and
shall be of positive lock type. Spring washers shall be electro-galvanized. The
thickness of washers shall conform to IS: 2016-1967.

4.12.7 The Bidder shall furnish bolt schedules giving thickness of components
connected, the nut and the washer and the length of shank and the threaded
portion of bolts and size of holes and any other special details of this nature.

4.12.8 To obviate bending stress in bolt, it shall not connect aggregate thickness more
than three time its diameter.

4.12.9 Bolts at the joints shall be so staggered that nuts may be tightened with
spanners without fouling.


4.12.10 Fastners of grade higher than 8.8 are not to be used.

4.13 Materials

4.13.1 The materials of the various components shall be as specified hereunder.
However components made of alternative materials giving equivalent or better
performance shall also be considered. The Bidder shall indicate the material
proposed to be used for each and every component of hardware fittings stating
clearly the class grade or alloy designation of the material, manufacturing
process & heat treatment details and the reference standards.
Page-22

4.13.2 The details of material for different component are listed as in Table No. II.

4.16 Workmanship

4.16.1 All the equipment shall be of the latest design and conform to the best modern
practices adopted in the Extra High Voltage field. The Bidder shall offer only
such equipment as guaranteed by him to be satisfactory and suitable for 132
kV transmission line and will give continued good performance.

4.16.2 The design, manufacture process and quality control of all the materials shall
be such as to give the specified mechanical rating, highest mobility, elimination
of sharp edges and corners to limit corona and radio-interference, best
resistance corrosion and a good finish.

4.16.3 All ferrous parts including fasteners shall be hot dip galvanised, after all
machining has been completed. Nuts may, however, be tapped (threaded) after
galvanising and the threads oiled. Spring washers shall be electro-galvanised.
The bolt threads shall be undercut to take care of the increase in diameter due
to galvanising. Galvanising shall be done in accordance with IS: 2629-1985 and
shall satisfy the tests mentioned in IS: 2633-1986. Fasteners shall withstand
four dips while spring washers shall withstand three dips of one-minute duration
in the standard preece test. Other galvanised materials shall be guaranteed to
withstand at least six successive dips each lasting one (1) minute under the
standard preece test for galvanising.

4.16.4 Before ball fittings are galvanised, all die flashing on the shank and on the
bearing surface of the ball shall be carefully removed without reducing the
dimensions below the design requirements.

4.16.5 The zinc coating shall be perfectly adherent, of uniform thickness, smooth
reasonably bright, continuous and free from imperfections such as flux, ash,
rush stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The zinc used for galvanising
shall be grade Zn 99.95 as per IS: 209-1979.

4.16.6 Pin balls shall be checked with the applicable GO gauges in at least two
directions, one of which shall be across the line of die flashing, and the other
90
0
to this line. NO GO gauges shall not pass in any direction.

4.16.7 Socket ends, before galvanising, shall be of uniform contour. The bearing
surface of socket ends shall be uniform about the entire circumference without
depressions of high spots. The internal contours of socket ends shall be
concentric with the axis of the fittings as IS: 2486/IEC: 120.

The axis of the bearing surfaces of socket ends shall be coaxial with the axis of
the fittings. There shall be no noticeable tilting of the bearing surfaces with the
axis of the fittings.

4.16.8 In case of casting, the same shall be free from all internal defects like
shrinkage, inclusion, blowholes, cracks etc. Pressure die casting shall not be
used for casting of components with thickness more than 5 mm.

4.16.9 All current carrying parts shall be so designed and manufactured that contact
resistance is reduced to minimum.
Page-23


4.16.10 No equipment shall have sharp ends or edges, abrasions or projections and
cause any damage to the conductor in any way during erection or during
continuous operation which would produce high electrical and mechanical
stresses in normal working. The design of adjacent metal parts and mating
surfaces shall be such as to prevent corrosion of the contact surface and to
maintain good electrical contact under service conditions.

4.16.11 All the holes shall be cylinderical, clean cut and perpendicular to the plane of
the material. The periphary of the holes shall be free from burrs.

4.16.12 All fasteners shall have suitable corona free locking arrangement to guard
against vibration loosening.

4.16.13 Welding of aluminum shall be by inert gas shielded tungesten arc or inert gas
shielded metal arc process. Welds shall be clean, sound, smooth, uniform
without overlaps, properly fused and completely sealed. There shall be no
cracks, voids incomplete penetration, incomplete fusion, under-cutting or
inclusions. Porosity shall be minimized so that mechanical properties of the
aluminum alloys are not affected. All welds shall be properly finished as per
good engineering practices.

4.17 Bid Drawings

4.17.1 The successful Bidder shall submit 4 sets of following fully dimensional
drawings complete in all respect for approval to HVPNL as per time
schedule given in Bar Chart:-

(i) Attachment of the hanger or strain plate.

(ii) Suspension or dead end assembly.

(iii) Arcing horn/intermediate Arcing Horn attachment to the string as
specified in clause 1.8 of this technical Specification.

(iv) Yoke plates.

(v) Hardware fittings of ball and socket for interconnecting units to the top
and bottom Yoke plates.

(vi) Links with suitable fittings.

4.17.2 All drawings shall be identified by a drawing number and contract number. All
drawing shall be neatly arranged. All drafting & lettering shall be legible. The
minimum size of lettering shall be 3 mm. All dimensions & dimensional tolerances
shall be mentioned in mm:

(i) Dimensions and dimensional tolerance.

(ii) Material, fabrication details including any weld details & any specified finishes &
coatings. Regarding material, designation & reference of standards are to be
indicated.
Page-24

(iii) Catalogue No.

(iv) Marking.

(v) Weight of assembly.

(vi) Installation instructions.

(vii) Design installation torque for the bolt or cap screw.

(viii) Withstand torque that may be applied to the bolt or cap screw without failure of
component parts.

(ix) The compression die number with recommended compression pressure.

(x) All other relevant terminal details.

4.17.3 After placement of award, the Manufacturer shall submit fully dimensioned drawing
including all the components in four (4) copies to the HVPN for approval.

Table-II

Details of Materials
...
Sr. No. Name of Item Material Process of Reference Remark
Treatment Standard
...

1. Security Clips Stainless -- AISI 302
Steel/Phos 304-L-As per
Pher Bronze IS-1385-1968

2. Arcing Horn/ Mild Steel Hot dip As per IS-226
Intermediate Rod/Tube galvanized 1975 or equivalent
Arching Horn Type

3. Ball Fittings, Class-IV Drop As per IS:2004
Socket, All Steel or forged & 1978 or equivalent
Shackles links equivalent normalized
Hot dip
galvanized

4. Yoke Plate Mild Steel Hot dip As per IS:226
galvanized 1975 or equivalent
standard





Page-25






5. Free Centre
Clamp

(a) Clamp Body/ High Stre- Casted IS: 617 or
Keeper Piece gth Al. Alloy /forged equivalent
4600 or LM Heat
-6 or equiv- treated
alent/6061

(b) Cotter bolts, Galvanized Hot dip IS: 226-1975
Hangers, Mild Steel Galvanized IS: 2062-1992
Shackles,
Brackets -

(c) U Bolts Stainless Forged & AISI 302 or 304-L
Steel or heat treated
High Stren-
gth Al. Alloy

6. P.A. Rod High Stren- Heat ASTM-B429 Minimum
gth Al. Alloy treatment tensile
type 6061 or during strength
equivalent manufacturing of 35 Kg
/mm
2



7. AGS Clamp High Stren- Cast IS: 617 or
(a) Supporting gth Corros forged equivalent
House -ion resistant Heat
AL. Alloy LM6, treated
4600 or
equivalent/6061

(b) Al. Insert & High Strength Forged & ASTM-B429
Retaining Al. Alloy of type Heat treated
strap 6061 or
equivalent.

(c) Elastomer Moulded on Al.
Cushion reinforcement

8. Dead End Assembly

(a) Outer Sleeve EC grade Al. of
dead end purity not less
assembly than 99.5% or
for ACSR aluminum alloy
Zebra 6201/or equivalent
Conductor

(b) Steel Sleeve Mild Steel Hot dip As per IS: 2062
Galvanised or equivalent

Page-26
5. CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES FOR LINES WITH ACSR ZEBRA

5.1 General

5.1.1 This portion details the technical particulars of the accessories for ACSR
Zebra 61/3.18 Conductor.

5.1.2 2.5% extra fasteners and retaining rods shall be provided.

5.2 Mid Span Compression Joint.

5.2.1 Mid Span Compression Joint shall be used for joining two lengths of conductor.
The joint shall have a resistively less than 75% of the resistivity of equivaler
length of conductor. The joint shall not permit slipping off, damage to, or failure
of the complete conductor or any part thereof at a load less than 95% of the
ultimate tensile strength of the conductor.

5.2.2 The joint shall be made of Steel and aluminum sleeves for jointing the
conductor. The aluminum sleeve shall have aluminum of purity not less than
99.5%. If whole of the sleeve is not to be compressed than tapered aluminum
filler plugs shall also be provided on the line of demarcation between
compression and non-compresion zone. The steel sleeve should not crack nor
fail during compression. The Brinnel Hardness of steel sleeve shall not exceed
160. The steel sleeve shall be hot dip Galvanised. The dimensions and
dimensional tolerances of mid span compression joint shall be as per Table-III.

5.3 Repair Sleeve

Repair Sleeve of compression type shall be used to repair conductor with not
more than two strands broken in the outer layer. The sleeve shall be
manufactured from 99.5% pure aluminum and shall have a smooth surface.
The repair sleeve shall comprise of two pieces with a provision of seat for
sliding of the keeper piece. The edges of the seat as well as the keeper piece
shall be so rounded that the conductor strands are not damaged during
installation. The dimensions and dimensional tolerances of repair sleeve shall
be as per Table-III.

5.4 Vibration Damper

5.4.1 Vibration dampers of 4R-stockbridge type with four (4) different resonances
spread with the specified aeolian frequency band width corresponding to wind
speed of 1m/s to 7 m/s shall be used at suspension and tension points on each
conductor in each span to damp out aeolian vibrations as mentioned herein
after.

5.4.2 Alternate damping systems or offering equivalent or better performance also
shall be accepted provided the manufacturer meets the qualifying requirements
stipulated in the Specifications. Relevant technical documents to establish the
technical suitability of alternate systems shall be furnished by the Bidder along
with the bid.

5.4.3 One damper minimum on each side of conductor for suspension points and two
dampers minimum on each side of conductor for tension points shall be used.

Page-27

5.4.4 The Bidder may offer damping system involving more number of dampers per
ruling design span than the specified. However suitable price compensation
shall be considered for evaluation. For the purposed of price compensation
80% of the towers as suspension locations and 20% of the towers as tension
locations and all the spans shall be assumed to be ruling design spans.

5.4.5 The clamp of the vibration damper shall be made of high strength aluminum
alloy of type LM-6 or equivalent. It shall be capable of supporting the damper
and prevent damage or chafing of the conductor during erection or continued
operation. The clamp shall have smooth and permanent grip to keep the
damper in position on the conductor without damaging the strands or causing
premature fatigue failure of the conductor under the clamp. The clamp groove
shall be in uniform contact with the conductor over the entire clamping surface
except for the rounded edges. The groove of the clamp body and clamp cap
shall be smooth, free form projections, grit or other materials which could cause
damage to the conductor when the clamp is installed. Clamping bolts shall be
provided with self locking nuts and designed to prevent corrosion of threads or
loosening in service.

5.4.6 The messenger cable shall be made of high strength galvanized steel/stainless
steel with a minimum strength of 135 kg/sq mm. It shall be of preformed and
postformed quality in order to prevent subsequent droop of weight and to
maintain consistent flexural stiffness of the cable in service. The number of
strands in the messenger cable shall be 19. The messenger cable other than
stainless steel shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with the
recommendations of IS: 4826-1979 for heavily coated wires.

5.4.7 The damper mass shall be made of hot dip galvanized mild steel/cast iron or a
permanent mould cast zinc alloy. All castings shall be free from defects such as
cracks, shrinkage, inclusions and blowholes etc. The surface of the damper
masses shall be smooth.

5.4.8 The damper clamp shall be casted over the messenger cable and offer
sufficient and permanent grip on it. The messenger cable shall not slip out of
the grip at a load less than the mass pull-off value of the damper. The damper
masses made of material other than zinc alloy shall be fixed to the messenger
cable in a suitable manner in order to avoid excessive stress concentration on
the messenger cables which shall cause premature fatigue failure of the same.
The messenger cable ends shall be suitably and effectively sealed to prevent
corrosion. The damper mass made of zinc alloy shall be casted over the
messenger cable and have sufficient and permanent grip on the messenger
cable under all service conditions.

5.4.9 The damper assembly shall be so designed that it shall not introduce radio
interference beyond acceptable limits.

5.4.10 The vibration damper shall be capable of being installed and removed from
energized line by means of hot line techniques. In addition, the clamp shall be
capable of being removed and reinstalled on the conductor at the designated
torque without shearing or damaging of fasteners.


Page-28


5.4.11 The manufacturer must indicate the clamp bolt tightening torque to ensure that
the slip strength of the clamp is maintained between 2.5 kN. and 5 kN. The
clamp when installed on the conductor shall not cause excessive stress
concentration on the conductor leading to permanent deformation of the
conductor strands and premature fatigue failure in operation.

5.4.12 The vibration damper shall not have magnetic power loss more than 1 watt at
500 Amps. 50 Hz alternating current in conductor.

5.4.13 The vibration analysis of the system, with and without damper and dynamic
characteristics of the damper as detailed under Annexure-A, shall have to be
submitted by the Bidder along with his bid. The technical particulars for
vibration analysis and damping design of the system are as follows.

...
Sr. No. Description Technical Particulars
...

ACSR Zebra 61/3.18

1. Configuration


Single ACSR Zebra
Double Circuit conductor per
Phase in vertical
Formation


2. Span length in meters

(i) Ruling design span : 300 Meters

(ii) Maximum span : 1100 Meters

(iii) Minimum span : 100 Meters

3. Wind Zone : 4 (47 m/s)
As per IS:875-1987

4. Tensile Load in Conductor
At temperature of 0 deg. C : 3473 Kgf
And still air

5. Armour rods used : Standard preformed
: armour rods/AGS

6. Maximum permissible
dynamic strain : 150 microstrains

...
Page-29


5.4.14 The damper placement chart for spans ranging from 100m to 1100m shall be
submitted by the Bidder. Placement charts should be duly supported with
relevant technical documents and sample calculations.

5.4.15 The damper placement charts shall include the following: -

(1) Location of the dampers for various combinations of spans and line
tensions clearly indicating the number of dampers to be installed per
conductor per span.

(2) Placement distances clearly identifying the extremities between which
the distances are to be measured.

(3) Placement recommendation depending upon type of suspension clamps
(viz Free centre type/Armour grip type etc.)

(4) The influence of mid span compression joints, repair sleeves and armour
rods (standard and AGS) in the placement of dampers.

5.5 Material and Workmanship

5.5.1 All the equipments shall be of the latest proven design and conform to the best
modern practice adopted in the extra high voltage field. The Bidder shall offer
only such equipment as guaranteed by him to be satisfactory and suitable for
132 kV transmission line application and will give continued good performance.

5.5.2 The design, manufacturing process and quality control of all the materials shall
be such as to achieve requisite factor of safety for maximum working load,
highest mobility, elimination of sharp edges and corners, best resistance to
corrosion and a good finish.

5.5.3 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized, after all machining has been
completed. Nuts may, however, be tapped (threaded) after galvanising and the
threads oiled. Spring washers shall be electro galvanised. The bolt threads
shall be undercut to take care of increase in diameter due to galvanising.
Galvanising shall be done in accordance with IS: 2629-1985 and satisfy the
tests mentioned in IS: 2633-1986. Fasteners shall withstand four dips while
spring washers shall withstand three dips. Other galvanised materials shall be
guaranteed to withstand at least six dips each lasting one minute under the
standard Preece test for galvanising unless otherwise specified.

5.5.4 The zinc coating shall be perfectly adherent, of uniform thickness, smooth,
reasonably bright, continuous and free from imperfections such as flux, ash,
rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The zinc used for galvanising
shall be of grade Zn 99.95 as per IS: 209-1979.



Page-30
5.5.5 in case of castings, the same shall be from all internal defects like shrinkage
inclusion, blow holes, cracks etc.

5.5.6 All current carrying parts shall be so designed and manufactured that contact
resistance is reduced to minimum and localized heating phenomenon is averted.

5.5.7 No equipment shall have sharp ends or edges, abrasions or projections and shall
not cause any damage to the conductor in any way during erection or during
continuous operation which would produce high electrical and mechanical stresses
in normal working. The design of adjacent metal parts and mating surfaces shall be
such as to prevent corrosion of the contact surface and to maintain good electrical
contact under all service conditions.

5.5.8 Particular care shall be taken during manufacture and subsequent handling to
ensure smooth surface free from abrasion or cuts.

5.5.9 The fasteners shall conform to the requirements of IS: 6639-1972. All fasteners and
clamps shall have corona free locking arrangement to guard against vibration
loosening.

5.6 Compression Markings

Die compression areas shall be clearly marked on each equipment designed for
continuous die compressions and shall bear the words COMPRESS FIRST suitably
inscribed on each equipment where the compression begins. If the equipment is
designed for intermittent die compressions, it shall bear the identification marks
COMPRESSION ZONE and NON-COMPRESSION ZONE distinctly with arrow
marks showing the direction of compression and knurling marks showing the end of
the zones. The letters, number and other markings on finished equipment shall be
distinct and legible.

5.7 Bid Drawings

5.7.1 The successful Bidder shall submit 4 sets of following fully dimensional drawings
complete in all respect for approval to HVPNL as per time schedule given in Bar
Chart:-

5.7.2 The drawings shall include:

i) Dimensions and dimensional tolerences.

ii) Material, fabrication details including any weld details and any specified
finishes and coatings. Regarding material, designations and reference of
standards are to be indicated.

iii) Catalogue No.

iv) Marking

v) Weight of assembly

vi) Installation Instructions

vii) Design installation torque for the bolt or cap screw.
Page-31

viii) Withstand torque that may be applied to the bolt or cap screw without
failure of component parts.

ix) The compression die number with recommended compression pressure.

x) All other relevant technical details.


5.7.3 Placement charts for Vibration damper

5.7.4 The above drawings shall be submitted in five copies with all the details as
stated above along with the bid document. After the placement of award, the
Manufacturer shall again submit the drawings in four copies to the HVPN for
approval.

Table-III

Dimensions & Dimensional Tolerances for Mid Span Compression
Joint and Repair Sleeve for ACSR Zebra Conductor




Sr. No. Item Dimension before Dimensions
Compression after compression

Inner Outer Length Corner Face
dia. dia. To to
Corner face
width width
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)

1. Mid Span 310.5 481 7105
.
470.5 410.5
Compression
Joint Aluminum
Sleeve

Steel Sleeve 100.2 200.5 2405
.
190.5 160.5


2. Repair Sleeve 310.5 48 1 2755
.
470.5 410.5

..










32




6. EARTHWIRE ACCESSORIES FOR LINES WITH ACSR ZEBRA / PANTHER

5.1 General

5.1.1 This portion details the technical particulars of the accessories for Galvanized
Steel Earthwire.

5.1.2 2.5% extra fasteners shall be supplied.

5.2 Mid Span Compression Joint

Mid Span Compression Joint shall be used for joining two lengths of earthwire.
The joint shall be made of mild steel with aluminium encasing. The steel sleeve
should not crack or fail during compression. The Brinnel Hardness of stainless
steel should not exceed 200. The steel sleeve shall be hot dip galvanized. The
aluminium sleeve shall have aluminium of purity not less than 99.5%. Filler
aluminium sleeve shall also be provided at the both ends. The joints shall not
permit slipping off, damage to or failure of the complete earthwire or any part
thereof at a load not less than 95% of the ultimate tensile strength of the
earthwire. The joint shall have resistivity less than 75% of resistivity of
equivalent length of earthwire. The dimensions and the dimensional tolerances
of the joint shall be as per the table given below: -

...
Sr. No. Item Dimensions before Dimensions after
Compression Compression
...
Inner Outer Length Corner Face
Dia. Dia. To to
Corner face
Width width
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
...

1. Aluminium
Sleeve 220.5 300.5 3155 29.40.5 25.00.5

2. Steel
Sleeve 100.2 210.5 2305 20.20.5 17.50.5

3. Filler
Aluminium
Sleeve 11.50.2 210.5 252 - -

..


Page-33
6.3 Vibration Damper

6.3.1 Vibration dampers of 4R-Stockbridge type with four (4) different frequencies
spread within the specified aeolian frequency band-width corresponding to wind
speed of 1m/s to 7 m/s shall be used for suspension and tension points on
earthwire in each span to dampout aeolian vibrations as mentioned hereinafter.

6.3.2 Alternate damping systems offering equivalent or better performance also shall
be acceptable provided the manufacturer meets the qualifying requirements
stipulated in the Specifications. Relevant technical documents to establish the
technical suitability of alternate systems shall be furnished by the Bidder along
with the bid.

6.3.3 One damper minimum on each side per earthwire at suspension points and two
dampers on each side at tension points shall be used.

6.3.4 The Bidder may offer damping system involving more number of dampers per
ruling design span than the specified. However suitable price compensation
shall be considered for evaluation. For the purpose of price compensation 80%
of towers as suspension towers and 20% of the towers as tension locations and
all the spans shall be assumed to be ruling design spans.

6.3.5 The clamp of the vibration damper shall made of aluminium alloy. It shall be
capable of supporting the damper during installation and prevent damage or
chafing of the earthwire during erection or continued operation. The clamp shall
have smooth and permanent grip to keep the damper in position on the
earthwire without damaging the strands or causing premature fatigue failure of
the earthwire under the clamp. The clamp groove shall be in uniform contact
with the conductor over the entire clamping surface except for the rounded
edges. The groove of the clamp body and clamp cap shall be smooth, free from
projections, grit or materials which could cause damage to the earthwire when
the clamp is installed. Clamping bolts shall be provided with self locking nuts
designed to prevent corrosion of the threads or loosening during service.

6.3.6 The messenger cable shall be made of high strength galvanized steel/stainless
steel with a minimum strength of 135 Kg/sq. mm. It shall be of preformed and
post formed quality in order to prevent subsequent droop of weights and to
maintain consistent flexural stiffness of the cable in service. The number of
strands in the messenger cable shall be 19. The messenger cable ends shall
be suitably and effectively sealed to prevent corrosion.

6.3.7 The damper mass shall be made of hot dip galvanized mild steel/cast iron or a
permanent mould cast zinc alloy. All castings shall be free from defects such as
cracks, shrinkages, inclusions and blow holes etc. The inside and outside
surfaces of the damper masses shall be smooth.





Page-34





6.3.8 The vibration analysis of the system, with and without damper, dynamic
characteristic of the damper as detailed under Annexure-A, shall have to be
submitted by the Bidder along with his bid. The technical particulars for
vibration analysis and damping design of the system are as follows: -

...
Sr. No. Description Technical Particulars
...

1. Configuration : One galvanized steel Earthwire

2. Span length in meters : 132 kV Line

(i) Ruling design : 300 Meters
span

(ii) Maximum span : 1100 meters

(iii) Minimum span : 100 meters

3. Wind Zone : 4

(47m/s)
As per IS: 875-1987

4. Tensile load in Earthwire
at temperature of 0 deg. C : 1240 Kgf
and still air :

5. Maximum permissible : +/- 150 micro strains
Dynamic strain :

...

6.3.9 The damper placement chart for spans ranging from 100 m to 1100 m shall be
submitted by the Bidder. All the placement charts should be duly supported by
relevant technical documents.

6.3.10 The damper placement charts shall include the following: -

(1) Location of the dampers for various combinations of spans and line
tensions clearly indicating number of dampers to be installed per
earthwire.

(2) Placement distances clearly identifying the extremities between which
the distances are to be measured.

(3) Placement recommendation depending upon type of suspension (viz,
free centre type/trunion type etc.)

(4) The influence of mid span compression joints in the placement of
dampers.

Page-35
6.4 Flexible Copper Bond

The flexible copper bond shall be circular in cross-section of minimum 34 sq
mm equivalent copper area and not less than 500 mm in length. It shall consist
of 259 wires of 0.417 mm dia. tinned copper conductor. It shall be laid up as 7
stranded ropes, each of 37 bunched wires. The tinning shall be as per relevant
Standard. Two tinned copper connection lugs shall be press jointed to either of
the flexible copper cable. One lug shall be suitable for 12 mm, dia. Bolt and
other for 16 mm dia. bolt. The complete assembly shall also include one 16 mm
dia. 40 mm long HRH MS Bolt hot dip galvanized with nut and lock washer.

6.5 Suspension Clamp

6.5.1 Standard twisted shackle for earthwire suspension clamp shall be supplied
attaching to the hanger.

6.5.2 At all suspension towers, suitable suspension clamps shall be used to support
earthwire of 7/3.15 mm size. The clamps shall be of either free-centre type or
trunion and shall provide adequate area of support to the earthwire. The groove
of the camp shall be smooth, finished in an uniform circular or oval shape and
shall slope downwards in a smooth curve to avoid edge support and hence to
reducing the intensity of bending moment on earthwire.

6.5.3 There shall be no sharp point in the clamps coming in contact with earthwire.
There shall not be any displacement in the configuration of the earthwire
strands nor shall the strands be unduly stressed in final assembly during
working conditions.

6.5.4 The clamping piece and the clamp body shall be clamped by at least two U-
bolts of size not less than 10 mm diameter having one nut and one 3 mm thick
lock nut with washer on each of its limbs. Suspension clamps shall be provided
with invented type U-bolts. One limb of the U-bolts shall be long enough to
accommodate the lug of the flexible copper bond.

6.5.5 The Manufacturer shall supply al the components of the suspension assembly
including shackles, bolts, nuts, washers, split pin etc. The total drop of
suspension assembly from the centre point of the attachment to the centre
point of the earthwire shall not exceed 150 mm. The design of the assembly
shall be such that the direction of run of the earthwire shall be same as that of
the conductor.

6.5.6 The complete assembly shall be guaranteed for slip strength not less than 9 kN
and not more than 14 kN. The breaking strength of the assembly shall not less
than 25 kN.

6.6 Tension Camp

6.6.1 At all tension towers suitable compression type tension clamps shall be used to
hold 7/3.15 mm galvanized steel earthwire. Anchor shackle shall be supplied
which shall be suitable for attaching the tension clamp to strain plates.

6.6.2 The clamps shall have adequate area of bearing surface to ensure positive
electrical and mechanical contact and shall not permit any slip to the earthwire
under working tension and vibration conditions. The angle of jumper terminal to
be mounted should be 30 deg. with respect to the vertical line.
Page-36

6.6.3 The clamps shall be made of mild steel with aluminum encasing. The steel
should not crack or fail during compression. The Brinnel hardness of steel
sleeve shall not exceed 200. The steel sleeve shall be hot dip galvanized. The
aluminum encasing shall have aluminum of purity not less than 99.5% Filler
aluminum sleeve shall also be provided at the end.

6.6.4 The complete assembly shall be so designed as to avoid undue bending in any
part of the clamp and shall not produce any hindrance to the movements of the
clamps in horizontal or vertical directions.

6.6.5 The slip strength of the assembly shall not be less than 95% of the ultimate
strength of the earthwire.

6.6.6 The clamps shall be complete with all the components including anchor shackle
bolts, nuts, washers, split pin, jumper arrangement etc.

6.7 Material and Workmanship

Same as Clause 5.5 of this part of this section.

6.8 Compression Marking

Same as Clause 5.6 of this part of this section.

6.9 Bid Drawings

Same as Clause 5.7 of this part of this section.

7. Tests and Standards


7.1 The acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture shall be carried
out. For the purpose of this clause, the following shall apply: -

7.1.1 Acceptance Tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on
samples taken from each lot offered for pre-despatch inspection for the
purpose of acceptance of that lot.

7.1.2 Routine Tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on each item
of the material to check requirements, which are likely to vary during
production.

7.1.3 Tests during Manufacture shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out
during the process of manufacture and end inspection by the HVPNL to ensure
the desired quality of the end product to be supplied by him.

7.1.4 For all acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be the values guaranteed
by the Bidder in the data requirement sheets of this proposal or the acceptance
value specified in this Specification, whichever is more stringent for that
particular test.

Page-37

7.2 Type Tests
The equipment should be offered type tested. Test reports should not be more
than seven years old reckoned from the date of bid opening in respect of all the
tests carried out in accredited laboratories ( based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed
accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPNL or another electric power utility and
be submitted by the successful Bidder to HVPNL for approval as per schedule
given in Bar chart.

7.2.1 On Suspension Hardware Fittings only:

a. Slip strength test )
b. Mechanical test )
c. Verifications of dimensions ) IS: 2486 (Part-I)
d. Galvanizing )
e. Visual examination test )

f. Tensile Strength test )
g. Electrical resistance test )
h. Bend test for Armour Rod Set ) IS: 2121 (Part-I)
i. Resilient test for Armour Rod Set )

7.2.2 On Tension Hardware Fittings only: -

a. Slip strength test )
b. Mechanical test )
c. Verifications of dimensions ) IS: 2486 (Part-I)
d. Galvanizing )
e. Visual examination test )
f. Electrical Resistance test )
g. Heating cycle test )


7.2.3 Mid Span Compression Joint for Conductor and Earthwire:

a. Visual Examination )
b. Dimensional verification )
c. Failling Load test/Slip Strength test )
d. Electrical Resistance test )
e. Heating cycle test (Not Applicable for ) IS: 2121 (Part-II & III)
Earthwire) )
f. Galvanizing test )
g. Chemical composition test )

7.2.4 Repair Sleeves for Conductor:

a. Visual Examination )
b. Dimensional verification )
c. Failing Load set ) IS: 2121 (Part-II)
d. Electrical Resistance test )



Page-38


7.2.5 Flexible Copper Bond:

a. Visual Examination & Dimensional )
Verification )
b. Slip Strength test )
c. Chemical composition test ) IS: 2121 (Part-III)
d. Galvanizing test )

7.2.6 Vibration Damper for Conductor & Earthwire:

a. Visual examination )
b. Verification of dimensions )
c. Resonance frequency test )
d. Fatigue test )
e. Mass pull off test )
f. Dynamic characteristics test ) IS: 9708-1993
g. Damping efficiency test )
h. Clamp slip test )
i. Clamp bolt torque test )
j. Galvanizing/electroplating test )
k. Magnetic power loss test )

7.2.7 Earthwire Suspension Clamp Assembly:

a. Visual examination & Dimensional )
verification )
b. Slip strength test )
c. Mechanical strength test ) IS: 2121 (Part-III)
d. Chemical composition test )
e. Galvanizing test )

7.2.8 Earth Tension Clamp Assembly:

a. Visual examination & Dimensional )
verification )
b. Electrical resistance test )
c. Mechanical strength test ) IS: 2121(Part-III)
d. Chemical composition test )
e. Galvanizing test )







Page-39

7.3 Acceptance Tests

7.3.1 On Both Suspension and Tension Hardware Fittings

a. Visual Examination )
) IS: 2486-(Part-I)
b. Verification of dimensions ) Clause 5.8& 5.9
)
c. Galvanizing/Electroplating test )

d. Mechanical strength test of each component )
(excluding arcing horn) ) Annexure-A
)
e. Mechanical Strength test of welded joint )

f) Mechanical strength test for corona ) BS: 3288-(Part-I)
control rings/grading ring and arcing horn ) Clause 7.3.2

g. Test on locking device for ball and socket ) IEC:372 (2)-1984
coupling )

h. Chemical analysis, hardness tests, )
grain size, inclusion rating & magnetic ) Annexure-A
particle inspection forgings /castings )

7.3.2 On Suspension Hardware Fittings Only

a. Clamp Slip strength Vs Torque ) Annexure-A
test for suspension clamp )
)
b. Shore hardness test of )
Elastomer cushion for AG )
Suspension clamp )

c. Bend test for Armour rod set ) IS: 2121 (Part-I)
) Clause 7.5, 7.10,7.11
d. Resilience test for Armour )
Rod set )
)
e. Conductivity test for Armour )
rods set )

7.3.3 On Tension Hardware Fittings Only

a. Slip strength test for ) IS:2486 (Part-I)
Dead end assembly ) 1971,Clause 5.4

7.3.4 Mid Span Compression Joint for Conductor and Earthwire

a. Visual examination and dimensional ) IS: 2121 (Part-II)
verification ) Clause 6.2, 6.3 & 6.7
)
b. Galvanizing test )

c. Hardness test ) Annexure-B
Page-40

7.3.5 Repair Sleeve for Conductor

a. Visual examination and ) IS: 2121 (Part-II)
dimensional verification ) Clause 6.2, 6.3.

7.3.6 Flexible Copper Bond

a. Visual examination and ) IS: 2121 (Part-II)
dimensional verification ) Clause 6.2, 6.3.


b. Slip strength test ) Annexure-B

7.3.7 Vibration Damper for Conductor and Earthwire

a. Visual examination and )
dimensional verification )
) IS: 2121 (Part-II)
) Clause 6.2, 6.3, & 6.7
)
b. Galvanizing test )
)
i. On damper masses )
)
ii. On messenger cable )

c. Verification of resonance )
frequencies )
) Annexure-B
d. Clamp slip test )
)
e. Clamp bolt torque test )
)
f. Strength of the messenger )
cable )

g. Mass pull off test )
) Annexure-B
h. Dynamic characteristics test )
(To be conducted as a special test
once against complete supply)

7.3.8 Earthwire Suspension Clamp Assembly

a. Visual examination and ) IS; 2121 (Part-II)
dimensional verification )
)
b. Galvanizing test )

c. Clamp slip strength test )
) Annexure-A
d. Mechanical strength test )
on each component )
Page-41


7.3.9 Earthwire Tension Clamp Assembly

a. Visual examination and )
dimensional verification ) IS: 2121 (Part-II)
)
b. Galvanizing test )
)

c. Slip strength test ) Annexure-A
for tension clamp )
)
d. Mechanical strength )
test on each component )
(excluding clamp) )
)
e. Hardness test )

7.4 Routine Tests

7.4.1 For Hardware Fittings

a. Visual examination ) IS: 2486 (Part-I) 1971

b. Proof Load Test ) Annexure-A

7.4.2 For Conductor and Earthwire Accessories

a. Visual examination and ) IS: 2121 (Part-II)1981
dimensional verification ) Clause 6.2 & 6.3


7.5 Tests During Manufacture

On all components as applicable

a. Chemical analysis )
of zinc used for )
galvanizing )
)
)
b. Chemical analysis )
mechanical metallographic )
test and magnetic particle ) Annexure-A
inspection for malleable )
castings. )
)
c. Chemical analysis )
hardness tests and )
magnetic particle )
inspection for forgings )


Page-42
8.0 Testing Expenses

The entire cost of acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture
specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted Ex-works/price except for
the expenses of the Inspector/HVPNL representative.

9.0 Schedule of Testing and Additional Tests

9.1 The Bidder has to indicate the schedule of following activities in their bids.

a. Submission of drawing for approval.
b. Submission of Quality Assurance programme for approval.

9.2 The HVPNL reserves the right of having at his own expense another test(s) of
reasonable nature carried out at Manufacturers premises, at site, or in any other
place in addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests to satisfy himself
that the material comply with the specifications.

9.3 The HVPNL also reserves the right to conduct all the tests mentioned in this
specification at his own expense on the samples drawn from the site at Manufacturers
premises or at any other test center. In case of evidence of non compliance, it shall be
binding on the part of Manufacturer to prove the compliance of the items to the
technical specifications by repeat tests, or correction of deficiencies, or replacement of
defective items all without any extra cost to the HVPNL.

9.4 Co-ordination for testing

The Manufacturer shall have to co-ordinate testing of hardware fittings with insulators
and shall have to also guarantee overall satisfactory performance of the hardware
fittings with the insulators.

9.5 Tests Reports

9.5.1 Record of routine test report shall be maintained by the Manufacturer at his
works for periodic inspection by the HVPNL representative.

9.5.2 Test certificates of tests during manufacture shall be maintained by the
Manufacturer. These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by
the HVPNL.

9.6 Inspection

9.6.1 The HVPNL representative shall at all times be entitled to have access to the works
and all places of manufacture, where the material and/or its component parts shall be
manufactured and the representatives shall have full facilities for unrestricted
inspection of the Manufacturers, sub-Manufacturers works, raw materials,
manufacturers of all the material and for conducting necessary tests as detailed
herein.

9.6.2 The material from final inspection shall be offered by the Manufacturer only under
packed condition as detailed in clause 5.12 of this part of the Specification. The
engineer shall select samples at random from the packed lot for carrying out
acceptance tests.The Manufacturer shall keep the HVPNL informed in advance of the
time of starting and of the progress of manufacture of material in its various stages so
that arrangements could be made for inspection.
Page-43

9.6.3 Material shall not be despatched from its point of manufacture before it has
been satisfactorily inspected and tested, unless the inspection is waived off by
the HVPNL in writing. In the latter case also the material shall be despatched
only after all tests specified herein have been satisfactorily completed.

9.6.4 The acceptance of any quantity of accessories shall in no way relieve the
Manufacturer of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the
Specification, and shall not prevent subsequent rejection, if such material are
later found to be defective.

9.7 Packing and Marking

9.7.1 All material shall be packed in strong and weather resistant wooden
cases/crates. The gross weight of the packing shall not normally exceed 200 kg
to avoid handling problems.

9.7.2 The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during
transit, storage at site and subsequent handling in the field.

9.7.3 Suitable cushioning, protective padding, dunnage or spacers shall be provided
to prevent damage or deformation during transit and handling.

9.7.4 Bolts, nuts, washers, cotter pins, security clips and split pins etc. shall be
packed duly installed and assembled with the respective parts and suitable
measures shall be used to prevent their loss.

9.7.5 Each component part shall be legibly and indelibly marked with trademark of
the manufacturer and year of manufacture.

9.7.6 All the packing cases shall be marked legibly and correctly so as to ensure safe
arrival at their destination and to avoid the possibility of goods being lost or
wrongly despatched on account of faulty packing and faulty or illegible
markings. Each wooden case/crate shall have all the markings stencilled on it
in indelible ink.

10 Standard

10.1 The Hardware fittings; conductor and earthwire accessories shall conform to
the following Indian/International Standard which shall mean latest revisions,
with amendments/changes adopted and published, unless specifically stated
otherwise in the Specification.






Page-44

10.2 In the event of the supply of hardware fittings, accessories conforming to standards
other than specified, the Bidder shall confirm in his bid that these standards are
equivalent to those specified. In case of award, salient features of comparison
between the Standards proposed by the Manufacturer and those specified in this
document will be provided by the Manufacturer to establish their equivalence.


Sr. No. Indian Standard Title International
Standards


1. IS: 209-1992 Specification for BS: 3436-
Zinc 1986

2. IS: 398-1992 Specification for IEC: 1089-
Aluminium condu- 1991
ctors for Overhead
Transmission purpose

Part-V Aluminum Conductor IEC: 1089-
Galvanised Steel- 1991
Reinforced for
Extra High Voltage
(400 kV ) and above


3. IS: 1573-1976 Electroplated Coat-
ing of Zinc on Iron
and Steel.

4. IS: 2121-1981 Specification for
Part-I Conductor and
Earthwire Accessories
For Overhead Power
Line.

Part-II Mid span joints and
Repair Sleeves for
Conductors

5. IS: 2486 Specification for
Insulator Fittings for
Overhead power line
With Nominal voltage
Greater than 1000 V

Part-I, 1991 General requirements
And tests

6. IS: 2629-1990 Recommended Practice
for Hot Dip Galvanising
of Iron and Steel

Page-45

7. IS: 2633-1990 Method of Testing Uniformity
of Coating on Zinc Coated
Articles

8. Ozone test on Elastomer ASTM-D1171


9. Tests on insulators of IEC:383-1993
Ceramic material or glass
For overhead line with a
Nominal voltage greater
Than 1000 V

10. IS: 4826-1992 Galvanized Coating ASTM A472-
on rounded steel wires 729 BS: 443-
1969

11. IS: 6745-1990 Methods of Determi- BS: 433-1969
nation of weight of ISO: 1460
zinc coating of zinc
coated iron and steel
articles

12. IS: 6639-1990 Hexagonal bolts for ISO/R272
steel structures 1968

13. IS: 9708-1980 Specification for stock
bridge vibration dampers
for overhead power line

14. IS: 8263-1990 Method of radio interfere- IEC: 437-1973
nce tests on high voltage NEMA: 107-1964
insulators. CIS PR















Page-46

The standard mentioned above are available from:


Reference Abbreviation Name and Address


BS British Standards, British
Standards Institution 101,
Pentonvile Road, N-19-ND
UK

IEC/CISPR International Electrotechnical
Commission, Bureau Central
De la Commission, Electro
Technique International, 1
Rue de verembe, Geneva
Switzerland

BIS/IS Bureau of Indian Standards,
Mank Bhavan,-9, Bahadur
Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi
110001, INDIA

ISO International Organisation for
Standardization, Danish Board
Of Standardization Danish
Standardising Sraat,
Aurehoegvej- 12
DK-2900, Heeleprup,
DENMARK.

NEMA National Electric Manufacture
Association, 155, East 44
th

Street,
New York, NY 10017
U.S.A.







Page-47
ANNEXURE-A
TYPE TEST

1.0 Test on Complete Strings with Hardware Fittings

1.1 Voltage Distribution Test For Insulator String with Disc Insulators

The voltage across each insulator unit shall be measured by sphere gap
method. The result obtained shall be converted into percentage. The voltage
across any disc shall not exceed 20% for suspension insulator strings and 22%
for tension insulator strings.

1.2 Mechanical Strength Test

The complete insulator string along with its hardware fitting excluding arcing
horns and suspension assembly/dead end assembly shall be subjected to a
load equal to 50% of the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength (UTS)
which shall be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the minimum UTS
specified. The load shall be held for five minutes and then removed. After
removal of the load, the string components shall not show any visual
deformation and it shall be possible to disassemble them by hand. Hand tools
may be used to remove cotter pins and loosen the nuts initially. The string shall
then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be further
increased at a steady rate till the specified minimum UTS and held for one
minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The applied load shall then
be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.

1.3 Vibration Test

The suspension string shall be tested in suspension mode, and tension string
in tension mode itself in laboratory span of minimum 30 metres. In the case of
suspension string a load equal to 600 kg shall be applied along the axis of the
suspension string by means of turn buckle. The insulator string along with
hardware fittings and conductors tensioned at 2530 kgf in respect of 132kV
strings with ACSR Panther Conductor shall be secured with clamps. The
system shall be suitable to maintain constant tension on conductor throughout
the duration of the test. Vibration dampers shall not be used on the test span.
The conductor shall be vertically vibrated at one of the resonance frequencies
of the insulators string (more than 10 Hz) by means of vibration inducing
equipment. The peak to peak, displacement in mm of vibration at the antinode
point nearest to the string shall be measured and the same shall not be less
than 1000/f
1.8
where f is the frequency of vibration in cycles/sec. The insulator
string shall be vibrated for not less than 10 million cycles without any failure.
After the test the disc insulators shall be examined for looseness of pins and
cap or any crack in the cement. The hardware shall be examined for looseness,
fatigue failure and mechanical strength test. There shall be no deterioration of
properties of hardware components and insulators after the vibration test. The
insulators shall be subjected to the following tests as per relevant standards:



Page-48



Tests Percentage of insulator
Units to be tested

Disc

a) Temperature cycle test 60
followed by mechanical
performance test

b) Puncture test 40


2. Tests on Hardware Fittings

2.1 Magnetic Power Loss Test for Suspension Assembly

One hollow aluminum tube of diameter equivalent to conductor Dia shall be placed.
An alternating current over the range of 200 to 500 amps for ACSR Panther shall be
passed through the tube. The reading of the wattmeter with and without suspension
assemblies shall be recorded. Not less than three suspension assemblies shall be
tested. The average power loss for suspension assembly shall be plotted for each
value of current. The value of the loss corresponding to 350 amperes for 132kV
Suspension assembley shall be read off from the graph.

2.2 Galvanising/Electroplating Test

The test shall be carried out as per Clause no. 5.9 of IS: 2486 (Part-I) 1972 except
that both uniformity of zinc coating and standard preece test shall be carried out and
the results obtained shall satisfy the requirements of this specification.

2.3 Mechanical Strength Test of Each Component

Each component shall be subjected to a load equal to the specified minimum ultimate
tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the
minimum UTS specified. The load shall be held for five minutes and then removed.
The component shall then again be loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be
further increased at a steady rate till the specified UTS and held for one minute. No
fracture should occur. The applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is
reached and the value recorded.

2.4 Mechanical Strength Test of Welded Joint

The welded portion of the component shall be subjected to a Load of 2000 kgs for one
minute. Thereafter, it shall be subjected to die penetratration/ultrasonic test. There
shall not be any crack at the welded portion.


Page-49

2.5 Clamp Slip Strength Vs Torque Test for Suspension Clamp

The suspension assembly shall be vertically suspended by means of a flexible
attachment. A suitable length of Conductor shall be fixed in the clamp. The clamp slip
strength at various tightening torques shall be obtained by gradually applying the load
at one end of the conductor. The clamp slip strength vs torque curve shall be drawn.
The above procedure is applicable only for free centre type suspension clamp. For AG
suspension clamp only clamp slip strength after assembly shall be found out. The
clamp slip strength at the recommended tightening torque shall be more than 11 kN
but less than 16 kN.

2.6 Shore Hardness Test for Elastomer Cushion for AG Suspension Assembly

The shore hardness at various points on the surface of the elastomer cushion shall
be measured by a shore hardness meter and the shore hardness number shall be
between 65 to 80.

2.7 Proof Load Test

Each component shall be subjected to a load equal to 50% of the specified minimum
ultimate tensile strength which shall be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the
minimum UTS specified. The load shall be held for one minute and then removed.
After removal of the load the component shall not show any visual deformation.

2.8 Tests for Forging Casting and Fabricated Hardware

The chemical analysis, hardness test, grain size, inclusion rating and magnetic
particle inspection for forging, castings and chemical analysis and proof load test for
fabricated hardware shall be as per the internationally recognized procedures for
these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch.
The details regarding test will be as in the Quality Assurance programme.

2.9 Mechanical Strength Test for Suspension/Tension Hardware Fittings

The complete string without insulators excluding arcing horn, and suspension
assembly/dead end assembly shall be subjected to a load equal to 50% of the
specified minimum ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a
steady rate to 67% of the minimum UTS specified. This load shall be held for five
minutes and then removed. After removal of the load, the string component shall not
show any visual deformation and it shall be possible to disassemble them by hand.
Hand tools may be used to remove cotter pins and loosen the nuts initially. The
string shall then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be
further increased at a steady rate till the specified minimum UTS is reached and held
for the one minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The applied load
shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.

2.10 Ozone Test for Elastomer

This test shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D-1171 by the Ozone
chamber exposure method (method B). The test duration shall be 500 hours and the
ozone concentration 50 PPHM. At the test completion, there shall be no visible crack
under a 2 x magnification.
Page-50

3.1 Mid Span Compression Joint for Conductor and Earthwire

(a) Slip Strength Test

The fitting compressed on conductor/earthwire shall not be less than one metre
in length. The test shall be carried out as per IS: 2121-(Part-II)-1981 clause 6.4
except that the load shall be steadily increased to 95% of minimum ultimate
tensile strength of conductor/earthwire and retained for one minute at this load.
There shall be no movement of the conductor/earthwire relative to the fittings
and no failure of the fittings during this one minute period.

3.2 Flexible Copper Bond

(a) Slip Strength Test

On applying a load of 3 kN between the two ends, stranded flexible copper
cable shall not come out of the connecting lugs and none of its strands shall be
damaged. After the test, the lugs shall be cut open to ascertain that the gripping
of cable has not been affected.

3.3 Vibration Damper for Conductor

(a) Dynamic Characteristics Test

The damper shall be mounted with its clamp tightened with torque
recommended by the manufacturer on shaker table capable of simulating
sinusoidal vibrations for aeolian vibration frequency band ranging from 8 to
60Hz for damper for conductor. The damper assembly shall be vibrated
vertically with a 1 mm amplitude from 5 to 15 Hz frequency and beyond 15 Hz
at 0.5 mm to determine following characteristics with the help of suitable
recording instruments:

i. Force Vs frequency

ii. Phase angle Vs frequency

iii. Power dissipation Vs frequency


The Force Vs frequency curve shall not show steep peaks at resonance frequencies
and deep troughs between the resonance frequencies. The consonance frequencies
shall be suitably spread within the aeolian vibration frequency-band between the lower
and upper dangerous frequency limits determined by the vibration analysis of
conductor/earthwire without dampers.

Acceptance criteria for vibration damper.

(i) The above dynamic characteristics test on five damper shall be conducted.

(ii) The mean reactance and phase angle Vs frequency curves shall be drawn with
the criteria of best fit method.
Page-51


(iii) The above mean reactance response curve should lie within 0.099f to 0.495f
Kgf/mm limits for ACSR Panther conductor damper

(iv) The above mean phase angle response curve shall be between 25
0
to 130
0

within the frequency range of interest.

(v) If the above curve lies within the envelope, the damper design shall be
considered to have successfully met the requirement.

(vi) Visual resonance frequencies of each mass of damper is to be recorded and to
be compared with the guaranteed values.

(b) Vibration Analysis

The vibration analysis of the conductor/earthwire shall be done with and without
damper installed on the span. The vibration analysis shall be done on a digital
computer using energy balance approach. The following parameters shall be
taken into account for the purpose of analysis:

(i) The analysis shall be done for single conductor/earthwire without
armour rods as per the parameters given under clause 2.4.13 and 3.3.8
of this part of the Specification. The tension shall be taken as 2530 kgf
for ACSR Panther for a span ranging from 100m to 1100m.

(ii) The self damping factor and flexural stiffness (EI) for conductor shall be
calculated on the basis of experimental results. The details for
experimental analysis with these data should be furnished.

(iii) The power dissipation curve obtained from Dynamic Characteristics
Test shall be used for analysis with damper.

(iv) Examine the Aeolian vibration level of the conductor/earthwire with and
without vibration damper installed at the recommended location or wind
velocity ranging from 0 to 30 Km per hour, predicting amplitude,
frequency and vibration energy input.

(v) From vibration analysis of conductor without damper, antinode vibration
amplitude and dynamic strain levels at clamped span extremities as well
as antinodes shall be examined and thus lower and upper dangerous
frequency limits between which the Aeolian vibration levels exceed the
specified limits shall be determined.

(vi) From vibration analysis of conductor with damper/dampers installed at
the recommended location, the dynamic strain level at the clamped
span extremities, damper attachment point and the antinodes on the
conductor/earthwire shall be determined. In addition to above damper
clamp vibration amplitude and antinode vibration amplitudes shall also
be examined.

The dynamic strain levels at damper attachment points, clamped span
extremities and antinodes shall not exceed the specified limits. The
damper clamp vibration amplitude shall not be more than that of the
specified fatigue limits.
Page-52

(c) Clamp Slip and Fatigue Tests

(i) Test Set Up

The clamp slip and fatigue tests shall be conducted on a laboratory set
up with a minimum effective span length of 30m. The conductor shall be
tensioned at 2530 kgf and shall not be equipped with protective
armoured rods at any point. Constant tension shall be maintained within
the span by means of lever arm arrangement. After the
conductor/earthwire has been tensioned, clamps shall be installed to
support the conductor at both ends and thus influence of connecting
hardware fittings are eliminated from the free span. The clamps shall not
be used for holding the tension on the conductor/earthwire. There shall
be no loose parts, such as suspension clamps, U bolts, on the test span
supported between clamps mentioned above. The span shall be
equipped with vibration inducting equipment suitable for producing
steady standing vibration. The inducting equipment shall have facilities
for step less speed control as well as stepless amplitude arrangement.
Equipment shall be available for measuring the frequency, cumulative
number of cycles and amplitude of vibration at any point along the span.

(ii) Clamp Slip Test

The vibration damper shall be installed on the test span. The damper
clamp, after tightening with the manufacturers specified tightening
torque, when subjected to a longitudinal pull of 2.5 kN parallel to the axis
of conductor for a minimum duration of one minute shall not slip i.e. the
permanent displacement between conductor/earthwire and clamp
measured after removal of the load shall not exceed 1.0 mm. The load
shall be further increased till the clamp starts slipping. The load at which
the clamp slips shall not be more than 5 kN.

(iii) Fatigue Test

The vibration damper shall be installed on the test span with the
manufacturers specified tightening torque. It shall be ensured that the
damper shall be kept minimum three loops away from the shaker to
eliminate stray signals influencing damper movement.

The damper shall then be vibrated at the highest resonant frequency of
each damper mass. For dampers involving torsional resonant
frequencies tests shall be done at torsional modes also in addition to the
highest resonant frequencies at vertical modes. The resonance
frequency shall be identified as the frequency at which each damper
mass vibrates with the maximum amplitude on itself. The amplitude of
vibration of the damper clamp shall be maintained not less than 25/f
mm, where f is the frequency in Hz.

The test shall be conducted for minimum ten million cycles at each
resonant frequency mentioned above. During the test if resonance shift
is observed the test frequency shall be tuned to the new resonant
frequency.

Page-53


The clamp slip test as mentioned hereinabove shall be repeated after
fatigue test without retorquing or adjusting the damper clamp, and the
clamp shall withstand a minimum load equal to 80% of the slip strength
for a minimum duration of one minute.

After the above tests, the damper shall be removed from conductor and
subjected to dynamic characteristics test. There shall not be any major
deterioration in the characteristic of the damper. The damper then shall
be cut open and inspected. There shall not be any broken, loose, or
damaged part. There shall not be significant deterioration or wear of the
damper. The conductor/earthwire under clamp shall also be free from
any damage.

For the purpose of acceptance, the following criteria shall be applied.

(1) There shall not be any frequency shift by more than 2 Hz for
frequencies lower than 15 Hz and 3 Hz for frequencies higher
than 15 Hz.

(2) The force response curve shall generally lie within guaranteed %
variation in reactance after fatigue test in comparison with that
before fatigue test by the Manufacturer.

(3) The power dissipation of the damper shall not be less than
guaranteed % variation in power dissipation before fatigue test by
the Manufacturer. However, it shall not be less than minimum
power dissipation which shall be governed by lower limits of
reactance and phase angle indicated in the envelope.

3.4 Magnetic Power Loss Test for Vibration Damper

The sample involving ferrous parts shall be tested in a manner to
simulate service conditions for 50 Hz pure sine-wave. The test should be
carried out at various currents ranging from 200 to 500 amperes and the
magnetic power loss at various currents should be specified in tabulated
graphical form. The difference between the power losses without and
with sample at room temperature shall be limited to 1 watt for 350
amperes. The losses shall be determined by averaging the observations
obtained from at least four samples.


3.5 Chemical Analysis Test

Chemical analysis of the material used for manufacture of items shall be
conducted to check the conformity of the same with Technical
Specification and approved drawing.

Page-54







4. Test on All components (As applicable)

4.1 Chemical Analysis of Zinc used for Galvanizing

Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analysed as per
IS: 209-1979. The purity of zinc shall not be less than 99.95%.

4.2 Tests for Forgings

The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection
for forgings, will be as per the internationally recognized procedures for
these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat
treatment batch. The details regarding test will be as discussed and
mutually agreed to by the Manufacturer and HVPNL in Quality
Assurance Programme.

4.3 Tests on Castings

The chemical analysis, mechanical and metallographic tests and
magnetic particle inspection for castings will be as per the internationally
recognized procedures for these tests. The samplings will be based on
heat number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding test will be
as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Manufacturer and HVPNL in
Quality Assurance Programme.

















Page-55


ANNEXURE-B

Acceptance Tests

1. Mid Span Compression Joint for Conductor and Earthwire

(a) Hardness Test

The Brinnel hardness at various points on the steel sleeve of conductor
core and of the earthwire compression joint and tension clamp shall be
measured.

2. Flexible Copper Bond

(b) Slip Strength Test

Same as clause 3.2 (a) of Annexure-A.

3. Vibration Damper for Conductor

(a) Verification of Reasonance Frequencies

The damper shall be mounted on a shaker table and vibrate at damper
clamp displacement of +/0.5 mm to determine the resonance
frequencies. The resonance shall be visually identified as the frequency
at which damper mass vibrates with maximum displacement on itself.
The resonance frequency thus identified shall be compared with the
guaranteed value. A tolerance of 1 Hz at a frequency lower than 15 Hz
and 2 Hz at a frequency higher than 15 Hz only shall be allowed.

(b) Clamp Slip Test

Same as Clause 3.3 (c) (ii) of Annexure A.

(c) Clamp Bolt Torque Test

The clamp shall be attached to a section of the conductor/earthwire. A
torque of 150 % of the manufacturers specified torque shall be applied
to the bolt. There shall be no failure of component parts. The test set up
is as described in Clause 3.3 (c) (i), Annexure-A.

(d) Strength of the Messenger Cable

The messenger cable shall be fixed in a suitable tensile testing machine
and the tensile load shall be gradually applied until yield point is
reached. The load shall be not less than the value guaranteed by the
Manufacturer.


Page-56
(e) Mass Pull of Test

Each mass shall be pulled off in turn by fixing the mass in one jaw and
the clamp in the other of a suitable tensile testing machine. The
longitudinal pull shall be applied gradually until the mass begins to pull
out of the messenger cable. The pull off loads shall not be less than the
value guaranteed by the Manufacturer.

(f) Dynamic Characteristics Test

The test will be performed as acceptance test with the procedure
mentioned for type test with sampling mentioned below: -


Vibration Damper of
Conductor
- 1 Sample for 1000 Nos. & below.
- 3 Samples for lot above 1000 & up to
5000 nos.

- Additional 1 sample for every additiona
1500 pieces above 5000.

The Acceptance criteria will be as follows :

(i) The above dynamic characteristics curve for reactance & phase angle
will be done for frequency range of 8 Hz to 60 Hz for vibration damper
for conductor

(ii) If all the individual curve for dampers are within the envelope as already
mentioned for type test for reactance & phase angle, the lot passes the
test.

(iii) If individual results do not fall within the envelope, averaging of
characteristics shall be done.

(a) Force of each damper corresponding to particular frequency shall
be taken & average force of three dampers at the frequency
calculated.

(b) Similar averaging shall be done for phase angle.

(c) Average force Vs frequency and average phase Vs frequency
curves shall be plotted on graph paper. Curves of best fit shall be
drawn for the entire frequency range.

(d) The above curves shall be within the envelope specified.





Page-57
STANDARD FIELD QUALITY PLAN FOR TRANSMISSION LINES page 1
S.
No
.
Descriptio
n of
Activity

Items to be
Checked
Tests/Checks
to be done
Ref.
documents
Check/Testing Counter Check/Test
by HVPNL
Accepting
authority
Agency Extent
1. Detailed
Survey
a. Route
alignment
Optimization of
route length
a. Preliminary
survey.
b.Topographical
map
c. Tower
spotting data
Bidder



100% at Field



100% based on record
documents


Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
b. Route
profiling &
tower
spotting.
1. Ground
clearance.
2. Cold wt.
Span
3. Hot wt.
Span
4. Sum of Adj.
Span (wind
span)
5. Angle of
Deviation.
a. Sag template
b. Tower
Spotting data
c. Route
alignment
Bidder
-do-
-do-
-do-

-do-
100% at Field
-do-
-do-
-do-

-do-
100% based on record
documents
-do-
-do-

-do-
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
2. Check
Survey
Tower
Location &
Final Length
i) Alignment
ii) Final Length
a. Route
alignment
b. Tower
Schedule
c. Profile
Bidder
-do-
100% at Field
-do-
i) All angle towers in
plains and 50% in
hilly terrains.
ii) Final length to be
checked on 100%
basis based on
records/documents
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL

3. Tower
Foundation


A. Materials
1. Cement
( 43 grade) as
per Annexure-
A
1. Source
approval
Source meeting
HVPNL
Specification/Ap
proved vendor
Bidder As proposed
by Bidder
To verify the proposal
based on the supply
made and factory test
results.
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL








S.
No
.
Descripti
on of
Activity
Items to be
Checked
Tests/Checks
to be done
Ref.
documents
Check/Testing Counter Check/Test
by HVPNL
Accepting
authority
Agency Extent
2. Physical
tests
As per
document at
Annexure-A of
this FQP
Samples to be
taken jointly with
HVPNL and
tested at HVPNL
approved lab
Review of all MTCs
and one sample for
every 500 MT
100% review of lab
test results
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
3. Chemical
Tests
Chemical
composition
of Cement
-do- Bidder to submit
MTC
100% review of MTC
by Bidder
100% review of MTC Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
2.
Reinforcem
ent Steel
1. Source
approval
To be procured
from main
producers only.
Bidder As proposed by
Bidder
To review the
proposal based on the
documents.
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
2. Physical
and
Chemical
analysis test
As per
annexure-B
Bidder to submit
MTC
All MTCs 100% review of MTC Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
3. Coarse
Aggregates
1. Source
approval
Source meeting
HVPNL
Specification
Bidder Proposed by the
Bidder, indicating the
location of the quarry
and based on the test
results of Joint
samples tested in
approved lab
To review the
proposal based on the
documents
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
2. Physical
tests
As per
document at
Annexure-C of
this FQP
Samples to be
taken jointly and
tested in HVPNL
approved lab
One sample per lot of
200 cum or part
thereof
100% review of lab
test results
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
4. Fine
aggregate
1. Source
approval
Source meeting
HVPNL
Specification
Bidder Proposed by the
Bidder, indicating the
location of the quarry
and based on the
results of Joint
samples tested in
HVPNL approved lab.
To review the
proposal based on the
documents.
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL


Page 2
S.
No
.
Descriptio
n of
Activity
Items to be
Checked
Tests/Checks
to be done
Ref. documents Check/Testing Counter Check/Test
by HVPNL
Accepting
authority
Agency Extent
2. Physical test As per
Annexure-D of
this FQP
Samples to be taken
jointly and tested in
HVPNL approved
lab
One sample per
lot of 200 cum or
part thereof
100% review of lab test
results
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
5. Water 1. Cleanliness
(Water shall
be fresh ,
clean and
potable)
HVPNL
Specification
Bidder 100% visual check
at Field
1. Verification at
random
2. Lab. test before start
of work
from approved Lab.
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
2. Suitability of
water for
concreting
HVPNL
Specification
Bidder 100% Visual
Check
at Field
1. Verification at
random
2. Lab. test before start
of work
from approved Lab.
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL

B.
Foundation
Classification
1. Visual
observation
of soil strata
2. Ground
water level
3. History of
water table
in adj.
Area/surface
water
4. Soil
Investigation
wherever
required.
5 Crop pattern
HVPNL
Specification
Bidder 100% at Field 100% at Field

Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL


C. Concrete
Works
a. Before
concreting


1. Bottom of
excavated
earth
Depth of
foundation
Appd. Drgs. Bidder 100% at Field 100% check by HVPNL Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL

2. Stub setting
1) Centre Line -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-


2) Diagonals

3.
Reinforcem
ent steel
3) Level of
stubs


b. During
concreting
Placement Bar bending
schedule
-do- -do- -do- -do-


Page 3
S.
No
.
Descriptio
n of
Activity
Items to be
Checked
Tests/Checks
to be done
Ref. documents Check/Testing Counter Check/Test
by HVPNL
Accepting
authority
Agency Extent
1. Workability Slump test As per HVPNL
Specification and
document at
Annexure-E of this
FQP
Bidder 100% at field 20% check at random Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
2. Concrete
Strength
Cubes Comp
Strength
As per HVPNL
Specification and
document at
Annexure-E of this
FQP
Casting of cubes
at site. Cubes to
be tested at
HVPNL appd. Lab
for 7 days & 28
days strength
One sample of 6
cubes in each
tower locations
100% review of lab test
results. Cubes at 20%
location are to be taken
in presence of HVPNL
officials
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
4. Tower
Erection
1. Materials
a. Tower
member/bolts
&
nuts/washers/
accessories
Visual checking
for
1. Stacking
2. Cleanliness
3. Galvanizing
4. Damages
Appd. Drgs./BOM Bidder 100% at stores 100% verification of
records
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
2. Erection of
Super-
structure
1. Sequence of
erection
As per approved
Drgs./HVPNL
specification
Bidder 100% at field 100% check Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
2. Check for
completenes
s
-do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
3. Tightening of
nuts and
bolts
-do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
4. Check for
verticality
-do- -do- -do- -do- -do-

5. Tack welding
for bolts &
nuts
HVPNL
Specification
Bidder 100% at Field 100% Check
---do---

3. Tower
footing
resistance
(TFR)
TFR at
locations before
and after
earthing.
HVPNL
Specification
Bidder 100% at Field 20% locations to be
verified
---do---
Page-4
S.
No
.
Descriptio
n of
Activity
Items to be
Checked
Tests/Checks
to be done
Ref. documents Check/Testing Counter Check/Test
by HVPNL
Accepting
authority
Agency Extent
5. Stringing 1. Materials
a. Insulators
1. Visual check
for
cleanliness/glaz
ing/cracks/and
white spots.
HVPNL
Specification
Bidder 100% at Field
100% verification of
records and to carry
random checks 10%
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
2. IR Value (min. 50M Ohms) -do- One test per sample
size of 20 for every
lot of 10,000
To verify Bidders
records 100% and joint
check 20% of total
tests
-do-
3. E&M test - Insulator
supplier
a. 20 per 10,000 for
discs
b. 3 per 1500 for long
rod
Collection of samples,
sealing them and
handing over by
HVPNL to Insulator
supplier
Inspecting
officer of
HVPNL

Traceability(Ma
ke/batch
No./Locations
where installed)
Packing list/CIP Bidder 100% at field 100% Review of
records
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
b. Conductor
On receipt,
1. Visual check
of drum.
Packing list Bidder 100% at stores 20% check
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL

2. Check for
seals at both
ends, and
HVPNL sticker
on outer end
-do- -do- -do- -do- -do-

3. Check depth
from top of
flange to the
top of the outer
most layer
-do- -do- -do- -do- -do-

c. Earthwire
Check for seals
at both ends
Packing list Bidder 100% at stores 20% check -do-
2. Field
activity


a. Before
Stringing
Readiness for
stringing
Stringing procedures
as per HVPNL
specification
Bidder
Readiness certificate
to be submitted by
the Bidder
Review of Certificate
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL

b. During
stringing
(Conductor/Eart
h-wire)

Page 5


S.
No
.
Descriptio
n of
Activity
Items to be
Checked
Tests/Checks to
be done
Ref. documents Check/Testing Counter Check/Test by
HVPNL
Accepting
authority
Agency Extent
1. Scratch/cut
check (Visual)
Appd. Drawings/
HVPNL Specn.
Bidder 100% at Field 100% record & Field check
20%
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
2. Repair sleeve -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
3. Mid span
Joints
-do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
4. Guying (in
case of towers
not designed for
one side
stringing)
Appd. Guying
arrangement/HVP
NL specn.
-do- -do- 100% Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
c. After
stringing
Check for,
1. Sag/Tension Sag tension
chart/tower
Spotting data
-do- -do- 100% record & Field check
20%
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
2. Electrical
clearances
As per appd.
Drgs./HVPNL
specifications
-do- -do- -do- -do-
i) Ground
clearance
-do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
ii) Live metal
clearance etc.
-do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
3. Jumpering -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-




Page 6


S.
No
.
Descriptio
n of
Activity
Items to be
Checked
Tests/Checks
to be done
Ref. documents Check/Testing Counter Check/Test by
HVPNL
Accepting
authority
Agency Extent
4. Copper bond As per Appd.
Drgns./HVPNL
Specification
Bidder 100% at Field 100% record & Field
Check 20%
Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
5. Placement of
spacer/damper
As per Specn./drgs/
placement chart
-do- -do- -do- -do-
6. Final
Testing

a. Pre-
commissio
ning of
lines
a. Readiness
of lines for pre-
commissioning
1.
Completeness
of line.
2. Meggar test
of line
Refer pre
commissioning Check
list & testing of EHV
lines for charging
formats attached with
this FQP
Bidder 100% 100% joint checking Engineer-in-
charge of
HVPNL
b. Commi-
ssioning of
line
Readiness of
lines for
commissioning
-
a. Owner latest pre-
commissioning
procedures . As per
annexure enclosed.
b. Pre-commissioning
Report
c. CEA clearance
-do- -do- -do- -do-

3. Electrical
Inspectors
clearance from
CEA.
-do- -do- -do- -do-


Page 7

Annexure A
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA AND PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR CEMENT

ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT
S.
No
.
Name of the
test
Ordinary Portland Cement
43 grade as per IS 8112
Remarks
a) Physical tests



To be conducted in apprd. Lab on every lot of 500 MT.
(i) Fineness Specific surface area shall not be less than 225
sq.m. per Kg or 2250 Cm2/gm.
(ii) Compressive
strength
72+/- 1 hour : Not less than 23 Mpa (23 N/mm2)
168+/-2 hour : Not less than 33 Mpa (33 N/mm2)
672+/-4 hour : Not less than 43 Mpa (43 N/mm2)
(iii) Initial & Final
setting time
Initial setting time : Not less than 30 minutes
Final setting time : Not more than 600 minutes
(iv) Soundness Unaerated cement shall not have an expansion of
more than 10mm when tested by Le chatlier and
0.8% Autoclave test









Page 8

S.
No.
Name of the test Ordinary Portland Cement
43 grade as per IS 8112
Remarks
b) Chemical composition tests Review of MTC only
a) Ratio of percentage of lime to percentage of silica, alumina %
iron oxide 0.66 to 1.02





a) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide Minimum
0.66
c) Insoluble residue, percentage by mass Max. 4.00%
d) Magnesia percentage by mass Max. 6%
e) Total sulphur content calculated as sulpuric anhydride (SO3),
percentage by mass Not more than 2.5 and 3.0 when tri-
calcium aluminate percent by mass is 5 or less and greater
than 5 respectively.
c) Total loss on Ignition Not more than 5 percent






Page 9


Annexure B
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA AND PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR REINFORCEMENT STEEL

S.
No
.
Name of the
test
Mild and medium tensile steel as per IS
432
Cold twisted Deformed bars Fe 415 as
per IS 1786
Remarks
i) Chemical
analysis test
Carbon (For 20 mm dia and below) 0.23%
Max.




MTCs of Primary Producers to be
reviewed.

Carbon (For over 20 mm dia) 0.25% Carbon 0.30% Max
Sulpher 0.055% Sulpher 0.060%
Phosphorus 0.055% Phosphorus 0.060%
Sulpher & Phosphorus 0.11%
ii) Physical tests a) Ultimate Tensile stress
For all dia bars 410 N/Sq.mm.
(min.)
a) Ultimate Tensile stress
10% more than actual 0.2% proof
stress but not less than 485
N/Sq.mm.)
b) Yield stress (N/Sq.mm) min.
For bars upto 20 mm dia 250
For bars above 20 mm dia 240
c) Percentage of elongation 23%
b) 0.2% of proof stress/Yield stress
(N/Sq.mm) min.
For bars upto 20 mm dia 415
c) Percentage of elongation 14.5%
(min.)
iii) Bend & Rebend
tests
Pass Pass




Page 10

Annexure C
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA AND PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR COARSE AGGREGATES AS PER IS 383
3. Coarse Aggregates
i) Physical Tests
a) Determination
of particles size
a. IS Sieve
Designation
%age passing for Single-Sized Aggregate
of nominal size
Percentage Passing for grades Aggregate of
nominal size
40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5
mm
10
mm
40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5
mm
63 mm 100 - - - - - - - -
40 mm 85 to 100 100 - - - 95 to 100 100 - -
20 mm 0 to 20 85 to
100
100 - - 30 to 70 95 to 100 100 100
16 mm - - 85 to
100
100 - - - 90-100 -
12.5 mm - - - 85 to
100
100 - - - 90 to
100
10 mm 0 to 5 0 to 20 0 to 30 0 to 45 85 to
100
10 to 35 25 to 35 30 to 70 40 to
85
4.75 mm - 0 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to
20
0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10
2.36 mm - - - - 0 to
5
- - - -
b. Flakiness index Not to exceed 25%
c. Crushing Value Not to exceed 45%
d. Presence of deleterious
material
Total presence of deleterious materials not to exceed 5%
e. Soundness test (for concrete
work subject to frost action)
12% when tested with sodium sulphate and 18% when tested with magnesium sulphate
Page 11







Annexure D

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA AND PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR FINE AGGREGATES AS PER IS 383

4. Fine aggregates
i) Physical Tests
IS Sieve
Designation
Percentage passing for graded aggregate of nominal
size
a) Determination of particle size
F.A. Zone I F.A. Zone II F.A. Zone
III

10 mm 100 100 100

4.75 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100

2.36 mm 60-95 75-100 85-100

1.18 mm 30-70 55-90 75-100

600 microns 12.5
mm
15-34 35-59 60-79

300 microns 5 to 20 8 to 30 12 to 40

150 microns 0-10 0-10 01-0
b) Silt content
Not to exceed
8%
Not to exceed
8%
Not to
exceed 8%
c) Presence of deleterious material
Total presence of deleterious materials shall not exceed 5%
d) Soundness Applicable to
concrete work subject to frost
action
12% when tested with sodium sulphate and 15% when tested with magnesium sulphate







Page 12

Annexure E
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA AND PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR CONCRETE WORK

1) Concrete a) Workability Slump shall be recorded by slump cone method and it shall between 50-75 mm.
as per site requirement. However the water cement ratio shall be maintained as
per approved mix design.
b) Compressive strength Six samples of 15cm cubes, three for 7 days testing and balance three for 28
days testing shall be taken.
Notes :
1) For nominal (volumetric) concrete mixes, compressive strength for 1:1.5:3 (Sand : Fine aggreagates : Coarse aggregates) concrete
shall be 265 kg/Sq.cm. for 28 days and for 1:2:4 nominal mix, it shall be 210 kg/Sq.cm.
2) ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA BASED ON 28 DAYS COMPRESSIVE STRENGTHS FOR NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE :
a) the average of the strength of three specimen be accepted as the compressive strength of the concrete, provided the strength of any
individual cube shall neither be less than 70% nor higher than 130% of the specified strength.
b) If the actual average strength of accepted sample exceeds specified strength by more than 30%, the Engineer-in-charge, if he so
desires, may further investigate the matter. However, if the strength of any individual cube exceeds more than 30% of the specified
strength, it will be restructed to 30% only for computation of strength.
c) If the actual average strength of accepted sample is equal to or higher than specified upto 30%, the strength of the concrete shall be
considered in order and the concrete shall be accepted at full rates.
d) If the actual average strength of accepted sample is less than specified strength but not less than 70% of the specified strength, the
concrete may be accepted at reduced rate at the discretion of Engineer-in-charge.
e) If the actual average strength of accepted sample is less than 70% of specified strength, the Engineer-in-charge shall reject the
defective portion of work represent by sample and nothing shall be paid for the rejected work. Remedial measures necessary to retain
the structure shall taken at the risk and cost of Bidder. If, however, the Engineer-in-charge so desires, he may order additional tests to
be carried out to ascertain if the structure can be retained. All the charges in connection with these additional tests shall be borne by the
Bidder.
Page 13





General Notes :
1. This standard Field Quality Plan is not to limit the supervisory checks which are otherwise required to be carried out during execution of
work as per drawings/Technical specifications etc.
2. Bidder shall be responsible for implementing/documenting the SFQP. Documents shall be handed over by the Bidder to HVPNL after
the completion of the work.
3. Project incharge means over all incharge of work. Line Incharge means incharge of the line. Section in-charge means incharge of the
section.
4. In case of deviation the approving authority will be one step above the officer designated for acceptance in this quality plan subject to
minimum level of Line incharge.
5. Acceptance criteria and permissible limits for tests are indicated in the Annexures. However for further details/tests HVPNL specification
and relevant Indian standards shall be referred.
6. Tests as mentioned in this FQP shall generally be followed. However E.I.C. reserves the right to order additional tests wherever
required necessary at the cost of the agency.
7. All counter checks/tests by HVPNL shall be carried out by HVPNLs officials atleast at the level of Jr. Engr.







Page 14
PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECK LIST & TESTING OF EHV LINES FOR CHARGING

NAME OF THE LINE ROUTE KM CKT KM LINE CHARGING
DATE


A. GENERAL DATA AND INFORMATION

1. Package No.

:
2. Maint HQ

:
3. Voltage rating

:
4. Type of circuit :

5. Type of towers 0-2 215 1530 3060 Dead
End
Spl. Others Total
Single Circuit A B C D D
Number of SC
Double Circuit DA DB DC DD DD
Number of DC
Normal Extn. (Metre) +3 +6 +9 +12 +18 +25
Number of Extns.
Leg Extn. (Metre) +/-1.5 +/-3.0 +4.5 +6.0 +7.5 +9.0
Number of Extns.

6. Foundation Type Dry Wet PS FS BC SR HR Pile
Numbers

7. Type of Conductor

:

8. No. of conductors in bundle Single Twin Triple Quad Other



9. Crossing Details :

From Loc No. To Loc No. Name of X-ing No. of compression joint
R Y B R Y B
Power Line
PTCC Line
Railway Line
River
Lake

10. Other Informations
All weather approachable sections :
Submerged sections in monsoon :
Forest stretch sections :
Hilly terrain sections :

Page 1



11. Name of towns
along the line route
Distance from line
(km)
Approx. time to reach
Hr. Min.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

12. Any other special features of the line :

B. CHECK LIST ON CONSTRUCTION

S.NO. DESCRIPTION STATUS REMARKS
Record Deficiencies if
any
YES NO
1. FOUNDATION
a. Check any damage/ uneven settlement
of foundation.

b. Check back filling of foundation is
properly filled up to the ground level of
all legs.

c. Check surface earth/ concrete after
foundation casting is removed from
platform of the tower to beyond a
distance of 30 meters.

d. Check crack or break in chimney.
e. Check coping is proper
f. Check crack or damage to retaining wall/
revetment and proper weep holes are
provided for flushing water.

g. Check that all foundation chimneys are
covered with soil and compacted
specially in hilly terrain and river/ nalahs
banks upto ground level.


2. TOWER
a. Check for deformed/ rusted or damaged
tower members.

b. Check for missing tower members.
c. Check for missing bolts & nuts.
d. Check for tightening of all bolts & nuts.
e. Check for punching, tack welding (at
least 10 mm circular length) and zinc
coating of bolts & nuts.

f. Check filling of blank holes in tower
members with bolts & nuts.

g. Check verticality of tower.
h. Check that no tower leg is suspected to
be in sinking land or soil erosion field of
river bank, if so, proper and adequate
protection has been provided.

Page-2


i. Check fixing of all tower accessories
namely step bolts, anti climbing device
(ACD), earthing/ counterpoise-earthing.

j. Check visibility of danger/ number/ phase
& circuit plate along longitudinal section
of line.

k. Check correct sequence of fixing of
phase/ circuit plate at transposition
towers.


3. Removal of T&P and foreign materials
a. Check temporary earthing/ guys used
during stringing and jumpering are
removed.

b. Check all foreign materials on tower e.g.
dense spider webs, any handling rod/
wire, kites, bird nests and left over T&P
on tower/ cross arm are removed.

c. Check read and white paints on towers
above 45m which fall in aviation route.

d. Check aviation warning signals on tall
towers near Airport/ Airstrip as per rules.


4. Insulators
a. Check that all insulator discs are free
from damage and clean.

b. Check for unusual deflection of
suspension string.

c. Check whether verticality of string
restored.


5. Hardware and accessory fittings
a. Check that proper fixing of hardware fittings
like corona control ring/ arcing horns etc. are
provided as per the approved drawing/
specification/

b. Check randomly the condition of cotter pins
and ensure that proper size cotter pins have
provided as per the approved drawing.

c. Check that the conductors/ sub-conductors
are free from scratches/ rubs.

d. Check that all joints on conductor/ earth wire
are away from the tower as per the specified
distance (at least 30 meters) and joints are
as per the approved drawings/ specification.

e. Check that not more than one joint in a sub-
conductor is provided in one span.

Page 3


S.NO. DESCRIPTION STATUS REMARKS
Record Deficiencies if
any
YES NO
f. Check that no mid span joints or repair
sleeves are provided in major crossings
for highway, railway and major rivers.

g. Check that all mid span joints on
conductors/ earth wire and repair
sleeves of compression type are free
from sharp edges, rust and dust.

h. Check that conductor is properly clipped
in the suspension clamp.

i. Check that armour rods are provided on
suspension towers.

j. Check that spacers are provided
between two sub conductors on each
phase as per the approved chart/
specification.

k. Check that all spacers are properly
tightened and neoprene cover is intact.

l. Check that spacing of vibration dampers
from the tower and spacing between
damper to damper where two vibration
dampers provided are properly fixed and
tightened as per the damper placement
chart/ specification.

m. Check that all jumpers are properly fixed
and torque tightened as per the
approved drawing/ specification.

n. Check horizontality of sub/ quad
conductors.

o. Check that on conductors/ earth wires/
hardware fittings are free from all foreign
material like dead bird/ fallen tree/ bird
nests etc.


Erection Agency
Representative
Supplier Agency
Representative
HVPNL
Representative
Signature
Date
Name
Organization












Page 4



Name of line Circuit Date of Energisation


REMAINING ACTIVITIES/ TEMPORARY ARRANGEMENTS LISTED AFTER JOINT INSPECTION
WITH ERECTION AGENCY

Package Location Observation Completion Inspection
Section
A/ B/C
Sl.
No.
Tower
No.
From To Date Sign Date Sign Date Sign
Description












Erection Agency
Representative
Line In-charge
(HVPNL)
Erection Area In-charge
(HVPNL)
Signature
Date
Name
Organization

Details of sections to be mentioned in this format:

a. Outstanding activities remaining in any part of the line.
b. A list of temporary arrangements introduced.
c. Checklist records properly completed and signed as per Format-01.
d. Original tracing of profile, route alignment, tower design, structural drawings, bill of material, shop
drawings, stringing charts indicating initial and final sag etc. of all towers submitted to HVPNL.
e. For space, separate sheets to be enclosed for details of sectional incompleteness jointly signed by
Agency and HVPNL.














Page 5


Name of line Circuit Line Section


HANDLING OVER RECORD FOR ENERGIZATION

GENERAL STATUTORY ISSUES CHECK LIST
Package
kV
Type of towers S/C D/C
Voltage rating Tower locations From To
Total no. of towers Total length Kms

Details:
S. No. Description Status Remarks
Record deficiencies if any Yes No
1. Check list of entire section of the
line along with towers and
accessories under this division have
carried out and documented in the
format no.01.

2. Inspection has been carried out in
all towers and the outstanding
issues along with temporary
arrangements are documented in
the format no. 02.

3. No. of remaining activities/ points
are listed below and these are minor
in nature and do not stop charging
the line.


Handing over check points
Section Points according to format no.
PTL/TL.Const./10/Format/10
(Nos. of remaining activities)
Points completed
and confirmed
Points accepted
Date Sign Date Sign
A
B
C
D


S. No. Description Status Remarks
Record deficiencies if any Yes No
4. All electrical and ground clearances
are as per the approved drawings
issued from Engg. Dept. have been
checked and no deviation has been
noted.

5. All men and material and temporary
antitheft electrical connection, if any,
have been removed from all the
locations under this division.

6. All electrical clearance has been
received from CEA electrical
inspector for charging of the line
vide order no. dated (copy
enclosed).

Page-6


7. PTCC clearance has been received
from Ministry of Communication
Dept for charging of the line vide
order no. dated (copy
enclosed).

8. Railway Crossings clearance has
been received for all the crossings
vide order no. dated
. (copy enclosed).

9. All statutory rules and regulations
pertaining to line charging has been
carried out and nothing is pending.

10. All working agencies involved in
construction/ erection of this line are
intimated regarding charging of this
line and further work, if any, are to
be carried out only after availing the
Permit to Work (PTW) from the
concerned sub-station operating
staff.


The above line is handed over for energization with/ without remaining activities


Handed over by Accepted for energization
Signature
Date
Name
Organization Line in-charge
(Constn.)
Commissioning in-charge

























Page 7





Name of line Circuit Date of charging


COMMISIONING FORMAT

GENERAL DATA AND INFORMATION

Package
kV
Type of towers S/C D/C
Voltage rating Tower locations From To
Total no. of towers Total length Km

S. No. Description Status Remarks
Record deficiencies if any Yes No
1. The entire section of the line handed
over for energization as per
Powerlinks format no. 03 on
dated

2. No. of remaining activities/ points
are listed as per format no. 02 and
these are minor in nature and do not
stop charging the line.

3. All the equipments involved in
charging of the line are tested and
documented as per the pre-
commissioning formats of bay
equipment.

4. Pre-commissioning tests of bay/
feeder as per approved document
has been completed and test results
are documented by substation in-
charge.

5. In case reactor provided in this line
all tests are carried out as per
prescribed format and all test results
are documented by substation in-
charge.

6. All electrical clearance has been
received from CEA electrical
inspector for charging of the line
vide order no. . Dated .
(copy to be enclosed)









Page 8


S. No. Description Status Remarks
Record deficiencies if any Yes No
7. All man and material and temporary
antitheft electrical connection, if any,
removed from all the locations.

8. All electrical clearances have been
received from CEA electrical
inspector for charging of the line
vide order no. dated

9. PTCC clearance has been received
from Ministry of Communication
Dept. for charging of the line vide
order no. dated

10. Railway Crossings clearance has
been received for all the crossings
vide order no. dated
. (copy enclosed).

11. All statutory rules and regulations
pertaining to line charging has been
carried out and nothing is pending.

12. All working agencies involved in
construction/ erection of this line are
intimated regarding charging of this
line and further work, if any, are to
be carried out only after availing the
Permit to Work (PTW) from the
concerned sub-station operating
staff.

13. All the protections are checked and
put into service as per standard
format no. and documented by
substation in-charge.


Measurement of tower footing resistance by earth resistance tester or any other suitable
instrument (The value should not be more than 10 ohms)

Location Value (Ohms) Remarks




The above inspection and measurements are carried out in the location mentioned above and the
remaining activities, temporary arrangements etc. are documented in format no.02.











Page 9



MEASUREMENT OF INSULATION RESISTANCE FOR BUS BAR (using 5kV motorized megger)
BETWEEN MEASURED
VALUE IN M
OHM
REMARK CONDITION
R-PHASE & GROUND All breakers and
isolators to be closed
for section of the bus
bar to be energized
and all ground
switches opened.
Y-PHASE & GROUND
B-PHASE & GROUND
R-PHASE & Y-PHASE
Y-PHASE & B-PHASE
B-PHASE & R-PHASE

MEASUREMENT OF INSULATION RESISTANCE FOR LINE (using 5 kV/ 10 kV motorized
megger):

BETWEEN MEASURED
VALUE IN M
OHM
REMARK CONDITION
R-PHASE & GROUND All ground switches at
other end are opened.
Min. value should be
approx. 150 mega ohm
(value may change with
weather condition)
Y-PHASE & GROUND
B-PHASE & GROUND
R-PHASE & Y-PHASE
Y-PHASE & B-PHASE
B-PHASE & R-PHASE

CONTINUITY TEST OF THE LINE

For phase marking confirmation

SENDING END
CONDITIONS
RECEIVING END
Megger between
MEASURE VALUE
IN OHMS
REMARK
CLOSE R PHASE GS R-PHASE & GROUND LOW
OPEN Y PHASE GS Y-PHASE & GROUND HIGH
OPEN B PHASE GS B-PHASE & GROUND HIGH
OPEN R PHASE GS R-PHASE & GROUND HIGH
CLOSE Y PHASE GS Y-PHASE & GROUND LOW
OPEN B PHASE GS B-PHASE & GROUND HIGH
OPEN R PHASE GS R-PHASE & GROUND HIGH
OPEN Y PHASE GS Y-PHASE & GROUND HIGH
CLOSE B PHASE GS B-PHASE & GROUND LOW
CONNECT R&Y
PHASE, ALL GS OPEN
R-PHASE & GROUND LOW
Y-PHASE & GROUND HIGH
B-PHASE & GROUND HIGH
CONNECT R&B
PHASE, ALL GS OPEN
R-PHASE & GROUND HIGH
Y-PHASE & GROUND HIGH
B-PHASE & GROUND LOW
CONNECT Y&B
PHASE, ALL GS OPEN
R-PHASE & GROUND HIGH
Y-PHASE & GROUND LOW
B-PHASE & GROUND HIGH

Note:

If the test values are as per the remark, phase marking at both ends are correct.
If this test is to be done if the megger value do not show short circuit of the line with ground or between
phases in IR measurement.
Page 10

Measurement of phase sequence

After closing the breaker from one end only the line can be charged.

Check the phase sequence by the phase sequence meter by connecting at the secondary of the CVT.

Ok Not Ok

Check the phase sequence by the help of multi-meter in case of a charged sub-station at the
secondary of the CVT (old & new) in the control panel as per the measurement indicated below:

Voltage measurement between Measured voltage
(volts)
Remarks
New Circuit Charged old
circuit
1. R-phase R-phase In case of correct phase
sequence, the voltage measured
between R&R phase, Y&Y phase,
B&B phase of old charged line
and newly charged circuit will be
zero or very small and all other
measurements will show full line
CVT phase to phase secondary
voltage.
2. R-phase Y-phase
3. R-phase B-phase
4. Y-phase R-phase
5. Y-phase Y-phase
6. Y-phase B-phase
7. B-phase R-phase
8. B-phase Y-phase
9. B-phase B-phase

Once the correct phase sequence is established, the charging instruction received from HVPNL Engg.
to be followed and properly documented regarding status of various parameters with other lines
and generators, if any.

Charging
Instruction No.
Dated (Copy enclosed)
a. Charging details




Date Time

b. Pre-charging conditions for sending end
a. Voltage kV

b. Generator Details



c. Lines connected
S. No. Name of the line MW MVAR
Line reactor
In Service Capacity
1
2
3
4
5

d. Status of bus reactor, if any

S.No. Rating Status


Page 11




e. On charging condition

Details Sending end Receiving end
Voltage
MVAR
Open end voltage

f. Post charging condition

Details Sending end Receiving end
Voltage
MW
MVAR

THE LINE HAS BEEN/ NOT HAS BEEN SUCESSFULLY TEST CHARGED WITH OR WITHOUT
FOLLOWING OPERATIONAL CONSTRAINTS:

1.

2.

3.

4.


Signature
Name
Designation HVPNL HVPNL
Organization Line Erection S/S Erection Line In-charge S/S in-charge
Date














Page 12



VOLUME-II, PART-II,




CHAPTER-IV



TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS




FOR




132 KV TRANSMISSION LINE




The following information on the proposed equipment and material
shall be submitted in four (4) copies by the bidder alongwith this
proposal as separate appendices to the proposal.












GTP OF D/C TOWERS of KRR DESIGN FOR 132 KV TRANSMISSION LINE WITH 0.4sq
ACSR ZEBRA AND 0.2sq ACSR PANTHER.

Bidders Name & Address


1.0 132 kV HVPN
Design Towers
FURINSIHED


1.1 Bidders
Experience as
per Qualifying
Requirement
Yes/No



1.2 Stringing Procedure
The details of the stringing procedure proposed and all other
necessary tools and plants the bidder whishes to deploy for
timely completion of the work. (Yes/No)

2.0 Particular of 132kV D/C HVPN KRR Design Towers
2.1 Mass in kilogram
for D/C towers
Extensions ( as applicable)
Std. 3m 6m 9m 12m 15m 18m 25m
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

2.1.1 DA type
suspension
tower



a)

Fabricated parts
(Black)





As per HVPNL
Nuts & Bolts
(Galvanised)
Drawings / BOM


b)




c)

Total weight


2.1.2 DB type
Tension tower



a)

Fabricated parts
(Black)



As per HVPNL
Drawings / BOM


b)

Nuts & Bolts
(Galvanised)



c)

Total weight



Page- 1





2.1.3 DC type Tension tower

a)

Fabricated parts (Black)



As per HVPNL
Drawings / BOM


b)

Nuts & Bolts (Galvanised)



c)

Total weight


2.1.4 DD type Tension tower

a)

Fabricated parts (Black)


As per HVPNL
Drawings / BOM


b)

Nuts & Bolts (Galvanised)



c)

Total weight



2.2 Standard specifications
according to which the quality
of steel for the sections have
been assumed.
IS :2062
2.3 Standard to which fabrication,
galvanizing etc. will conform.
IS:802
2.4 Quality of zinc used for
galvanizing (purity)
(%)


99.95

3.0 132 KV D/C Gantry
3.1 Particulars of 132 KV Gantry


3.1.1 Structure type T2 (Tower)

a)

Fabricated parts (Black)



As per HVPNL
Drawings / BOM


b)

Nuts & Bolts (Galvanised)



c)

Total weight






Page-2


3.1.2 Structure type B1 (Beam)



a)

Fabricated parts (Black)



As per HVPNL
Drawings / BOM


b)

Nuts & Bolts (Galvanised)



c)

Total weight





3.2 Standard specifications according
to which the quality of steel for the
sections have been assumed.

IS :2062
3.3 Standard to which fabrication,
galvanizing etc. will conform.

IS:802
3.4 Quality of zinc used for
galvanizing (purity) (%)

99.95


Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.























Page-3

GTP OF New Design S/C Towers with 0.4sq ACSR Zebra ( as per Bidders New
Design).

Bidders Name & Address


1.1 Bidders Experience as
per Qualifying
Requirement
Yes/No



1.2 Stringing Procedure
The details of the stringing procedure proposed and all other
necessary tools and plants the bidder whishes to deploy for
timely completion of the work. (Yes/No)

2.0 Particular of 132kV S/C Towers
2.1 Mass in kilogram for
S/C towers
Extensions ( as applicable)
Std. 3m 6m 9m 12m 15m
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

2.1.1 A type suspension
tower



To be indicated as per
Bidders New Design

a) Fabricated parts (Black)
b) Nuts & Bolts
(Galvanised)

c) Total weight

2.1.2 B type Tension tower

To be indicated as per
Bidders New Design

a) Fabricated parts (Black)
b) Nuts & Bolts
(Galvanised)


c) Total weight




2.1.3 C type Tension tower

a)

Fabricated parts (Black)



To be indicated as per Bidders New
Design


b)

Nuts & Bolts
(Galvanised)



c)

Total weight






Page- 4


2.1.4 D type Tension tower

a)

Fabricated parts (Black)


To be indicated as per
Bidders New Design


b)

Nuts & Bolts
(Galvanised)


c)

Total weight


2.2 Standard specifications
according to which the
quality of steel for the
sections have been
assumed.
IS :2062
2.3 Standard to which
fabrication, galvanizing
etc. will conform.
IS:802
2.4 Quality of zinc used for
galvanizing (purity) (%)
99.95

3.0 Particulars of 132 KV S/C Gantry ( as per Bidders
New Design

3.1.1 Structure ( Tower)
a) Fabricated parts (Black)
Nuts & Bolts
(Galvanised) To be indicated as per
Bidders New Design

b)
c) Total weight

3.1.2 Structure ( Beam)
a) Fabricated parts (Black) To be indicated as per
dders New Design Bi Nuts & Bolts
(Galvanised)

b)
c) Total weight

3.2 Standard specifications
according to which the
quality of steel for the
sections have been
assumed.

IS :2062
3.3 Standard to which
fabrication, galvanizing
etc. will conform.

IS:802
3.4 Quality of zinc used for
galvanizing (purity) (%)

99.95
Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.

Page- 5


GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF ACSR PANTHER CONDUCTOR

As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per Bidder Sl.No Description Unit
1. Name & Address of manufacturer
2. PARTICULARS OF RAW MATERIALS
2.1 Aluminium
(a) Maximium Purity of aluminium
(b) Maximum Copper Content

%
%

99.5
0.04 (max.)

2.2 Steel Wires / Rods
(a) Carbon

Page-6
(b) Manganese
(c) Phosphorous
(d) Sulphur
(e) Silicon

%
%
%
%
%

0.50-0.85
0.50-1.140
0.035 (max.)
0.045 (max.)
0.10 (max.)


2.3 Zinc
(a) Minimum Purity of Zinc

%

99.95

3 ALUMINIUM STRANDS AFTER
STRANDING

3.1 Diameter
(a) Nominal
(b) Maximum
(c) Minimum


Mm
Mm
Mm

3.00
3.03
2.97

3.2 Minimum Breaking load of strand KN 1.17(before stranding)
1.11(after stranding)


3.3 Maximum Resistance of 1m length of
strand at 20 C
Ohm 0.004107
4. STEEL STRANDS AFTER STRANDING
4.1 Diameter
(a) Nominal
(b) Maximum
Minimum

Mm
Mm
Mm

3.00
3.06
2.94

4.2 Minimum Breaking load of strand KN 9.29(before stranding)
8.85(after stranding)


4.3 Galvanising
(a) Minimum weight of zinc coating per
sqm. of uncoated wire surface
(b) Minimum number of one minute dips
that the galvanised strand can withstand
in the standard piece test
(c) Min. No. of twists in a guage length
equal to 100 times dia of wire which the
strand can withstand in the torsion test.


Gm

Nos.


Nos.

260

2 dips x 1 min.
1 dips x min.

18 (before stranding)
16(after stranding)






5 ACSR CONDUCTOR


5.1 UTS of Conductor

KN 89.67
5.2 Lay ratio of conductor
(a) Outer steel layer
(b) 12 Wire aluminium layer
(c) 18 Wire aluminium layer




Max.
28
16
14
Min.
16
10
10
Max.

Min.


5.3 DC resistance of conductor at 20 C Ohm/KM 0.139

5.4 Standard length of conductor M 1500
5.5 Maximum length of conductor M 1575
5.6 Tolerance on standard length of conductor % +/- 5
5.7 Direction of lay for outside layer

N.A. Right hand
5.8 Linear mass of the Conductor
(a) Standard
(b) Minimum
(c) Maximum


Kg/km
Kg/km
Kg/km

974
955
993


5.9 Drum is as per specification yes
6.0 No. of cold pressure butt welding
equipments available at works
Nos. 6



Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.




















Page-7


GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 7/3.15 mm EARTH WIRE

Sl.No
.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per
Bidder
1. Name & Address of manufacturer
2. PARTICULARS OF RAW MATERIALS
2.1 Steel Wires/Rods
(a) Carbon
(b) Manganese
(c) Phosphorous
(d) Sulphur
(e) Silicon

%
%
%
%
%

Not more than 0.55
0.4 to 0.9
Not more than 0.04
Not more than 0.04
0.15 to 0.35

2.2 Zinc
(a) Minimum purity of Zinc

%

99.95

3 STEEL STRANDS AFTER STRANDING
3.1


Diameter
(a) Nominal
(b) Maximum
( c)Minimum

mm
mm
mm

3.15
3.20
3.10

3.2 Minimum Breaking load of strand kN 57
3.3 Galvanising
(a) Minimum weight of zinc coating per
sq.m of uncoated wire surface
(b) Minimum number of one minute dips
that the galvanised strand can
withstand in the standard preece test
(c) Min. No. of twists in guage length equal
100 times the dia. of wire which the
strand can withstand in the torsion test

gm


Nos.


Nos.

260

1 minute x 3 dips
minute x 1 dip
18 (min.)

4. STRANDED EARTH WIRE
4.1 UTS of earth wire kN 56.98
4.2 Lay length of outer steel layer mm 145 to 175
4.3 DC resistance of earthwire at 20
0
C ohm 2.95
4.4 Standard length of earth wire m 2000
4.5 Tolerance on standard length + m 5%
4.6 Direction of lay of outer layer Right Hand
4.7 Linear mass of earth wire
(a) Standard
(b) Minimum
(c) Maximum

kg/km
kg/km
kg/km

428
426
441

5.0 Drum is as per specification Yes/No Yes


Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.





Page-8

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF ANTI-FOG DISC INSULATOR UNITS
FOR 132KV LINES WITH ACSR PANTHER CONDUCTOR
As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per Bidder
S.N Description Unit 70KN 90KN 70KN 90KN
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Address of manufacturer
3. Weight of single disc Kg. As per make
4. Size and Designation of pin ball shank mm 16
Alt-B
16
Alt-B

5. Diameter of disc mm 255 255
6. Tolerance on Diameter mm 11 11
7. Ball to ball spacing between Disc mm 145 145
8. Tolerance on spacing mm 4 4
9. Minimum nominal creepage distance of single
disc
mm 432 432
10 Tolerance on creepage distance mm
11. Electromechanical strength of disc kN 70 90
12. Material of shell (Porcelain ) Porc
elain
Porcela
in

13. Power frequency flashover voltage of single
disc

(a) dry kV(rms) 95 95
(b) wet kV(rms) 55 55
14. Power frequency withstand voltage of single
disc

(a) Dry kV(rms) 85 85
(b) Wet kV(rms) 50 50
15. Power frequency puncture voltage of single
disc
kV(rms) 130 130
16. Impulse flashover voltage of single disc (dry)
(a) Positive kV(peak) 150 150
(b) Negative kN(peak) 150 150
17. Impulse withstand voltage of single disc (dry)
(a) Positive kV(peak) 140 140
(b) Negative kN(peak) 140 140
18. Steepness of impulse voltage which the disc
insulators can withstand in steep wave front
test
kV /
microsec.

19. Visible discharge test of single disc (dry) kV(rms) 9 9
20. Maximum RIV at 1MHz and 10kV AC (rms)
voltage of single disc
Microvolts 50 50
21. Purity of zinc used for galvanizing % 99.95 99.95
22. No. of dips in standard piece test
(a) Socket
(b) Ball Pin
23. Axial and Radial run out (According to IEC)
(a) As per pointer A mm
(b) As per pointer B mm
24. Drawings enclosed
Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.
Page-9

COMPOSITE LONG ROD INSULATORS FOR 132KV LINE WITH ACSR PANTHER
Page 1 of 2

Sr.
No.
Description Unit 70kN 90kN As per Bidder
1. Name & address of manufacture
2. Weight of single unit Kg
3. Size and designation of ball &
socket assembly
mm 16, Alt-B
4. Core diameter mm 16
5. Tolerance on core diameter mm As per spec.
6. Nominal length (section length) Mm
7. Tolerance on Nominal length mm
Dry arcing distance Mm
To be specified
by the Bidder

8. Number of sheds Nos.
9. Sheds profile (type)
10 Shed spacing mm
11 Sheds profile (regular alternating )
12 Shed diameter mm
13 Tolerance on shed diameter mm





As per Spec.

14 Minimum creepage distance mm
15 Tolerance on Creepage distance mm
16 Guaranteed mechanical strength kN
17 Routine mechanical load KN
18 Material
a) FRP rod
b) Weather sheds with %
contents of silicon
c) Housing
d) End fittings
e) Grading rings


19 Minimum thickness of sheath
covering over the core
mm
20 Power frequency withstand voltage
of single unit
a) Dry

b) Wet


KV
(rms)
KV
(rms)
As per relevant
IEC /IS

21 Power frequency flashover voltage
of single unit
a) Dry

b) Wet


KV
(rms)
KV
(rms)
As per relevant
IEC /IS

Page-10








COMPOSITE LONG ROD INSULATORS FOR 132KV LINE WITH ACSR PANTHER
Page 2 of 2

Sr.
No.
Description Unit 70kN 120kN As per Bidder
22 Impulse withstand voltage of single
unit (dry)
a) Positive
b) Negative


KV
(peak)
KV
(peak)
As per relevant
IEC /IS

23 Impulse flashover voltage of single
unit (dry)
a) Positive
b) Negative


KV
(peak)
KV
(peak)
As per relevant
IEC /IS

24 Purity of zinc used for galvanizing
end fittings
% 99.95
25 Number of dips which the end
fittings can withstand in standard
preece test
Nos. As per Spec.
26 Certified test report of accelerated
ageing test of 5000 hours (enclosed)
(appendix-C of IEC-61109)
Yes/No.
27 Drawing enclosed Yes/No.

Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.

















Page-11



GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF SUSPENSION HARDWARE FITTINGS
(SUITABLE FOR ACSR PANTHER CONDUCTOR)
Sl.No Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per
Bidder
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Address of manufacturer
3. Dimensioned drawings of insulator strings
enclosed

4. Detailed dimensional drawings of all
hardware components enclosed



5. Material of all components indicated in
drawings

6. Maximum magnetic power loss of
suspension assembly at conductor current
of 500 Ampere


Watts
1
7. Slipping strength of suspension assembly
(clamp torque Vs slip curve shall be
enclosed

KN

11 to 16

8. Particulars of standard / AGS preformed
armour rod set for suspension assemble
(a) No. of rods per set
(b) Direction of lay
(c) Overall length after fitting on
Conductor
(d) Actual length of each rod along its helix
(e) Diameter of each rod
(f) Tolerance in
(i) Diameter of each rod
(ii) Length of each rod
(iii) Difference of length
Between the longest and shorted rod in a
set
(g) Type of Aluminium alloy used for
manufacture of PA rod set
(h) UTS of each rod


No.

Mm

Mm
Mm

+ mm
+ mm
mm

Kg/
mm
Standard/AGS

11
Right Hand
1930 mm+/-16

2011+/-16
6.35 +/- 0.10

+/- 0.1
+/- 2.5
+/- 13

High strength
aluminium alloy
Grade 6061
35

9. Particulars of Elastometer (for AGS Clamp
only)
(a) Supplier of elastometer
(b) Type of elastometer
(c) Shore hardness of elastometer
(d) Temperature range for which
elastometer is designed
(e) Moulded on insert



As per make
Neoprene
65-80
Up to 100 deg.C


Yes









Page-12





10. Total weight of Assembly
(a) Single Suspension
(b) Single Suspension pilot
(c) Double Suspension


Kg.
Kg.
Kg.

As per make
As per make
As per make


11.



UTS of string hardware
(a) Single Suspension
(b) Single Suspension pilot
(c) Double Suspension



KN
KN
KN

70
70
2x70

12. Purity of Zinc used for galvanising % 99.95
13. Min. No. of dips in standard piece test, the
ferrous parts can withstand
No. 4 for fasteners 6
for all other
components

14. Design calculations for yoke plates
enclosed



Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.




























Page-13



GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF TENSION HARDWARE FITTINGS
(SUITABLE FOR ACSR PANTHER CONDUCTOR)

Sl.No
.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per Bidder
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Address of manufacturer


3. Dimensioned drawings of insulator strings
enclosed

4. Detailed dimensional drawings of all
hardware components enclosed



5. Material of all components indicated in
drawings

6. Electrical resistance of dead end assembly

Ohms Not more than
75% of measured
resistance of the
equivalent length
of conductor.

7. Slip strength of dead end assembly

KN 95% of UTS of
conductor

8. Total Weight of Assembly
7 Single Tension
(a) Double Tension

Kg.
Kg.


As per make
As per make

9. UTS of string hardware
(a) Single Tension
(b) Double Tension

KN
KN

90
2x90

10. Purity of Zinc used for galvanizing

% 99.95
11. Min. No. of dips in standard piece test, the
ferrous parts can withstand

No. 4 for fasteners 6
for all other
components

12. Design calculations for yoke plates
enclosed
Yes/
No



Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.











Page-14




GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF INSULATOR STRINGS ALONG WITH
HARDWARE FITTINGS

Sl.N
o.
Description Unit Single
Suspens
ion 1x9
Doubl
e
Tensi
on
2x10
Single
Tensi
on
1x10
Double
Suspens
ion 2x9
Single
Suspens
ion Pilot
1x9
1. Power frequency
withstands voltage of string
with arcing horns under
wet condition.


Kv
(rms)


275 275 275 275 275
2. Impulse withstand voltage
(dry)
(a) Positive
(b) Negative

kv
(peak)
kv
(peak)
650 650 650 650 650
650 650 650 650 650
3. Impulse flashover voltage
(dry)
(a) Positive
(b) Negative

kv
(peak)
kv
(peak)
700 700 700 700 700
700 700 700 700 700
4. Mechanical strength of
complete insulator string
along with hardware fittings
for lines with ACSR
Panther

kN


70 2x90 90 2x70 70
Mechanical strength of
complete insulator string
along with hardware fittings
for lines with ACSR Zebra

kN


70 2x120 120 2x70 70
5.

Maximum voltage
distribution across any disc
of line to earth voltage
%



20 22 22 20 20
6. Dimensioned drawings of
insulator strings enclosed
Yes/No


Yes

Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.






Page-15



PARTICULARS OF MID SPAN COMPRESSION JOINT FOR ACSR PANTHER

Sr.
No.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per
Bidder
1. Manufacturers Name and Address
2. Drawing enclosed
3. Suitable for Conductor size mm ACSR Panther
4. Purity of Aluminium used for Aluminium sleeve. 99.5%(min.)
5. Material for steel sleeve
i) Type of material with chemical
composition.
ii) Hardness of material (Brinnel Hardness)
ii) weight of zinc coating




gm/mm
2

Mid steel as per
IS:2062
160 (Max)
610 (min.)

6. Outside diameter of sleeve before compression
i) Aluminium
ii) Steel

(mm)
(mm)

38.00+/-1.0
18.00+/-0.5

7. Inside diameter of sleeve before compression
(a)Aluminium
b) Steel
c) Aluminium filler sleeves

(mm)
(mm)
(mm)

23.00+/-0.5
9.3.+/-0.2

8. Length of Aluminium Sleeve
i) Before compression
ii) after compression

(mm)
(mm)

610.00+/-5
203.00+/-5

9. Dimensions of sleeve after compression
(a) Aluminium
(i) Corner to corner
(ii) Surface to surface
b) Steel
(i) Corner to corner
(ii) Surface to surface


(mm)
(mm)

(mm)
(mm)


37.00+/-0.5
32.00+/-0.5


17+/-0.5
15.1+/-0.5

10. Length of Steel sleeve
i) Before compression
ii) after compression

(mm)
(mm)

650.00+/-10
225.00 +/-5

11. Weight of sleeve
(a) Aluminium
(b) Steel
(c) Filler Al-Sleeve

(Kg.)
(Kg.)
(Kg.)

As per outline
general
arrangement
drawing of the
manufacture

12. Slipping Strength (kN) 95% UTS of
Conductor

13. Conductivity of the compressed unit expressed
as percentage of the conductivity of equivalent
length of bare conductor
%


Not less than
that of ACSR
Panther

Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to technical
specification / relevant ISS.


Page-16



PARTICULARS OF REPAIR SLEEVE FOR ACSR PANTHER CONDUCTOR

Sl.No
.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per Bidder
1. Manufacturers Name and Address
2. Drawing enclosed
3. Suitable for conductor size (mm) ACSR Panther
4. Purity of aluminium used for
aluminium sleeve
(%)

95.5 (min.)
5. Inside diameter of sleeve before
compression
(mm) 23.00+/-0.5
6. Outside dimensions of sleeve
(a) Dia Before compression

(b) After Compression
(i) Corner to corner
(ii) Surface to surface

(mm)


(mm)
(mm)

38.00+/-1.0


37.00+/-0.5
32.00+/-0.5

7. Length of sleeve
(a) Before compression
(b) After compression

(mm)
(mm)

241+/-5
260+/-5

8. Weight of Sleeve (Kg)

As per outline
general
arrangement
drawing of the
manufacture




Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.














Page-17


PARTICULARS OF MID SPAN COMPRESSION JOINT FOR GALVANISED STEEL
EARTHWIRE (7/3.15 mm)

Sl.No
.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per Bidder
1. Manufacturers Name and Address
2. Drawing enclosed As per firm
3. Material of Joint
(i) Type of material with chemical
composition
(ii) Hardness of the material
(Brinnel Hardness)






Mild steel with
alum. encasing

200BHN( max.)

4. Inside diameter of sleeve before
compression
(i) Steel sleeve
(ii) Aluminium sleeve
(iii) Aluminium filler sleeve


(mm)
(mm)
(mm)


10+ 0.2
22+ 0.5
11.5 + 0.2

5. Outside dimensions of sleeve
(a) Steel sleeve
(b) Aluminium filter sleeve

(mm)
(mm)

21+ 0.5

30+ 0.5

6. Outside dimensions of sleeve after
compression
(a) Steel sleeve
(i) Corner to corner
(ii) Surface to surface
(b) Aluminium cover
(i) Corner to corner
(ii) Surface to surface



(mm)
(mm)

(mm)
(mm)



20.2 + 0.5
17.5+ 0.5

29.4+ 0.5
25.0 + 0.5

7. Length of steel sleeve
(a) Before compression
(b) After compression

(mm)
(mm)

230 + 5
260+ 10










Page-18






8. Length of Aluminium sleeve
(a) Before compression
(b) After compression

(mm)
(mm)

315+ 5

325 + 10

9. Weight of sleeve
(a) Steel
(b) Aluminium
(c) Filler Al-sleeve

(Kg)
(Kg)
(Kg)

As per outline
general
arrangement
drawing of the
manufacture

10. Slipping Strength (kN) 95% UTS of
earth wire

11. Conductivity of the compressed unit
expressed as a percentage of the
conductivity of equivalent length of bare
earthwire.
(%)



100 (min.)


Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.
































Page-19


GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF VIBRATION DAMPER FOR ACSR
PANTHER CONDUCTOR

Sl.No Description Unit As per
HVPNL
Requirement
As per
Bidder
1. Manufacturers Name & Address
2. Drawing enclosed
(a) Design drawing
(b) Placement chart



3. Suitable for conductor size mm ACSR
PANTHER

4. Total weight of one damper Kg

As per make


5. Diameter of each damper mass mm AS per outline
general
arrangement
drawing of the
manufacture

6. Length of each damper mass mm
7. Weight of each damper mass Kg
8. Material of damper masses Cast Iron
H.D.G.

9. Material of the stranded messenger cable

High strength
galvanized
steel stranded
wire

10. Number of strands in stranded messenger
cable
Mm 19
11. Lay ratio of stranded messenger cable

9 to 11
12. Minimum ultimate tensile strength of
stranded messenger cable

(Kg/
mm)
135.00
13. Slipping strength of stranded messenger
cable (mass pull off)
KN 5 (min.)
14.

Resonance frequencies
(a) First frequency
(b) Second frequency

Hz
Hz

As per outline
general
arrangement
drawing of the
manufacture

15. Designed clamping torque Kg-m 6.5
16. Slipping strength of damper clamp
(a) Before fatigue test
(b) After fatigue test

KN
KN

2.5
2.0

17 Magnetic Power loss at 350Amp. Watts 1 watt per
damper (max.)

18 Material of Clamp Alum. Alloy
(grad LM-6

Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.

Page-20

PARTICULARS OF VIBRATION DAMPER FOR GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE (7/3.15 mm)

Sl.No
.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per Bidder
1. Manufacturers Name & Address
2. Drawing enclosed
(a) Design drawing
(b) Placement chart


As per make


3. Suitable for earth wire size (mm) 7/3.15
4. Total weight of one damper (Kg) As per make


5. Diameter of each damper mass (mm) AS per outline
general
arrangement
drawing of the
manufacture

6. Length of each damper mass (mm)
7. Weight of each damper mass (Kg)
8. Material of damper masses Cast Iron H.D.G.
9. Material of the stranded messenger cable

High strength
galvanized steel
stranded wire

10. Number of strands in stranded messenger
cable


19
11. Lay ratio of stranded messenger cable

9 to 11
12. Minimum ultimate tensile strength of
stranded messenger cable
(Kg/
mm
2
)
135.00
13. Slipping strength of stranded messenger
cable (mass pull off)
(kN)

5 (min.)
14.

Resonance frequencies
(a) First frequency
(b) Second frequency

(Hz)
(Hz)
As per outline
general
arrangement
drawing of the
manufacture

15. Designed clamping torque Kg-m 6.0
16. Slipping strength of damper clamp
(a) Before fatigue test
(b) After fatigue test



2.5
2.0

17 Alum. Alloy
(gradA-6) as per
IS-617


Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.

Page-21

PARTICULARS OF SUSPENSION CLAMP FOR GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE
(7/3.15 mm)

Sl.No
.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per Bidder
1. Manufacturers Name & Address
2. Drawing enclosed
3. Material
(i) Shackle
(ii) Clamp Body &
Keeper
(iii) U Bolt



Class 4 as IS-2004
MCI
Mid steel

4. Total drop (maximum) (mm) 150mm (max.)
5. Weight (Kg) As per make
6. Breaking Strength (minimum) (kgf) 25
7. Slipping Strength (kN) 9 to 14
8. Tightening Torque (kg-m) 4 to 6



Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.

























Page-22




PARTICULARS OF TENSION CLAMP FOR GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE (7/3.15
mm)

Sl.No
.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per
Bidder
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Drawing enclosed Yes
3. Material
(i) Shackle
(ii) (a) Compression clamp

(b) Hardness of the material
(BHN)



Forged steel
Mild steel with
Alum. encasing
200BHN (max.)

4. Inside diameter of the clamp before
compression
(mm)

10+ 0.2


5. Outside dimensions of sleeve
(a) Before compression
(b) After compression
(i) Corner to corner
(ii) Surface to surface

(mm)

(mm)
(mm)

21+ 0.5

21+ 0.5
17.5+ 0.5


6. Length of clamp
(a) Before compression
(b) After compression

(mm)
(mm)

230+ 5
245+ 10

7. Weight

(Kg)

As per outline
general
arrangement
drawing of the
manufacture

8. Slip strength (minimum) (kN) 95% of UTS of
earth wire

9. Compression Pressure (T) 100
10. Minimum breaking strength of
assembly (excluding clamp)
(kgf) 6000


Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.









Page-23


PARTICULARS OF FLEXIBLE COPPER BOND

Sl.No
.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per Bidder
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Drawing enclosed Yes
3. Stranding 37/7/0.417 mm
4. Cross sectional area (Sq.mm) 34
5. Minimum copper equivalent area (Sq.mm) 34
6. Length of copper cable (mm) 500+ 10
7. Material of lugs Tinned copper
alloy

8. Bolt Size
(i) Diameter
(ii) Length

(mm)
(mm)

16
40

9. Resistance (Ohm) 0.0002536
10. Total weight of flexible copper bond (kg)

As per OGA
drawing of the
manufacture






Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.























Page-24


GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS & OTHER TECHNICAL DATA OF 132KV POST
INSULATOR

Sl.No. Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement

As per Bidder
1. Height mm 1220+/-1
2. Power frequency dry one minute
withstand voltage
KV

275
3. Impulse withstand voltage rms 550
4. Total creepage distance mm 3625
5. Protected creepage distance mm As per
HVPNL
Specification

6. Cantilever strength inverted Kg As per
HVPNL
Specification

7. Cantilever strength upright Kg As per
HVPNL
Specification

8. Tensile strength N As per
HVPNL
Specification

9. Torsional strength Nm As per
HVPNL
Specification

10. Compression strength N As per
HVPNL
Specification

11. Bending strength N As per
HVPNL
Specification

12. Type and make
13. Total weight Kg AS per OGA
drawing

14. Pitch circle diameter
a. Bottom

b. Top

mm

mm

As per
HVPNL
Specification
As per
HVPNL
Specification

15. Max. diameter of Insulators mm As per
HVPNL
Specification

16. Drawing Reference No.
Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.


Page-25

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF ACSR ZEBRA CONDUCTOR


Page-26
Sl.No Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per Bidder
1. Name & Address of manufacturer
2. PARTICULARS OF RAW MATERIALS
2.1 Aluminium
(a) Maximium Purity of aluminium
(b) Maximum Copper Content

%
%

99.6
0.04 (max.)

2.2 Steel Wires / Rods
2 Carbon
3 Manganese
4 Phosphorous
5 Sulphur
6 Silicon

%
%
%
%
%

0.5-0.85
0.5-1.10
0.035 (max.)
0.045 (max.)
0.10-0.35

2.3 Zinc
(a) Minimum Purity of Zinc

%

99.95

3 ALUMINIUM STRANDS AFTER
STRANDING

3.1 Diameter
2 Nominal
3 Maximum
4 Minimum


Mm
Mm
Mm

3.18
3.21
3.15

3.2 Minimum Breaking load of strand KN 1.29(before stranding
1.23(after stranding

3.3 Maximum Resistance of 1m length of
strand at 20 C
Ohm 3.626 ohm/km
4. STEEL STRANDS AFTER STRANDING
4.1 Diameter
(a) Nominal
(b) Maximum
(c) Minimum

Mm
Mm
Mm

3.18
3.24
3.12

4.2 Minimum Breaking load of strand KN 10.43(before stranding)
9.95 (after stranding)

4.3 Galvanising
(a) Minimum weight of zinc coating per
sqm. of uncoated wire surface
(b) Minimum number of one minute dips
that the galvanised strand can withstand
in the standard piece test
(c) Min. No. of twists in a guage length
equal to 100 times dia of wire which the
strand can withstand in the torsion test.


Gm

Nos.


Nos.

260

3 Dips x 1 minute


18(before stranding
16 (after stranding









5 ACSR CONDUCTOR


5.1 UTS of Conductor

KN 159.60
5.2 Lay ratio of conductor
(a) Outer steel layer
(b) 12 Wire aluminium layer
(c) 18 Wire aluminium layer
(d) 24 Wire aluminium layer





Max.
28
17
16
14
Min.
13
10
10
10

Max.

Min.


5.3 DC resistance of conductor at 20 C Ohm/KM 0.06868

5.4 Min. corona extinction voltage (line to
ground) under dry condition
kV (rms) 154
5.5 RIV at MHz at 154 KV (rms) under dry
condition
Micro volts Below 1000
5.6 Standard length of conductor M 1500
5.7 Maximum length of conductor M 1575
5.8 Tolerance on standard length of conductor % 5
5.9 Direction of lay for outside layer

N.A. Right Hand
6.0 Linear mass of the Conductor
(a) Standard
(b) Minimum
(c) Maximum


Kg/km
Kg/km
Kg/km

1621
1615
1653

Drum is as per specification Yes


No. of cold pressure butt welding
equipments available at works
Nos. 8



Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.









Page -27


GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF ANTI-FOG DISC INSULATOR UNITS FOR
132KV LINES WITH ACSR ZEBRA CONDUCTOR
As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per Bidder
S.N Description Unit 70KN 120KN 70KN 120KN
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Address of manufacturer
3. Weight of single disc Kg. As per make
4. Size and Designation of pin ball shank mm 16
Alt-B
20


5. Diameter of disc mm 255 280
6. Tolerance on Diameter mm 11 11
7. Ball to ball spacing between Disc mm 145 145
8. Tolerance on spacing mm 4 4
9. Minimum nominal creepage distance of single
disc
mm 432 432
10 Tolerance on creepage distance mm
11. Electromechanical strength of disc kN 70 120
12. Material of shell (Porcelain ) Porcelain
13. Power frequency flashover voltage of single disc
(a) dry kV(rms) 95 95
(b) wet kV(rms) 55 55
14. Power frequency withstand voltage of single disc
(a) Dry kV(rms) 85 85
(b) Wet kV(rms) 50 50
15. Power frequency puncture voltage of single disc kV(rms) 130 130
16. Impulse flashover voltage of single disc (dry)
(a) Positive kV(peak) 150 150
(b) Negative kN(peak) 150 150
17. Impulse withstand voltage of single disc (dry)
(a) Positive kV(peak) 140 140
(b) Negative kN(peak) 140 140
18. Steepness of impulse voltage which the disc
insulators can withstand in steep wave front test
kV /
microsec.

19. Visible discharge test of single disc (dry) kV(rms) 9 18
20. Maximum RIV at 1MHz and 10kV AC (rms)
voltage of single disc
Microvol
ts
50 50
21. Purity of zinc used for galvanizing % 99.95 99.95
22. No. of dips in standard piece test
(a) Socket
(b) Ball Pin
23. Axial and Radial run out (According to IEC)
(a) As per pointer A mm
(b) As per pointer B mm
24. Drawings enclosed

Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.

. Page-28

COMPOSITE LONG ROD INSULATORS FOR 132KV LINE WITH ACSR ZEBRA
Page 1 of 2

Sr.
No.
Description Unit 70kN 120kN As per Bidder
1. Name & address of manufacture
2. Weight of single unit Kg
3. Size and designation of ball &
socket assembly
mm 16mm-
Alt B
20
4. Core diameter mm 16 20
5. Tolerance on core diameter mm As per spec.
6. Nominal length (section length) Mm
7. Tolerance on Nominal length mm
8. Dry arcing distance Mm
To be specified
by the Bidder

9. Number of sheds Nos.
10 Sheds profile (type)
11 Shed spacing mm
12 Sheds profile (regular alternating )
13 Shed diameter mm
14 Tolerance on shed diameter mm





As per Spec.

15 Minimum creepage distance mm
16 Tolerance on Creepage distance mm
17 Guaranteed mechanical strength kN
18 Routine mechanical load KN
19 Material
a) FRP rod
b) Weather sheds with %
contents of silicon
c) Housing
d) End fittings
e) Grading rings


20 Minimum thickness of sheath
covering over the core
mm
21 Power frequency withstand voltage
of single unit
f) Dry

b) Wet


KV
(rms)
KV
(rms)
As per relevant
IEC /IS

22 Power frequency flashover voltage
of single unit
g) Dry

b) Wet


KV
(rms)
KV
(rms)
As per relevant
IEC /IS

Page-29








COMPOSITE LONG ROD INSULATORS FOR 132KV LINE WITH ACSR ZEBRA
Page 2 of 2

Sr.
No.
Description Unit 70kN 120kN As per Bidder
23 Impulse withstand voltage of single
unit (dry)
h) Positive
i) Negative


KV
(peak)
KV
(peak)
As per relevant
IEC /IS

24 Impulse flashover voltage of single
unit (dry)
j) Positive
b) Negative


KV
(peak)
KV
(peak)
As per relevant
IEC /IS

25 Purity of zinc used for galvanizing
end fittings
% 99.95
26 Number of dips which the end
fittings can withstand in standard
preece test
Nos. As per Spec.
27 Certified test report of accelerated
ageing test of 5000 hours (enclosed)
(appendix-C of IEC-61109)
Yes/No.
28 Drawing enclosed Yes/No.

Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.


















Page-30





UARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF SUSPENSION HARDWARE FITTINGS
(SUITABLE FOR ACSR ZEBRA CONDUCTOR)
Sl.No
.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per
Bidder
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Address of manufacturer
3. Dimensioned drawings of insulator strings
enclosed

4. Detailed dimensional drawings of all
hardware components enclosed



5. Material of all components indicated in
drawings

6. Maximum magnetic power loss of
suspension assembly at conductor current
of 500 Ampere


Watts

Less than 2 watts

7. Slipping strength of suspension assembly
(clamp torque Vs slip curve shall be
enclosed

KN

16 to 24% of UTS
of conductor

8. Particulars of standard / AGS preformed
armour rod set for suspension assemble
(a) No. of rods per set
(b) Direction of lay
(c) Overall length after fitting on
(d) Conductor
(e) Actual length of each rod along its
helix
(f) Diameter of each rod
(g) Tolerance in
(i) Diameter of each rod
(ii) Length of each rod
(iii) Difference of length
Between the longest and shorted rod in a
set
(h) Type of Aluminium alloy used for
manufacture of PA rod set
(i) UTS of each rod


No.

Mm

Mm
Mm

+ mm
+ mm
mm

Kg/
mm
Standard/AGS

12
Right Hand
2540 mm+/-25

2665+/-25
7.87

0.1
25
13

High strength
aluminium alloy
Grade 6061
35

9. Particulars of Elastometer (for AGS Clamp
only)
(a) Supplier of elastometer
(b) Type of elastometer
(c) Shore hardness of elastometer
(d) Temperature range for which
(e) elastometer is designed
(f) Moulded on insert



As per make
Neoprene
65-80
Up to 100 deg.C

Yes









Page-31



10. Total weight of Assembly
(d) Single Suspension
(e) Single Suspension pilot
(f) Double Suspension


Kg.
Kg.
Kg.

As per make
As per make
As per make


11.



UTS of string hardware
8. Single Suspension
(d) Single Suspension pilot
(e) Double Suspension


KN
KN
KN

70
70
2x70

12. Purity of Zinc used for galvanising % 99.95
13. Min. No. of dips in standard piece test, the
ferrous parts can withstand
No. 4 for fasteners
6 for all other
components

14. Design calculations for yoke plates
enclosed





Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.


























Page-32








GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF TENSION HARDWARE FITTINGS
(SUITABLE FOR ACSR ZEBRA CONDUCTOR)

Sl.No
.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per Bidder
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Address of manufacturer


3. Dimensioned drawings of insulator strings
enclosed

4. Detailed dimensional drawings of all
hardware components enclosed



5. Material of all components indicated in
drawings

6. Electrical resistance of dead end assembly

Ohms Not more than
75% of measured
resistance of the
equivalent length
of conductor.

7. Slip strength of dead end assembly

KN 95% of UTS of
conductor

8. Total Weight of Assembly
8 Single Tension
(b) Double Tension

Kg.
Kg.


As per make
As per make

9. UTS of string hardware
(c) Single Tension
(d) Double Tension

KN
KN

120
2x120

10. Purity of Zinc used for galvanizing

% 99.95
11. Min. No. of dips in standard piece test, the
ferrous parts can withstand

No. 4 for fasteners 6
for all other
components

12. Design calculations for yoke plates
enclosed
Yes/
No



Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.








Page-33



PARTICULARS OF MID SPAN COMPRESSION JOINT FOR ACSR ZEBRA

Sr.
No.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per
Bidder
1. Manufacturers Name and Address
2. Drawing enclosed
3. Suitable for Conductor size mm ACSR Zebra
4. Purity of Aluminium used for Aluminium sleeve. 99.5%(min.)
5. Material for steel sleeve
i) Type of material with chemical
composition.
ii) Hardness of material (Brinnel Hardness)
ii) weight of zinc coating




gm/mm
2

Mid steel as per
IS:2062
160 (Max)
610 (min.)

6. Outside diameter of sleeve before compression
i) Aluminium
ii) Steel

(mm)
(mm)

48.00+/-1.0
20.00+/-0.5

7. Inside diameter of sleeve before compression
(a)Aluminium
b) Steel
c) Aluminium filler sleeves

(mm)
(mm)
(mm)

31.00+/-0.5
10.00+/-0.2

8. Length of Aluminium Sleeve
i) Before compression
ii) after compression

(mm)
(mm)

710.00+/-5
240.00+/-5

9. Dimensions of sleeve after compression
(a) Aluminium
i) Corner to corner
ii) Surface to surface
b) Steel
i) Corner to corner
ii) Surface to surface


(mm)
(mm)

(mm)
(mm)


47.00+/-0.5
41.00+/-0.5


19+/-0.5
16+/-0.5

10. Length of Steel sleeve
i) Before compression
ii) after compression

(mm)
(mm)

750.00+/-5
270.00 +/-5

11. Weight of sleeve
a) Aluminium
b) Steel
c) Filler Al-Sleeve

(Kg.)
(Kg.)
(Kg.)
As per outline
general
arrangement
drawing of the
manufacture

12. Slipping Strength (kN) 95% UTS of
Conductor

13. Conductivity of the compressed unit expressed
as percentage of the conductivity of equivalent
length of bare conductor
%


Not less than
that of ACSR
Zebra

Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.
Page-34




PARTICULARS OF REPAIR SLEEVE FOR ACSR ZEBRA CONDUCTOR

Sl.No
.
Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per Bidder
1. Manufacturers Name and Address
2. Drawing enclosed
3. Suitable for conductor size (mm) ACSR ZEBRA
4. Purity of aluminium used for
aluminium sleeve
(%)

95.5 (min.)
5. Inside diameter of sleeve before
compression
(mm) 31.00+/-0.5
6. Outside dimensions of sleeve
A) Dia Before compression

b) After Compression
(i) Corner to corner
(ii) Surface to surface

(mm)


(mm)
(mm)

48.00+/-1.0


47.00+/-0.5
41.00+/-0.5

7. Length of sleeve
a) Before compression
b) After compression

(mm)
(mm)

275+/-5
305+/-5

8. Weight of Sleeve (Kg)

As per outline
general
arrangement
drawing of the
manufacture




Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.









Page-35










GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF VIBRATION DAMPER FOR ACSR
ZEBRA CONDUCTOR

Sl.No Description Unit As per HVPNL
Requirement
As per
Bidder
1. Manufacturers Name & Address
2. Drawing enclosed
(a)Design drawing
(b) Placement chart



3. Suitable for conductor size mm ACSR Zebra
4. Total weight of one damper Kg

As per make


5. Diameter of each damper mass mm AS per outline
general
arrangement
drawing of the
manufacture

6. Length of each damper mass mm
7. Weight of each damper mass Kg
8. Material of damper masses Cast Iron H.D.G.
9. Material of the stranded messenger cable

High strength
galvanized steel
stranded wire

10. Number of strands in stranded messenger
cable
Mm 19
11. Lay ratio of stranded messenger cable

9 to 11
12. Minimum ultimate tensile strength of
stranded messenger cable

(Kg/
mm)
135.00
13. Slipping strength of stranded messenger
cable (mass pull off)
KN 5.0 to 6.5
14.

Resonance frequencies
a)First frequency
b)Second frequency

Hz
Hz

As per outline
general
arrangement
drawing of the
manufacture

15. Designed clamping torque Kg-m 6.5
16. Slipping strength of damper clamp
a)Before fatigue test
(b) After fatigue test

KN
KN

2.5
2.0

17 Magnetic Power loss at 350Amp. Watts Not more than 1
watt at 500
Amps

18 Material of Clamp Alum. Alloy
(grad LM-6


Note:- If there is any error or mission in the above GTPs, the same shall conform to
technical specification / relevant ISS.
Page-36

You might also like